Law Reviewer

The Insurance Code

Star InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar Inactive

The Insurance Code

CHAPTER I

 

PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 612

ORDAINING AND INSTITUTING AN INSURANCE CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

I, Ferdinand E. Marcos, President of the Philippines, by virtue of the powers in me vested by the Constitution, do hereby decree & order the following:

GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1.           This Decree shall be known as “The Insurance Code”.

SECTION 2.           Whenever used in this Code, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth or indicated, unless the context otherwise requires:

(1)            A “contract of insurance” is an agreement whereby one undertakes for a consideration to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising fr. an unknown or contingent event.

A contract of suretyship shall be deemed to be an insurance contract, within the meaning of this Code, only if made by a surety who or w/c, as such, is doing an insurance business as hereinafter provided.

(2)            The term “doing an insurance business” or “transacting an insurance business”, within the meaning of this Code, shall include (a) making or proposing to make, as insurer, any insurance contract; (b) making or proposing to make, as surety, any contract of suretyship as a vocation & not as merely incidental to any other legitimate business or activity of the surety; (c) doing any kind of business, including a reinsurance business, specifically recognized as constituting the doing of an insurance business within the meaning of this Code; (d) doing or proposing to do any business in substance equivalent to any of the foregoing in a manner designed to evade the provisions of this Code.

In the application of the provisions of this Code the fact that no profit is derived fr. the making of insurance contracts, agreements or transactions or that no separate or direct consideration is received therefor, shall not be deemed conclusive to show that the making thereof does not constitute the doing or transacting of an insurance business.

(3)            As used in this code, the term “Commissioner” means the “Insurance Commissioner”.  acd

CHAPTER I — THE CONTRACT OF INSURANCE

Title I  WHAT MAY BE INSURED

SECTION 3.           Any contingent or unknown event, whether past or future, w/c may damnify a person having an insurable interest, or create a liability against him, may be insured against, subject to the provisions of this chapter.

The consent of the husband is not necessary for the validity of an insurance policy taken out by a married woman on her life or that of her children.

Any minor of the age of eighteen years or more, may, notwithstanding such minority, contract for life, health & accident insurance, w/ any insurance company duly authorized to do business in the Philippines, provided the insurance is taken on his own life & the beneficiary appointed is the minor’s estate or the minor’s father, mother, husband, wife, child, brother or sister.

The married woman or the minor herein allowed to take out an insurance policy may exercise all the rights & privileges of an owner under a policy.

All rights, title & interest in the policy of  insurance taken out by an original owner on the life or health of a minor shall automatically vest in the minor upon the death of the original owner, unless otherwise provided for in the policy.

SECTION 4.           The preceding section does not authorize an insurance for or against the drawing of any lottery, or for or against any chance or ticket in a lottery drawing a prize.

SECTION 5.           All kinds of insurance are subject to the provisions of this chapter so far as the provisions can apply.

Title II  PARTIES TO THE CONTRACT

SECTION 6.           Every person, partnership, association, or corporation duly authorized to transact insurance business as elsewhere provided in this code, may be an insurer.

SECTION 7.           Anyone except a public enemy may be insured.

SECTION 8.           Unless the policy otherwise provides, where a mortgagor of property effects insurance in his own name providing that the loss shall be payable to the mortgagee, or assigns a policy of insurance to a mortgagee, the insurance is deemed to be upon the interest of the mortgagor, who does not cease to be a party to the original contract, & any act of his, prior to the loss, w/c would otherwise avoid the insurance, will have the same effect, although the property is in the hands of the mortgagee, but any act w/c, under the contract of insurance, is to be performed by the mortgagor, may be performed by the mortgagee therein named, w/ the same effect as if it had been performed by the mortgagor.

SECTION 9.           If an insurer assents to the transfer of an insurance fr. a mortgagor to a mortgagee, &, at the time of his assent, imposes further obligation on the assignee, making a new contract w/ him, the act of the mortgagor cannot affect the rights of said assignee.

Title III  INSURABLE INTEREST

SECTION 10.         Every person has an insurable interest in the life & health:

(a)            Of himself, of his spouse & of his children;

(b)           Of any person on whom he depends wholly or in part for education or support, or in whom he has a pecuniary interest;

(c)            Of any person under a legal obligation to him for the payment of money, or respecting property or services, of w/c death or illness might delay or prevent the performance; &

(d)           Of any person upon whose life any estate or interest vested in him depends.

SECTION 11.         The insured shall have the right to change the beneficiary he designated in the policy, unless he has expressly waived this right in said policy.

SECTION 12.         The interest of a beneficiary in a life insurance policy shall be forfeited when the beneficiary is the principal, accomplice, or accessory in willfully bringing about the death of the insured; in w/c event, the nearest relative of the insured shall receive the proceeds of said insurance if not otherwise disqualified.

SECTION 13.         Every interest in property, whether real or personal, or any relation thereto, or liability in respect thereof, of such nature that a contemplated peril might directly damnify the insured, is an insurable interest.

SECTION 14.         An insurable interest in property may consist in:

(a)            An existing interest;

(b)           An inchoate interest founded on an existing interest; or

(c)            An expectancy, coupled w/ an existing interest in that out of w/c the expectancy arises.

SECTION 15.         A carrier or depository of any kind has an insurable interest in  a thing held by him as such, to the extent of his liability but not to exceed the value thereof.

SECTION 16.         A mere contingent or expectant interest in anything, not founded on an actual right to the thing, nor upon any valid contract for it, is not insurable.

SECTION 17.         The measure of an insurable interest in property is the extent to w/c the insured might be damnified by loss or injury thereof.

SECTION 18.         No contract or policy of insurance on property shall be enforceable except for the benefit of some person having an insurable interest in the property insured.

SECTION 19.         An interest in property insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, & when the loss occurs, but not exist in the meantime; & interest in the life or health of a person insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, but need not exist thereafter or when the loss occurs.

SECTION 20.         Except in the cases specified in the next four sections, & in the cases of life, accident, & health insurance, a change of interest in any part of a thing insured unaccompanied by a corresponding change in interest in the insurance, suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent, until the interest in the thing & the interest in the insurance are vested in the same person.

SECTION 21.         A change in interest in a thing insured, after the occurrence of an injury w/c results in a loss, does not affect the right of the insured to indemnity for the loss.

SECTION 22.         A change of interest in one or more several distinct things, separately insured by one policy, does not avoid the insurance as to the others.

SECTION 23.         A change on interest, by will or succession, on the death of the insured, does not avoid an insurance; & his interest in the insurance passes to the person taking his interest in the thing insured.

SECTION 24.         A transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners, or owners in common, who are jointly insured, to the others, does not avoid an insurance even though it has been agreed that the insurance shall cease upon an alienation of the thing insured.

SECTION 25.         Every stipulation in a policy of insurance for the payment of loss whether the person insured has or has not any interest in the property insured, or that the policy shall be received as proof of such interest, & every policy executed by way of gaming or wagering, is void.

Title IV  CONCEALMENT

SECTION 26.         A neglect to communicate that w/c a party knows & ought to communicate, is called a concealment.

SECTION 27.         A concealment whether intentional or unintentional entitles the injured party to rescind a contract of insurance. (As amended by Batasang Pambansa Blg.  874)

SECTION 28.         Each party to a contract of insurance must communicated to the other, in good faith, all facts within his knowledge w/c are material to the contract & as to w/c he makes no warranty, & w/c the other has not the means of ascertaining.

SECTION 29.         An intentional & fraudulent omission, on the part of one insured, to communicate information of matters proving or tending to prove the falsity of a warranty, entitles the insurer to rescind.

SECTION 30.         Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate information of the matters following, except in answer to the inquiries of the other:

(a)            Those w/c the other knows;

(b)           Those w/c, in the exercise of ordinary care, the other ought to know, & of w/c the former has no reason to suppose him ignorant;

(c)            Those of w/c the other waives communication;

(d)           Those w/c prove or tend to prove the existence of a risk excluded by a warranty, & w/c are not otherwise material; &

(e)            Those w/c relate to a risk excepted fr. the policy & w/c are not otherwise material.

SECTION 31.         Materiality is to be determined not by the event, but solely by the probable & reasonable influence of the facts upon the party to whom the communication is due, in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed contract, or in making his inquiries.

SECTION 32.         Each party to a contract of insurance is bound to know all the general causes w/c are open to his inquiry, equally w/ that of the other, & w/c may affect the political or material perils contemplated; & all general usages of trade.

SECTION 33.         The right to information of material facts may be waived, either by the terms of the insurance or by neglect to make inquiry as to such facts, where they are distinctly implied in other facts of w/c information is communicated.

SECTION 34.         Information of the nature or amount of the interest of one insured need not be communicated unless in answer to an inquiry, except as prescribed by section fifty‑one.

SECTION 35.         Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate, even upon inquiry, information of his own judgment upon the matters in question.

Title V  REPRESENTATION

SECTION 36.         A representation may be oral or written.

SECTION 37.         A representation may be made at the time of, or before, issuance of the policy.

SECTION 38.         The language of a representation is to be interpreted by the same rules as the language of contracts in general.

SECTION 39.         A representation as to the future is to be deemed a promise, unless it appears that it was merely a statement of belief or expectation.

SECTION 40.         A representation cannot qualify an express provision in a contract of insurance, but it may qualify an implied warranty.

SECTION 41.         A representation may be altered or withdrawn before the insurance is effected, but not afterwards.

SECTION 42.         A representation must be presumed to refer to the date on w/c the contract goes into effect.

SECTION 43.         When a person insured has no personal knowledge of a fact, he may nevertheless repeat information w/c he has upon the subject, & w/c he believes to be true, w/ the explanation that he does so on the information of others; or he may submit the information, in its whole extent, to the insurer; & in neither case is he responsible for its truth, unless it proceeds fr. an agent of the insured, whose duty it is to give the information.

SECTION 44.         A representation is to be deemed false when the facts fail to correspond w/ its assertions or stipulations.

SECTION 45.         If a representation is false in a material point, whether affirmative or promissory, the injured party is entitled to rescind the contract fr. the time when the representation becomes false. The right to rescind granted by this Code to the insurer is waived by the acceptance of premium payments despite knowledge of the ground for rescission. (As amended by Batasang Pambansa Blg. 874)

SECTION 46.         The materiality of a representation is determined by the same rules as the materiality of a concealment.

SECTION 47.         The provisions of this chapter apply as well to a modification of a contract of insurance as to its original formation.

SECTION 48.         Whenever a right to rescind a contract of insurance is given to the insurer by any provision of this chapter, such right must be exercised previous to the commencement of an action on the contract.

After a policy of life insurance made payable on the death of the insured shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two years fr. the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, the insurer cannot prove that the policy is void ab initio or is rescindible by reason of the fraudulent concealment or misrepresentation of the insured or his agent.

Title VI  THE POLICY

SECTION 49.         The written instrument in w/c a contract of insurance is set forth, is called a policy of insurance.

SECTION 50.         The policy shall be in printed form w/c may contain blank spaces; & any word, phrase, clause, mark, sign, symbol, signature, number, or word necessary to complete the contract of insurance shall be written on the blank spaces provided therein.

Any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement purporting to be part of the contract of insurance & w/c is pasted or attached to said policy is not binding on the insured, unless the descriptive title or name of the rider, clause, warranty or endorsement is also mentioned & written on the blank spaces provided in the policy.

Unless applied for by the insured or owner, any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement issued after the original policy shall be countersigned by the insured or owner, w/c countersignature shall be taken as his agreement to the contents of such rider, clause, warranty or endorsement.

Group insurance & group annuity policies, however, may be typewritten & need not be in printed form.

SECTION 51.         A policy of insurance must specify:

(a)            The parties between whom the contract is made;

(b)           The amount to be insured except in the cases of open or running policies;

(c)            The premium, or if the insurance is of a character where the exact premium is only determinable upon the termination of the contract, a statement of the basis & rates upon w/c the final premium is to be determined;

(d)           The property or life insured;

(e)            The interest of the insured in property insured, if he is not the absolute owner thereof;

(f)            The risks insured against; &

(g)           The period during w/c the insurance is to continue.

SECTION 52.         Cover notes may be issued to bind insurance temporarily pending the issuance of the policy.  Within sixty days after the issue of the cover note, a policy shall be issued in lieu thereof, including within its terms the identical insurance bound under the cover note & the premium therefor.

Cover notes may be extended or renewed beyond such sixty days w/ the written approval of the Commissioner if he determines that such extension is not contrary to & is not for the purpose of violating any provisions of this Code.  The Commissioner may promulgate rules & regulations governing such extensions for the purpose of preventing such violations & may by such rules & regulations dispense w/ the requirement of written approval by him in the case of extension in compliance w/ such rules & regulations.

SECTION 53.         The insurance proceeds shall be applied exclusively to the proper interest of the person in whose name or for whose benefit it is made unless otherwise specified in the policy.

SECTION 54.         When an insurance contract is executed w/ an agent or trustee as the insured, the fact that his principal or beneficiary is the real party in interest may be indicated by describing the insured as agent or trustee, or by other general words in the policy.

SECTION 55.         To render an insurance effected by one partner or part‑owner, applicable to the interest of his co‑partners or other part‑owners, it is necessary that the terms of the policy should be such as are applicable to the joint or common interest.

SECTION 56.         When the description of the insured in a policy is so general that it may comprehend any person or any class of persons, only he who can show that it was intended to include him can claim the benefit of the policy.

SECTION 57.         A policy may be so framed that it will inure to the benefit of whomsoever, during the continuance of the risk, may become the owner of the interest insured.

SECTION 58.         The mere transfer of a thing insured does not transfer the policy, but suspends it until the same person becomes the owner of both the policy & the thing insured.

SECTION 59.         A policy is either open, valued or running.

SECTION 60.         An open policy is one in w/c the value of the thing insured is not agreed upon, but is left to be ascertained in case of loss.

SECTION 61.         A valued policy is one w/c expresses on its face an agreement that the thing insured shall be valued at a specific sum.

SECTION 62.         A running policy is one w/c contemplates successive insurances, & w/c provides that the object of the policy may be fr. time to time defined, especially as to the subjects of insurance, by additional statements or indorsements.

SECTION 63.         A condition, stipulation, or agreement in any policy of insurance, limiting the time for commencing an action thereunder to a period of less than one year fr. the time when the cause of action accrues, is void.

SECTION 64.         No policy of insurance other than life shall be cancelled by the insurer except upon prior notice thereof to the insured, & no notice of cancellation shall be effective unless it is based on the occurrence, after the effective date of the policy, of one or more of the following:

(a)            non‑payment of premium;

(b)           conviction of a crime arising out of acts increasing the hazard insured against;

(c)            discovery of fraud or material misrepresentation;

(d)           discovery of willful or reckless acts or omissions increasing the hazard insured against;

(e)            physical changes in the property insured w/c result in the property becoming uninsurable; or

(f)            a determination by the Commissioner that the continuation of the policy would violate or would place the insurer in violation of this Code.

SECTION 65.         All notices of cancellation mentioned in the preceding section shall be in writing, mailed or delivered to the named insured at the address shown in the policy, & shall state (a) w/c of the grounds set forth in section sixty‑four is relied upon & (b) that, upon written request of the named insured, the insurer will furnish the facts on w/c the cancellation is based.

SECTION 66.         In case of insurance other than life, unless the insurer at least forty‑five days in advance of the end of the policy period mails or delivers to the named insured at the address shown in the policy notice of its intention not to renew the policy or to condition its renewal upon reduction of limits or elimination of coverages, the named insured shall be entitled to renew the policy upon payment of the premium due on the effective date of the renewal.  Any policy written for a term of less than one year shall be considered as if written for a term of one year.  Any policy written for a term longer than one year or any policy w/ no fixed expiration date shall be considered as if written for successive policy periods or terms of one year.

Title VII  WARRANTIES

SECTION 67.         A warranty is either expressed or implied.

SECTION 68.         A warranty may relate to the past, the present, the future, or to any or all of these.

SECTION 69.         No particular form of words is necessary to create a warranty.

SECTION 70.         Without prejudice to section fifty‑one, every express warranty, made at or before the execution of a policy, must be contained in the policy itself, or in another instrument signed by the insured & referred to in the policy as making a part of it.

SECTION 71.         A statement in a policy of matter relating to the person or thing insured, or to the risk, as a fact, is an express warranty thereof.

SECTION 72.         A statement in a policy w/c imparts that it is intended to do or not to do a thing w/c materially affects the risk, is a warranty that such act or omission shall take place.

SECTION 73.         When, before the time arrives for the performance of a warranty relating to the future, a loss insured against happens, or performance becomes unlawful at the place of the contract, or impossible, the omission to fulfill the warranty does not avoid the policy.

SECTION 74.         The violation of a material warranty, or other material provision of a policy, on the part of either party thereto, entitles the other to rescind.

SECTION 75.         A policy may declare that a violation of specified provisions thereof shall avoid it, otherwise the breach of an immaterial provision does not avoid the policy.

SECTION 76.         A breach of warranty without fraud merely exonerates an insurer fr. the time that it occurs, or where it is broken in its inception, prevents the policy fr. attaching to the risk.

Title VIII  PREMIUM

SECTION 77.         An insurer is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the thing insured is exposed to the peril insured against.  Notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, no policy or contract of insurance issued by an insurance company is valid & binding unless & until the premium thereof has been paid, except in the case of a life or an industrial life policy whenever the grace period provision applies.

SECTION 78.         An acknowledgment in a policy or contract of insurance or the receipt of premium is conclusive evidence of its payment, so far as to make the policy binding, notwithstanding any stipulation therein that it shall not be binding until the premium is actually paid.

SECTION 79.         A person insured is entitled to a return of premium, as follows:

(a)            To the whole premium if no part of his interest in the thing insured be exposed to any of the perils insured against;

(b)           Where the insurance is made for a definite period of time & the insured surrenders his policy, to such portion of the premium as corresponds w/ the unexpired time, at a pro rata rate, unless a short period rate has been agreed upon & appears on the face of the policy, after deducting fr. the whole premium any claim for loss or damage under the policy w/c has previously accrued; Provided, That no holder of a life insurance policy may avail himself of the privileges of this paragraph without sufficient cause as otherwise provided by law.

SECTION 80.         If a peril insured against has existed, & the insurer has been liable for any period, however short, the insured is not entitled to return of premiums, so far as that particular risk is concerned.

SECTION 81.         A person insured is entitled to return of the premium when the contract is voidable, on account of fraud or misrepresentation of the insurer, or of his agent, or on account of facts, the existence of w/c the insured was ignorant without his fault; or when by any default of the insured other than actual fraud, the insurer never incurred any liability under the policy.

SECTION 82.         In case of an over‑insurance by several insurers, the insured is entitled to a ratable return of the premium, proportioned to the amount by w/c the aggregate sum insured in all the policies exceeds the insurable value of the thing at risk.

Title IX   LOSS

SECTION 83.         An agreement not to transfer the claim of the insured against the insurer after the loss has happened, is void if made before the loss except as otherwise provided in the case of life insurance.

SECTION 84.         Unless otherwise provided by the policy, an insurer is liable for a loss of w/c a peril insured against was the proximate cause, although a peril not contemplated by the contract may have been a remote cause of the loss; but he is not liable for a loss w/c the peril insured against was only a remote cause.

SECTION 85.         An insurer is liable where the thing insured is rescued fr. a peril insured against that would otherwise have caused a loss, if, in the course of such rescue, the thing is exposed to a peril not insured against, w/c permanently deprives the insured of its possession, in whole or in part; or where a loss is caused by efforts to rescue the thing insured fr. a peril insured against.

SECTION 86.         Where a peril is especially excepted in a contract of insurance, a loss, w/c would not have occurred but for such peril, is thereby excepted although the immediate cause of the loss was a peril w/c was not excepted.

SECTION 87.         An insurer is not liable for a loss caused by the willful act or through the connivance of the insured; but he is not exonerated by the negligence of the insured, or of the insurance agents or others.

Title X   NOTICE OF LOSS

SECTION 88.         In case of loss upon an insurance against fire, an insurer is exonerated, if notice thereof be not given to him by an insured, or some person entitled to the benefit of the insurance, without unnecessary delay.

SECTION 89.         When a preliminary proof of loss is required by a policy, the insured is not bound to give such proof as would be necessary in a court of justice; but it is sufficient for him to give the best evidence w/c he has in his power at the time.

SECTION 90.         All defects in a notice of loss, or in preliminary proof thereof, w/c the insured might remedy, & w/c the insurer omits to specify to him, without unnecessary delay, as grounds of objection, are waived.

SECTION 91.         Delay in the presentation to an insurer of notice or proof of loss is waived if caused by any act of him, or if he omits to take objection promptly & specifically upon that ground.

SECTION 92.         If the policy requires, by way of preliminary proof of loss, the certificate or testimony of a person other than the insured, it is sufficient for the insured to use reasonable diligence to procure it, & in case of the refusal of such person to give it, then to furnish reasonable evidence to the insurer that such refusal was not induced by any just grounds of disbelief in the facts necessary to be certified or testified.

Title XI  DOUBLE INSURANCE

SECTION 93.         A double insurance exists where the same person is insured by several insurers separately in respect to the same subject & interest.

SECTION 94.         Where the insured is overinsured by double insurance:

(a)            The insured, unless the policy otherwise provides, may claim payment fr. the insurers in such order as he may select, up to the amount for w/c the insurers are severally liable under their respective contracts;

(b)           Where the policy under w/c the insured claims is a valued policy, the insured must give credit as against the valuation for any sum received by him under any other policy without regard to the actual value of the subject matter insured;

(c)            Where the policy under w/c the insured claims is an unvalued policy he must give credit, as against the full insurable value, for any sum received by him under any policy;

(d)           Where the insured receives any sum in excess of the valuation in the case of valued policies, or of the insurable value in the case of unvalued policies, he must hold such sum in trust for the insurers, according to their right of contribution among themselves;

(e)            Each insurer is bound, as between himself & the other insurers, to contribute ratably to the loss in proportion to the amount for w/c he is liable under his contract.

Title XII   REINSURANCE

SECTION 95.         A contract of reinsurance is one by w/c an insurer procures a third person to insure him against loss or liability by reason of such original insurance.

SECTION 96.         Where an insurer obtains reinsurance, except under automatic reinsurance treaties, he must communicate all the representations of the original insured, & also all the knowledge & information he possesses, whether previously or subsequently acquired, w/c are material to the risk.

SECTION 97.         A reinsurance is presumed to be a contract of indemnity against liability, & not merely against damage.

SECTION 98.         The original insured has no interest in a contract of reinsurance.

CHAPTER II — CLASSES OF INSURANCE

Title I  MARINE INSURANCE

Sub‑Title 1‑ A   DEFINITION

SECTION 99.         Marine Insurance includes:

(1)           Insurance against loss of or damage to:

(a)            Vessels, craft, aircraft, vehicles, goods, freights, cargoes, merchandise, effects, disbursements, profits, moneys, securities, choses in action, evidences of debts, valuable papers, bottomry, & respondentia interests & all other kinds of property & interests therein, in respect to, appertaining to or in connection w/ any & all risks or perils of navigation, transit or transportation, or while being assembled, packed, crated, baled, compressed or similarly prepared for shipment or while awaiting shipment, or during any delays, storage, transhipment, or reshipment incident thereto, including war risks, marine builder’s risks, & all personal property floater risks;

(b)           Person or property in connection w/ or appertaining to a marine, inland marine, transit or transportation insurance, including liability for loss of or damage arising out of or in connection w/ the construction, repair, operation, maintenance or use of the subject matter of such insurance (but not including life insurance or surety bonds nor insurance against loss by reason of bodily injury to any person arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of automobiles);

(c)            Precious stones, jewels, jewelry, precious metals, whether in course of transportation or otherwise;

(d)           Bridges, tunnels & other instrumentalities of transportation & communication (excluding buildings, their furniture & furnishings, fixed contents & supplies held in storage); piers, wharves, docks & slips, & other aids to navigation & transportation, including dry docks & marine railways, dams & appurtenant facilities for the control of waterways.

(2)           “Marine protection & indemnity insurance,” meaning insurance against, or against legal liability of the insured for loss, damage, or expense incident to ownership, operation, chartering, maintenance, use, repair, or construction of any vessel, craft or instrumentality in use of ocean or inland waterways, including liability of the insured for personal injury, illness or death or for loss of or damage to the property of another person.

Sub‑Title 1‑B  INSURABLE INTEREST

SECTION 100.       The owner of a ship has in all cases an insurable interest in it, even when it has been chartered by one who covenants to pay him its value in case of loss:  Provided, That in this case the insurer shall be liable for only that part of the loss w/c the insured cannot recover fr. the charterer.

SECTION 101.       The insurable interest of the owner of the ship hypothecated by bottomry is only the excess of its value over the amount secured by bottomry.

SECTION 102.       Freightage, in the sense of a policy of marine insurance, signifies all the benefits derived by the owner, either fr. the chartering of the ship or its employment for the carriage of his own goods or those of others.

SECTION 103.       The owner of a ship has an insurable interest in expected freightage w/c according to the ordinary & probable course of things he would have earned but for the intervention of a peril insured against or other peril incident to the voyage.

SECTION 104.       The interest mentioned in the last section exists, in case of a charter party, when the ship has broken ground on the chartered voyage.  If a price is to be paid for the carriage of goods it exists when they are actually on board, or there is some contract for putting them on board, & both ship & goods are ready for the specified voyage.

SECTION 105.       One who has an interest in the thing fr. w/c profits are expected to proceed has an insurable interest in the profits.

SECTION 106.       The charterer of a ship has an insurable interest in it, to the extent that he is liable to be damnified by its loss.

Sub‑Title 1‑C  CONCEALMENT

SECTION 107.       In marine insurance each party is bound to communicate, in addition to what is required by section twenty‑eight, all the information w/c he possesses, material to the risk, except such as is mentioned in Section thirty, & to state the exact & whole truth in relation to all matters that he represents, or upon inquiry discloses or assumes to disclose.

SECTION 108.       In marine insurance, information of the belief or expectation of a third person, in reference to a material fact, is material.

SECTION 109.       A person insured by a contract of marine insurance is presumed to have knowledge, at the time of insuring, of a prior loss, if the information might possibly have reached him in the usual mode of transmission & at the usual rate of communication.

SECTION 110.       A concealment in a marine insurance, in respect to any of the following matters, does not vitiate the entire contract, but merely exonerates the insurer fr. a loss resulting fr. the risk concealed:

(a)            The national character of the insured;

(b)           The liability of the thing insured to capture & detention;

(c)            The liability to seizure fr. breach of foreign laws of trade;

(d)           The want of necessary documents;

(e)            The use of false & simulated papers.

Sub‑Title 1‑D  REPRESENTATION

SECTION 111.       If a representation by a person insured by a contract of marine insurance, is intentionally false in any material respect, or in respect of any fact on w/c the character & nature of the risk depends, the insurer may rescind the entire contract.

SECTION 112.       The eventual falsity of a representation as to expectation does not, in the absence of fraud, avoid a contract of marine insurance.

Sub‑Title 1‑E  IMPLIED WARRANTIES

SECTION 113.       In every marine insurance upon a ship or freight, or freightage, or upon any thing w/c is the subject of marine insurance,  a warranty is implied that the ship is seaworthy.

SECTION 114.       A ship is seaworthy when reasonably fit to perform the service & to encounter the ordinary perils of the voyage contemplated by the parties to the policy.

SECTION 115.       An implied warranty of seaworthiness is complied w/ if the ship be seaworthy at the time of the of commencement of the risk, except in the following cases:

(a)            When the insurance is made for a specified length of time, the implied warranty is not complied w/ unless the ship be seaworthy at the commencement of every voyage it undertakes during that time;

(b)           When the insurance is upon the cargo w/c, by the terms of the policy, description of the voyage, or established custom of the trade, is to be transhipped at an intermediate port, the implied warranty is not complied w/ unless each vessel upon w/c the cargo is shipped, or transhipped, be seaworthy at the commencement of each particular voyage.

SECTION 116.       A warranty of seaworthiness extends not only to the condition of the structure of the ship itself, but requires that it be properly laden, & provided w/ a competent master, a sufficient number of competent officers & seamen, & the requisite appurtenances & equipment, such as ballasts, cables & anchors, cordage & sails, food, water, fuel & lights, & other necessary or proper stores & implements for the voyage.

SECTION 117.       Where different portions of the voyage contemplated by a policy differ in respect to the things requisite to make the ship seaworthy therefor, a warranty of seaworthiness is complied w/ if, at the commencement of each portion, the ship is seaworthy w/ reference to that portion.

SECTION 118.       When the ship becomes unseaworthy during the voyage to w/c an insurance relates, an unreasonable delay in repairing the defect exonerates the insurer on ship or shipowner’s interest fr. liability fr. any loss arising therefr..

SECTION 119.       A ship w/c is seaworthy for the purpose of an insurance upon the ship may, nevertheless, by reason of being unfitted to receive the cargo, be unseaworthy for the purpose of the insurance upon the cargo.

SECTION 120.       Where the nationality or neutrality of a ship or cargo is expressly warranted, it is implied that the ship will carry the requisite documents to show such nationality or neutrality & that it will not carry any documents w/c cast reasonable suspicion thereon.

Sub‑Title 1‑F  THE VOYAGE AND DEVIATION

SECTION 121.       When the voyage contemplated by a marine insurance policy is described by the places of beginning & ending, the voyage insured in one w/c conforms to the course of sailing fixed by mercantile usage between those places.

SECTION 122.       If the course of sailing is not fixed by mercantile usage, the voyage insured by a marine insurance policy is that way between the places specified, w/c to a master of ordinary skill & discretion, would mean the most natural, direct & advantageous.

SECTION 123.       Deviation is a departure fr. the course of the voyage insured, mentioned in the last two sections, or an unreasonable delay in pursuing the voyage or the commencement of an entirely different voyage.

SECTION 124.       A deviation is proper:

(a)            When caused by circumstances over w/c neither the master nor the owner of the ship has any control;

(b)           When necessary to comply w/ a warranty, or to avoid a peril, whether or not the peril is insured against;

(c)            When made in good faith, & upon reasonable grounds of belief in its necessity to avoid a peril; or

(d)           When made in good faith, for the purpose of saving human life or relieving another vessel in distress.

SECTION 125.       Every deviation not specified in the last section is improper.

SECTION 126.       An insurer is not liable for any loss happening to the thing insured subsequent to an improper deviation.

Sub‑Title 1‑G  LOSS

SECTION 127.       A loss may be either total or partial.

SECTION 128.       Every loss w/c is not total is partial.

SECTION 129.       A total loss may be either actual or constructive.

SECTION 130.       An actual total loss is cause by:

(a)            A total destruction of the thing insured;

(b)           The irretrievable loss of the thing by sinking, or by being broken up;

(c)            Any damage to the thing w/c renders it valueless to the owner for the purpose for w/c he held it; or

(d)           Any other event w/c effectively deprives the owner of the possession, at the port of destination, of the thing insured.

SECTION 131.       A constructive total loss is one w/c gives to a person insured a right to abandon, under Section one hundred thirty‑nine.

SECTION 132.       An actual loss may be presumed fr. the continued absence of a ship without being heard of. The length of time w/c is sufficient to raise this presumption depends on the circumstances of the case.

SECTION 133.       When a ship is prevented, at an intermediate port, fr. completing the voyage, by the perils insured against, the liability of a marine insurer on the cargo continues after they are thus reshipped.

Nothing in this section shall prevent an insurer fr. requiring an additional premium if the hazard be increased by this extension of liability.

SECTION 134.       In addition to the liability mentioned in the last section, a marine insurer is bound for damages, expenses of discharging, storage, reshipment, extra freightage, & all other expenses incurred in saving cargo reshipped pursuant to the last section, up to the amount insured.

Nothing in this or in the preceding section shall render a marine insurer liable for any amount in excess of the insured value or, if there be none, of the insurable value.

SECTION 135.       Upon an actual total loss, a person insured is entitled to payment without notice of abandonment.

SECTION 136.       Where it has been agreed that an insurance upon a particular thing, or class of things, shall be free fr. particular average, a marine insurer is not liable for any particular average loss not depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the whole of such thing, or class of things, even though it becomes entirely worthless; but such insurer is liable for his proportion of all general average loss assessed upon the thing insured.

SECTION 137.       An insurance confined in terms to an actual loss does not cover a constructive total loss, but covers any loss, w/c necessarily results in depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the entire thing insured.

Sub‑Title 1‑H  ABANDONMENT

SECTION 138.       Abandonment, in marine insurance, is the act of the insured by w/c, after a constructive total loss, he declares the relinquishment to the insurer of his interest in the thing insured.

SECTION 139.       A person insured by a contract of marine insurance may abandon the thing insured, or any particular portion thereof separately valued by the policy, or otherwise separately insured, & recover for a total loss thereof, when the cause of the loss is a peril insured against:

(a)            If more than three‑fourths thereof in value is actually lost, or would have to be expended to recover it fr. the peril;

(b)           If it is injured to such an extent as to reduce its value more than three‑fourths;

(c)            If the thing insured is a ship, & the contemplated voyage cannot be lawfully performed without incurring either an expense to the insured of more than three‑fourths the value of the thing abandoned or a risk w/c a prudent man would not take under the circumstances; or

(d)           If the thing insured, being cargo or freightage, & the voyage cannot be performed, nor another ship procured by the master, within a reasonable time & w/ reasonable diligence, to forward the cargo, without incurring the like expense or risk mentioned in the preceding sub‑paragraph. But freightage cannot in any case be abandoned unless the ship is also abandoned.

SECTION 140.       An abandonment must be neither partial nor conditional.

SECTION 141.       An abandonment must be made within a reasonable time after receipt of reliable information of the loss, but where the information is of a doubtful character, the insured is entitled to a reasonable time to make inquiry.

SECTION 142.       Where the information upon w/c an abandonment has been made proves incorrect, or the thing insured was so far restored when the abandonment was made that there was then in fact no total loss, the abandonment becomes ineffectual.

SECTION 143.       Abandonment is made by giving notice thereof to the insurer, w/c may be done orally, or in writing; Provided, That if the notice be done orally, a written notice of such abandonment shall be submitted within seven days fr. such oral notice.

SECTION 144.       A notice of abandonment must be explicit, & must specify the particular cause of the abandonment, but need state only enough to show that there is probable cause therefor, & need not be accompanied w/ proof of interest or of loss.

SECTION 145.       An abandonment can be sustained only upon the cause specified in the notice thereof.

SECTION 146.       An abandonment is equivalent to a transfer by the insured of his interest to the insurer, w/ all the chances of recovery & indemnity.

SECTION 147.       If a marine insurer pays for a loss as if it were an actual total loss, he is entitled to whatever may remain of the thing insured, or its proceeds or salvage, as if there had been a formal abandonment.

SECTION 148.       Upon an abandonment, acts done in good faith by those who were agents of the insured in respect to the thing insured, subsequent to the loss, are at the risk of the insurer & for his benefit.

SECTION 149.       Where notice of abandonment is properly given, the rights of the insured are not prejudiced by the fact that the insurer refuses to accept the abandonment.

SECTION 150.       The acceptance of an abandonment may be either express or implied fr. the conduct of the insurer. The mere silence of the insurer for an unreasonable length of time after notice shall be construed as an acceptance.

SECTION 151.       The acceptance of an abandonment, whether express or implied, is conclusive upon the parties, & admits the loss & the sufficiency of the abandonment.

SECTION 152.       An abandonment once made & accepted is irrevocable, unless the ground upon w/c it was made proves to be unfounded.

SECTION 153.       On an accepted abandonment of a ship, freightage earned previous to the loss belongs to the insurer of said freightage; but freightage subsequently earned belongs to the insurer of the ship.

SECTION 154.       If an insurer refuses to accept a valid abandonment, he is liable as upon actual total loss, deducting fr. the amount any proceeds of the thing insured w/c may have come to the hands of the insured.

SECTION 155.       If a person insured omits to abandon, he may nevertheless recover his actual loss.

Sub‑Title 1‑I  MEASURE OF INDEMNITY

SECTION 156.       A valuation in a policy of marine insurance in conclusive between the parties thereto in the adjustment of either a partial or total loss, if the insured has some interest at risk, & there is no fraud on his part; except that when a thing has been hypothecated by bottomry or respondentia, before its insurance, & without the knowledge of the person actually procuring the insurance, he may show the real value. But a valuation fraudulent in fact, entitles the insurer to rescind the contract.

SECTION 157.       A marine insurer is liable upon a partial loss, only for such proportion of the amount insured by him as the loss bears to the value of the whole interest of the insured in the property insured.

SECTION 158.       Where profits are separately insured in a contract of marine insurance, the insured is entitled to recover, in case of loss, a proportion of such profits equivalent to the proportion w/c the value of the property lost bears to the value of the whole.

SECTION 159.       In case of a valued policy of marine insurance on freightage or cargo, if a part only of the subject is exposed to the risk, the evaluation applies only in proportion to such part.

SECTION 160.       When profits are valued & insured by a contract of marine insurance, a loss of them is conclusively presumed fr. a loss of the property out of w/c they are expected to arise, & the valuation fixes their amount.

SECTION 161.       In estimating a loss under an open policy of marine insurance the following rules are to be observed:

(a)            The value of a ship is its value at the beginning of the risk, including all articles or charges w/c add to its permanent value or w/c are necessary to prepare it for the voyage insured;

(b)           The value of the cargo is its actual cost to the insured, when laden on board, or where the cost cannot be ascertained, its market value at the time & place of lading, adding the charges incurred in purchasing & placing it on board, but without reference to any loss incurred in raising money for its purchase, or to any drawback on its exportation, or to the fluctuation of the market at the port of destination, or to expenses incurred on the way or on arrival;

(c)            The value of freightage is the gross freightage, exclusive of primage, without reference to the cost of earning it; &

(d)           The cost of insurance is in each case to be added to the value thus estimated.

SECTION 162.       If cargo insured against partial loss arrives at the port of destination in a damaged condition, the loss of the insured is deemed to be the same proportion of the value w/c the market price at that port, of the thing so damaged, bears to the market price it would have brought if sound.

SECTION 163.       A marine insurer is liable for all the expenses attendant upon a loss w/c forces the ship into port to be repaired; & where it is stipulated in the policy that the insured shall labor for the recovery of the property, the insurer is liable for the expense incurred thereby, such expense, in either case, being in addition to a total loss, if that afterwards occurs.

SECTION 164.       A marine insurer is liable for a loss falling upon the insured, through a contribution in respect to the thing insured, required to be made by him towards a general average loss called for by a peril insured against; provided, that the liability of the insurer shall be limited to the proportion of contribution attaching to his policy value where this is less than the contributing value of the thing insured.

SECTION 165.       When a person insured by a contract of marine insurance has a demand against others for contribution, he may claim the whole loss fr. the insurer, subrogating him to his own right to contribution. But no such claim can be made upon the insurer after the separation of the interests liable to the contribution, nor when the insured, having the right & opportunity to enforce the contribution fr. others, has neglected or waived the exercise of that right.

SECTION 166.       In the case of a partial loss of ship or its equipment, the old materials are to be applied towards payment for the new. Unless otherwise stipulated in the policy, a marine insurer is liable for only two‑thirds of the remaining cost of repairs after such deduction, except that anchors must be paid in full.

Title II  FIRE INSURANCE

SECTION 167.       As used in this Code, the term “fire insurance” shall include insurance against loss by fire, lightning, windstorm, tornado or earthquake & other allied risks, when such risks are covered by extension to fire insurance policies or under separate policies.

SECTION 168.       An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured fr. that to w/c it is limited by the policy made without the consent of the insurer, by means within the control of the insured, & increasing the risks, entitles an insurer to rescind a contract of fire insurance.

SECTION 169.       An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured fr. that to w/c it is limited by the policy, w/c does not increase the risk, does not affect a contract of fire insurance.

SECTION 170.       A contract of fire insurance is not affected by any act of the insured subsequent to the execution of the policy, w/c does not violate its provisions, even though it increases the risk & is the cause of the loss.

SECTION 171.       If there is no valuation in the policy, the measure of indemnity in an insurance against fire is the expense it would be to the insured at the time of the commencement of the fire to replace the thing lost or injured in the condition in w/c at the time of the injury; but if there is a valuation in a policy of fire insurance, the effect shall be the same as in a policy of marine insurance.

SECTION 172.       Whenever the insured desires to have a valuation named in his policy, insuring any building or structure against fire, he may require such building or structure to be examined by an independent appraiser & the value of the insured’s interest therein may then be fixed as between the insurer & the insured. The cost of such examination shall be paid for by the insured. A clause shall be inserted in such policy stating substantially that the value of the insured’s interest in such building or structure has been thus fixed. In the absence of any change increasing the risk without the consent of the insurer or of fraud on the part of the insured, then in case of a total loss under such policy, the whole amount so insured upon the insured’s interest in such building or structure, as stated in the policy upon w/c the insurers have received a premium, shall be paid, & in case of a partial loss the full amount of the partial loss shall be so paid, & in case there are two or more policies covering the insured’s interest therein, each policy shall contribute pro rata to the payment of such whole or partial loss. But in no case shall the insurer be required to pay more than the amount thus stated in such policy. This section shall not prevent the parties fr. stipulating in such policies concerning the repairing, rebuilding or replacing of buildings or structures wholly or partially damaged or destroyed.

SECTION 173.       No policy of fire insurance shall be pledged, hypothecated, or transferred to any person, firm or company who acts as agent for or otherwise represents the issuing company, & any such pledge, hypothecation, or transfer hereafter made shall be void & of no effect insofar as it may affect other creditors of the insured.

Title III  CASUALTY INSURANCE

SECTION 174.       Casualty insurance is insurance covering loss or liability arising fr. accident or mishap, excluding certain types of loss w/c by law or custom are considered as falling exclusively within the scope of other types of insurance such as fire or marine. It includes, but is not limited to, employer’s liability insurance, motor vehicle liability insurance, plate glassinsurance, burglary & theft insurance, personal accident & health insurance as written by non‑life insurance companies, & other substantially similar kinds of insurance.

Title IV  SURETYSHIP

SECTION 175.       A contract of suretyship is an agreement whereby a party called the surety guarantees the performance by another party called the principal or obligor of an obligation or undertaking in favor of a third party called the obligee. It includes official recognizances, stipulations, bonds or undertakings issued by any company by virtue of & under the provisions of Act No. 536, as amended by Act No. 2206.

SECTION 176.       The liability of the surety or sureties shall be joint & several w/ the obligor & shall be limited to the amount of the bond. It is determined strictly by the terms of the contract of suretyship in relation to the principal contract between the obligor & the obligee. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 177.       The surety is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the contract of suretyship or bond is perfected & delivered to the obligor. No contract of suretyship or bonding shall be valid & binding unless & until the premium therefor has been paid, except where the obligee has accepted the bond, in w/c case the bond becomes valid & enforceable irrespective of whether or not the premium has been paid by the obligor to the surety; Provided, That if the contract of suretyship or bond is not accepted by, or filed w/ the obligee, the surety shall collect only reasonable amount, not exceeding fifty per centum of the premium due thereon as service fee plus the cost of stamps or other taxes imposed for the issuance of the contract or bond; Provided, however, That if the non‑acceptance of the bond be due to the fault or negligence of the surety, no such service fee, stamps or taxes shall be collected.

In the case of a continuing bond, the obligor shall pay the subsequent annual premium as it falls due until the contract of suretyship is cancelled by the obligee or by the Commissioner or by a court of competent jurisdiction, as the case may be.

SECTION 178.       Pertinent provisions of the Civil Code of the Philippines shall be applied in a suppletory character whenever necessary in interpreting the provisions of a contract of suretyship.

Title V  LIFE INSURANCE

SECTION 179.       Life insurance is insurance on human lives & insurance appertaining thereto or connected therewith.

SECTION 180.       An insurance upon life may be made payable on the death of the person, or on his surviving a specified period, or otherwise contingently on the continuance or cessation of life.

Every contract or pledge for the payment of endowments or annuities shall be considered a life insurance contract for purpose of this Code

In the absence of a judicial guardian, the father, or in the latter’s absence or incapacity, the mother, or any minor, who is an insured or a beneficiary under a contract of life, health or accident insurance, may exercise, in behalf of said minor, any right under the policy, without necessity of court authority or the giving of a bond, where the interest of the minor in the particular act involved does not exceed twenty thousand pesos. Such right may include, but shall not be limited to, obtaining a policy loan, surrendering the policy, receiving the proceeds of the policy, & giving the minor’s consent to any transaction on the policy.

SECTION 180‑A.   The insurer in a life insurance contract shall be liable in case of suicides only when it is committed after the policy has been in force for a period of two years fr. the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, unless the policy provides  a shorter period: Provided, however, That suicide committed in the state of insanity shall be compensable regardless of the date of commission. (As amended  by Batasang Pambansa Blg. 874)

SECTION 181.       A policy of insurance upon life or health may pass by transfer, will or succession to any person, whether he has an insurable interest or not, & such person may recover upon it whatever the insured might have recovered.

SECTION 182.       Notice to an insurer of a transfer or bequest thereof is not necessary to preserve the validity of a policy of insurance upon life or health, unless thereby expressly required.

SECTION 183.       Unless the interest of a person insured is susceptible of exact pecuniary measurement, the measure of indemnity under a policy of insurance upon life or health is the sum fixed in the policy.

CHAPTER III — THE BUSINESS OF INSURANCE

Title I  INSURANCE COMPANIES: ORGANIZATION, CAPITALIZATION AND AUTHORIZATION

SECTION 184.       For purposes of this Code, the term “insurer” or “insurance company” shall include all individuals, partnerships, associations, or corporations, including government‑owned or controlled corporations or entities, engaged as principals in the insurance business, excepting mutual benefit associations. Unless the context otherwise requires, the terms shall also include professional reinsurers defined in section two hundred eighty. “Domestic company” shall include companies formed, organized or existing under the laws of the Philippines. “Foreign company” when used without limitation shall include companies formed, organized, or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines.

SECTION 185.       Corporations formed or organized to save any person or persons or other corporations harmless fr. loss, damage, or liability arising fr. any unknown or future or contingent event, or to indemnify or to compensate any person or persons or other corporations for any such loss, damage, or liability, or to guarantee the performance of or compliance w/ contractual obligations or the payment of debt of others shall be known as “insurance corporations”.

The provisions of the Corporation Law shall apply to all insurance corporations now or hereafter engaged in business in the Philippines insofar as they do not conflict w/ the provisions of this chapter.

SECTION 186.       No person, partnership, or association of persons shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines except as agent of a person or corporation authorized to do the business of insurance in the Philippines, unless possessed of the capital & assets required of an insurance corporation doing the same kind of business in the Philippines & invested in the same manner; nor unless the Commissioner shall have granted to him or them a certificate to the effect that he or they have complied w/ all the provisions of law w/c an insurance corporation doing business in the Philippines is required to observe.

Every person, partnership, or association receiving any such certificate of authority shall be subject to the insurance laws of the Philippines & to the jurisdiction & supervision of the Commissioner in the same manner as if an insurance corporation authorized by the laws of the Philippines to engage in the business of insurance specified in the certificate.

SECTION 187.       No insurance company shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines until after it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose fr. the Commissioner upon application therefor & payment by the company concerned of the fees hereinafter prescribed.

The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any insurance company if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the people of this country. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such company until the Commissioner shall have satisfied himself by such examination as he may make & such evidence as he may require that such company is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein, that the grant of such authority appears to be justified in the light of economic requirements, & that the direction & administration, as well as the integrity & responsibility of the organizers & administrators, the financial organization & the amount of capital, notwithstanding the provisions of section one hundred eighty‑eight, reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders & the public.

In order to maintain the quality of the management of the insurance companies & afford better protection to policyholders & the public in general, any person of good moral character, unquestioned integrity & recognized competence may be elected or appointed director or officer of insurance companies. The Commissioner shall prescribe the qualifications of the executive officers & other key officials of insurance companies for purposes of this section.

No person shall concurrently be a director &/or officer of an insurance company & an adjustment company.

Incumbent directors &/or officers affected by the above provisions are hereby allowed to hold on to their positions until the end of their terms or two years fr. the effectivity of this decree, w/cever is shorter.

Before issuing such certificate of authority, the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the company is not that of any other known company transacting a similar business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public.

Such certificate of authority shall expire on the last day of June of each year & shall be renewed annually if the company is continuing to comply w/ the provisions of this Code or the circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commissioner. Every company receiving any such certificates of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code & other related laws & to the jurisdiction & supervision of the Commissioner.

No insurance company may be authorized to transact in the Philippines the business of life & non‑life insurance concurrently unless specifically authorized to do so; Provided, That the terms “life” & “non‑life” insurance shall be deemed to include health, accident & disability insurance.

No insurance company shall have equity in an adjustment company & neither shall an adjustment company have an equity in an insurance company.

Insurance companies & adjustment companies presently affected by the above provision shall have two years fr. the effectivity of this Decree within w/c to divest of their stockholdings. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455).

SECTION 188.       Except as provided in section two hundred eighty‑one, no domestic insurance company shall, in a stock corporation, engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of a paid‑up capital stock equal to at least five million pesos; Provided, That a domestic insurance company already doing business in the Philippines w/ a paid‑up capital stock w/c is less than five million pesos shall have a paid‑up capital stock of at least three million pesos by December thirty‑one, nineteen hundred seventy‑eight, four million pesos by December thirty‑one, nineteen hundred seventy‑nine & five million pesos by December thirty‑one, nineteen hundred eighty; Provided, further, that the Secretary of Finance may, upon recommendation of the Insurance Commissioner, increase such minimum paid‑up capital stock requirement, under such terms & conditions as he may impose, to an amount w/c, in his opinion, would reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders & the public.

The Commissioner may, as a pre‑licensing requirement of a new insurance company, in addition to the paid‑up capital stock, require the stockholders to pay in cash to the company in proportion to their subscription interests a contributed surplus fund of not less than one million pesos, in the case of a life insurance company, or not less than five hundred thousand pesos, in the case of an insurance company other than life. He may also require such company to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts & disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three years.

If organized as a  mutual company, in lieu of such capital stock, it must have available cash assets of at least five million pesos above all liabilities for losses reported, expenses, taxes, legal reserve, & reinsurance of all outstanding risks, & the contributed surplus fund equal to the amounts required of stock corporations. A stock insurance company doing business in the Philippines may, subject to the pertinent law & regulations w/c now are of hereafter may be in force, alter its organization & transform itself into a mutual insurance company. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455).

SECTION 189.       Every company must, before engaging in the business of insurance in the Philippines, file w/ the Commissioner the following:

(a)            A certified copy of the last annual statement or a verified financial statement exhibiting the condition & affairs of such company;

(b)           If incorporated under the laws of the Philippines, a copy of the articles of incorporation & by‑laws, & any amendments to either, certified by the Securities & Exchange Commission to be a  copy of that w/c is filed in its Office;

(c)            If incorporated under any laws other than those of the Philippines, a certificate fr. the Securities & Exchange Commission showing that it is duly registered in the mercantile registry of that Commission in accordance w/ the Corporation Law. A copy of the articles of incorporation & by‑laws, & any amendments to either, if organized or formed under any law requiring such to be filed, duly certified by the officer having the custody of same, or if not so organized, a copy of the law, charter or deed of settlement under w/c the deed of organization is made, duly certified by the proper custodian thereof, or proved by affidavit to be a copy; also, a certificate under the hand & seal of the proper officer of such state or country having supervision of insurance business therein, if any there be, that such corporation or company is organized under the laws of such state or country, w/ the amount of capital stock or assets & legal reserve required by this Code;

(d)           If not incorporated & of foreign domicile, aside fr. the certificate mentioned in paragraph (c) of this section, a certificate setting forth the nature & character of the business, the location of the principal office, the name of the individual or names of the persons composing the partnership or association, the amount of actual capital employed or to be employed therein & the names of all officers & persons by whom the business is or may be managed.

The certificate must be verified by the affidavit of the chief officer, secretary, agent, or manager of the company; & if there are any written articles of agreement of the company, a copy thereof must be accompany such certificate.

SECTION 190.       The Commissioner must require as a condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines by any foreign insurance company, that such company file in his office a written power of attorney designating some person who shall be a resident of the Philippines as its general agent, on whom any notice provided by law or by any insurance policy, proof of loss, summons & other legal processes may be served in all actions or other legal proceedings against such company, & consenting that service upon such general agent shall be admitted & held as valid as if served upon the foreign company at its home office. Any such foreign company shall, as further condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines, make & file w/ the Commissioner an agreement or stipulation, executed by the proper authorities of said company in form & substance as follows:

“The (name of company) does hereby stipulate & agree in consideration of the permission granted by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business in the Philippines, that if at any time said company shall leave the Philippines, or cease to transact business therein, or shall be without any agent in the Philippines on whom any notice, proof of loss, summons, or legal process may be served, then in any action or proceeding arising out any business or transaction w/c occurred in the Philippines, service of any notice provided by law, or insurance policy, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process may be made upon the Insurance Commissioner shall have the same force & effect as if made upon the company.”

Whenever such service of notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process shall be made upon the Commission, he must, within ten days thereafter, transmit by mail, postage paid, a copy of such notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process to the company at its home or principal office. The sending of such copy by the Commissioner shall be a necessary part of the service of the notice, proof of loss, or other legal process.

SECTION 191.       No insurance company organized or existing under the government or laws other than those of the Philippines shall engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of paid‑up unimpaired capital or assets & reserve not less than that herein required of domestic insurance companies, nor until it shall have deposited w/ the Commissioner for the benefit & security of the policyholders & creditors of such company in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of good securities of the Philippines, including new issues of stock of “registered enterprises”, as this term is defined in Republic Act No. 5186, otherwise known as the Investment Incentives Act, as amended, to the actual market value of not less than the minimum paid‑up capital required of domestic insurance companies: Provided, That at least fifty per centum of such securities shall consist of bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines, its political subdivisions & instrumentalities, or of government‑owned or controlled corporations & entities, including the Central Bank. The total investment of a foreign insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty per centum of the net worth of said foreign insurance company nor twenty per centum of the capital of the registered enterprise, unless previously authorized in writing by the Commissioner.

For purposes of this Code, the net worth of a foreign insurance company shall refer only to its net worth in the Philippines.

SECTION 192.       The Commissioner shall hold the securities, deposited as aforesaid, for the benefit & security of all the policyholders of the company depositing the same, but shall as long as the company is solvent, permit the company to collect the interest or dividends on the securities so deposited, &, fr. time to time, w/ his assent, to withdraw any of such securities, upon depositing w/ said Commissioner other like securities, the market value of w/c shall be equal to the market value of such as may be withdrawn. In the event of any company ceasing to do business in the Philippines the securities deposited as aforesaid shall be returned upon the company’s making application therefor & proving to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that it has no further  liability under any of its policies in the Philippines.

SECTION 193.       Every foreign company doing business in the Philippines shall set aside an amount corresponding to the legal reserves of the policies written in the Philippines & invest & keep the same therein in accordance w/ the provisions of this section. The legal reserve therein required to be set aside shall be invested only in the classes of the Philippine securities described in section two hundred; Provided, however, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall, in the aggregate exceed twenty per centum of the net worth of the investing company or twenty per centum of the capital of the issuing company, w/cever is the lesser unless otherwise approved in writing by the Commissioner. The securities purchased & kept in the Philippines under this section, shall not be sent out of the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines without the written consent of the Commissioner.

Title II   MARGIN OF INSOLVENCY

SECTION 194.       An insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall at all times maintain a margin of solvency w/c shall be an excess of the value of its admitted assets exclusive of its paid‑up capital, in the case of a domestic company, or an excess of the value of its admitted assets in the Philippines, exclusive of its security deposits, in the case of a foreign company, over the amount of its liabilities, unearned premium & reinsurance reserves in the Philippines of at least two per mille of the total amount of its insurance in force as of the preceding calendar year on all policies, except term insurance, in the case of a life insurance company, or of at least ten per centum of the total amount of its net premium written during the preceding calendar year, in the case of a company other than a life insurance company; Provided, That in either case, such margin shall in no event be less than five hundred thousand pesos; & Provided, further, That the term “paid‑up capital” shall not include contributed surplus & capital paid in excess of par value. Such assets, liabilities & reserves shall exclude assets, liabilities & reserves included in separate accounts established in accordance w/ section two hundred thirty‑seven. Whenever the aforementioned margin be found to be less than that herein required to be maintained, the Commissioner shall forthwith direct the company to make good any such deficiency by cash, to be contributed by all stockholders of record in proportion to their respective interest, & paid to the treasurer of the company, within fifteen days fr. receipt of the order; Provided, That the company in the interim shall not be permitted to take any new risk of any kind or character unless & until it make good any such deficiency; Provided, further, that a stockholder who aside fr. paying the contribution due fr. him, pays the contribution due fr. the another stockholder by reason of the failure or refusal of the latter to do so, shall have a lien on the certificates of stock of the insurance company concerned appearing in its books in the name of the defaulting stockholder on the date of default, as well as on any interests or dividends that have accrued or will accrue to the said certificates of stock, until the corresponding payment or reimbursement is made by the defaulting stockholder. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 195.       No domestic insurance corporation shall declare or distribute any dividend on its outstanding stocks except fr. profits attested in a sworn statement to the Commissioner by the president or treasurer of the corporation to be remaining on hand after retaining unimpaired:

(a)            The entire paid‑up capital stock;

(b)           The margin of solvency required by section one hundred ninety‑four;

(c)            In the case of life insurance corporation, the legal reserve fund required by section two hundred eleven;

(d)           In the case of corporations other than life, the legal reserve fund required by section two hundred thirteen;

(e)            A sum sufficient to pay all net losses reported, or in the course of settlement, & all liabilities for expenses & taxes.

Any dividend declared or distributed under the preceding paragraph shall be reported to the Commissioner within thirty days after such declaration or distribution.

If the Commissioner finds that any such corporation has declared or distributed any such dividend in violation of this section, he may order such corporation to cease & desist fr. doing business until the amount of such dividend or the portion thereof in excess of the amount allowed under this section has been restored to said corporation.

Title III   ASSETS

SECTION 196.       In any determination of the financial condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, there shall be allowed & admitted as assets only such assets owned by the insurance company concerned & w/c consist of:

1.             Cash in the possession of the insurance company or in transit under its control, & the true & duly verified balance of any deposit of such company in a financially sound commercial bank or trust company.

2.             Investments in securities, including money market instruments, & in real property acquired or held in accordance w/ & subject to the applicable provisions of this Code & the income realized therefr. or accrued thereon.

3.             Loans granted by the insurance company concerned to the extent of that portion thereof adequately secured by non‑speculative assets w/ readily realizable values in accordance w/ & subject to the limitations imposed by applicable provisions of this Code.

4.             Policy loans & other policy assets & liens on policies, contracts or certificates of a life insurance company, in an amount not exceeding legal reserves & other policy liabilities carried on each individual life insurance policy, contract or certificate.

5.             The net amount of uncollected & deferred premiums & annuity considerations in the case of a life insurance company w/c carries the full mean tabular reserve liability.

6.             Reinsurance recoverable by the ceding insurer: (a) fr. an insurer authorized to transact business in this country, the full amount thereof; or (b) fr. an insurer not authorized in this country, in an amount not exceeding the liabilities carried by the ceding insurer for amounts withheld under a reinsurance treaty w/ such unauthorized insurer as security for the payment of obligations thereunder if such funds are held subject to withdrawal by, & under the control of, the ceding insurer. The Commissioner may prescribe the conditions under w/c a ceding insurer may be allowed credit, as an asset or as a deduction fr. loss & unearned premium reserves, for reinsurance recoverable fr. an insurer not authorized in this country but w/c presents satisfactory evidence that it meets the applicable standards of solvency required in this country.

7.             Funds withheld by a ceding insurer under a reinsurance treaty, provided reserves for unpaid losses & unearned premiums are adequately provided.

8.             Deposits or amounts recoverable fr. underwriting associations, syndicates & reinsurance funds, or fr. any suspended banking institution, to the extent deemed by the Commissioner to be available for the payment of losses & claims & values to be determined by him.

9.             Electronic data processing machines, as may be authorized by the Commissioner to be acquired by the insurance company concerned, the acquisition cost of w/c to be amortized in equal annual amounts within a period of five years fr. the date of acquisition thereof.

10.           Other assets, not inconsistent w/ the provisions of paragraphs 1 to 9 hereof, w/c are deemed by the Commissioner to be readily realizable & available for the payment of losses & claims at values to be determined by him.

SECTION 197.       In addition to such assets as the Commissioner may fr. time to time determine to be non‑admitted assets of insurance companies doing business in the Philippines, the following assets shall in no case be allowed as admitted assets of an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, in any determination of its financial condition:

1.             Goodwill, trade names, & other like intangible assets.

2.             Prepaid or deferred charges for expenses & commissions paid by such insurance company.

3.             Advances to officers (other than policy loans), w/c are not adequately secured & w/c are not previously authorized by the Commissioner, as well as advances to employees, agents, & other persons on mere personal security.

4.             Shares of stock of such insurance company, owned by it, or any equity therein as well as loans secured thereby, or any proportionate interest in such shares of stock through the ownership by such insurance company of an interest in another corporation or business unit.

5.             Furniture, furnishing, fixtures, safes, equipment, library, stationery, literature, & supplies.

6.             Items of bank credits representing checks, drafts or notes returned unpaid after the date of statement.

7.             The amount, if any, by w/c the aggregate value of investments as carried in the ledger assets of such insurance company exceeds the aggregate value thereof as determined in accordance w/ the provisions of this Code &/or the rules of the Commissioner.

All non‑admitted assets & all other assets of doubtful value or character included as ledger or non‑ledger assets in any statement submitted by an insurance company to the Commissioner, or in any insurance examiner’s report to him, shall also be reported, to the extent of the value disallowed as deductions fr. the gross assets of such insurance company, except where the Commissioner permits a reserve to be carried among the liabilities of such insurance company in lieu of any such deduction.

Title IV   INVESTMENTS

SECTION 198.       No insurance company shall loan any of its money or deposits to any person, corporation or association, except upon first mortgage or deeds of trust of unencumbered, improved or unimproved real estate, including condominiums, in cities & centers of population of municipalities in the Philippines when the amount of such loan is not in excess of seventy per centum of the market value of such real estate; or upon the security of first mortgages or deeds of trust of actually cultivated, improved & unencumbered agricultural lands in the Philippines when the amount of such loan is not in excess of forty per centum of the market value of such land; or upon the purchase money mortgages or like securities received by it upon the sale or exchange of real property acquired pursuant to sections two hundred & two hundred two; or upon bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to issue bonds, or upon bonds or other evidences of debt of government‑owned or controlled corporations & instrumentalities including the Central Bank or upon obligations issued or guaranteed by the International Bank for Reconstruction & Development; or upon stocks, bonds or other evidences of debt as are specified in section two hundred.

A life insurance company, however, may lend to any of its policyholders upon the security of the value of its policy such sum as may be determined pursuant to the provisions of the policy.

Loans granted upon the security of real estate for a period longer than five years shall be amortized in monthly, quarterly, semi‑annual or annual installments; Provided, That no such loans shall have a maturity in excess of twenty years.

The phrase “improved real estate” used above is hereby defined to mean land w/ permanent building or buildings erected or being erected thereon. Except as otherwise approved by the Commissioner, in case the building or buildings on land do not belong to the owner of the latter, no loan shall be granted on the security of the real estate in question unless both the owner of the building or buildings & the owner of the land sign the deed of mortgage, & unless the owner of the land is the Government of the Philippines or one of its political subdivisions, in w/c event the owner is not required to sign the deed of mortgage.

SECTION 199.       No loan by any insurance company on the security of real estate shall be made unless the title to such real estate shall have first been registered in accordance w/ the existing Land Registration Act, or shall be a titulo real duly registered, or have been previously registered under the provisions of the existing Mortgage Law.

SECTION 200.       (1) An insurance company may purchase, hold, own & convey such property, real & personal, as may have been mortgaged, pledged, or conveyed to it in good faith in trust for its benefit by reason of money loaned by it in pursuance of the regular business of the company, & such real or personal property as may have been purchased by it at sales under pledges, mortgages or deeds of trust for its benefit on account of money loaned by it; & such real & personal property as may have been conveyed to it by borrowers in satisfaction & discharge of loans made by the company to them: Provided, however, That any real estate purchased by an insurance company in payment or by reason of any loan made by it shall be sold by the company within twenty years after the title thereto has been vested in it.

(2)           An insurance company may purchase, hold, own & convey real & personal property as follows:

(a)            The lot w/ building thereon in w/c the company conducts & carries on its business.

(b)           Bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to issue bonds at the reasonable market value thereof.

(c)            Bonds or other evidences of debt of the government‑owned or controlled corporations & entities, including the Central Bank.

(d)           Bonds, debentures or other evidences of indebtedness of any solvent corporations or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines; Provided, however, That the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing entity or its predecessors shall not have defaulted in the payment of interest on any of its securities & that during each of any three including the last two of the five fiscal years next preceding the date of acquisition by such insurance company of such bonds, debentures, or other evidences of indebtedness, the net earnings of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution available for its fixed charges, as hereinafter defined, shall have been not less than one & one‑quarter times the total of its fixed charges for such year; & provided, further, that no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this sub‑section an amount in excess of twenty‑five per centum of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty‑first next preceding the date of such investment.

As used in this sub‑section the term “net earnings available for fixed charges” shall mean net income after deducting operating & maintenance expenses, taxes other than income taxes, depreciation & depletion; but excluding extraordinary non‑recurring items of income or expense appearing in the regular financial statement of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution. The term “fixed charges” shall include interest on funded & unfunded debt, amortization of debt discount, & rentals for leased properties.

(e)            Preferred or guaranteed stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines; Provided, however, That the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing entity or its predecessors has paid regular dividends upon its preferred or guaranteed stocks for a period of at least three years next preceding the date of investment in such preferred or guaranteed stock; Provided, further, That if the stocks are guaranteed, the amount of stocks so guaranteed is not excess of fifty per centum of the amount of the preferred or common stocks, as the case may be, of the guaranteeing corporation; And provided, finally, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this sub‑section an amount in excess of ten per centum of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty‑first next preceding the date of such investment.

(f)            Common stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines upon w/c regular dividends shall have been paid for the three years next preceding the purchase of such stock; Provided, however, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one corporation or institution in the kinds permitted under this sub‑section an amount in excess of ten per centum of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty‑first next preceding the date of such investment.

(g)           Certificates, notes & other obligations issued by the trustees or receivers of any institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines w/c, or the assets of w/c, are being administered under the direction of any court having jurisdiction; Provided, however, That such certificates, notes or other obligations are adequately secured as to principal & interests.

(h)            Equipment trust obligations or certificates w/c are adequately secured or other adequately secured instruments evidencing an interest in equipment wholly or in part within the Philippines; Provided, however, That there is a right to receive determined portions of rental, purchase or other fixed obligatory payments for the use or purchase of such equipment.

(i)             Any obligation of any corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines w/c is, on the date of acquisition by the insurer, adequately secured & has qualities & characteristics wherein the speculative elements are not predominant.

(j)             Such other securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

(3)           Any domestic insurer w/c has outstanding insurance, annuity or reinsurance contracts in currencies other than the national currency of the Philippines may invest in, or otherwise acquire or loan upon securities & investments in such currency w/c are substantially of the same kinds, classes & investment grades as those eligible for investment under the foregoing subdivisions of this section; but the aggregate amount of such investment & of such cash in such currency w/c is at anytime held by such insurer shall not exceed one & one‑half times the amount of its reserves & other obligations under such contracts or the amount w/c such insurer is required by the law of any country or possession outside the Republic of the Philippines to be invest in such country or possession, w/cever shall be greater.

SECTION 201.       An insurance company may (1) invest in equities of other financial institutions, & (2) engage in the buying & selling of short‑term debt instruments; Provided, That any or all of such investments shall be w/ the prior approval of the Commissioner.

SECTION 202.       Any life insurance company may:

(a)            Acquire or construct housing projects &, in connection w/ any such project, may acquire land or any interest therein by purchase, lease or otherwise, or use land acquired pursuant to any other provision of this Code. Such company may thereafter own, maintain, manage, collect or receive income fr., or sell & convey, any land or interest therein so acquired & any improvements thereon. The aggregate book value of the investments of any such company in all such projects shall not exceed at the time of such investments twenty five per centum of the total admitted assets of such company on the thirty‑first day of December next preceding;

(b)           Acquire real property, other than property to be used primarily for providing housing & property for accommodation of its own business, as an investment for the production of income, or may acquire real property to be improved or developed for such investment purpose pursuant to a program therefor, subject to the condition that the cost of each parcel of real property so acquired under the authority of this paragraph (b), including the estimated cost to the company of the improvement or development thereof, when added to the book value of all other real property held by its pursuant to this paragraph (b), shall not exceed twenty‑five per centum of its admitted assets as of the thirty‑first day of December next preceding.

SECTION 203.       Every domestic insurance company shall, to the extent of an amount equal in value to twenty‑five per centum of the minimum paid‑up capital required under section one hundred eighty‑eight, invest its funds only in securities, satisfactory to the Commissioner, consisting of bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government‑owned or controlled corporations & entities, including the Central Bank of the Philippines; Provided, That such investments shall at all times be maintained free fr. any lien or encumbrance; & Provided, further, That such securities shall be deposited w/ & held by the Commissioner for the faithful performance by the depositing insurer of all its obligations under its insurance contracts. The provisions of section one hundred ninety‑two shall, so far as practicable, apply to the securities deposited under this section.

Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no judgment creditor or other claimant shall have the right to levy upon any of the securities of the insurer held on deposit under this section or held on deposit pursuant to the requirement of the Commissioner. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 204.       After satisfying the requirements contained in the preceding section, any domestic non‑life insurance company, shall invest, to an amount prescribed below, its funds in, or otherwise, acquire or loan upon, only the classes of investments described in section two hundred, including securities issued by any “registered enterprise”, as this term is defined in Republic Act No. 5186, otherwise known as the Investment Incentives Act, & such other classes of investments as may be authorized by the Commissioner for purposes of this section; Provided, That (a) no more than twenty per centum of the net worth of such company as shown by its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner shall be invested in the lot & building in w/c the insurance company conducts its business & (b) the total investment of an insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty per centum of the net worth of said insurance company as shown by its aforesaid financial statement nor twenty per centum of the paid‑up capital of the registered enterprise excluding the intended investment, unless previously authorized by the Commissioner; &, Provided, further, That such investments free fr. any lien or encumbrance, shall be at least equal in amount to the aggregate amount of (a) its legal reserve, as provided in section two hundred thirteen, & (b) its reserve fund held for reinsurance as provided for in the pertinent treaty provision in the case of reinsurance ceded to authorized insurers. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 205.       After satisfying the requirements contained in sections one hundred ninety‑one, one hundred ninety‑three, two hundred three & two hundred four, any non‑life insurance company may invest any portion of its funds representing earned surplus in any of the investments described in sections one hundred ninety‑eight, two hundred & two hundred one, or in any securities issued by a “registered enterprise” mentioned in the preceding sections; Provided, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall in the aggregate, exceed twenty per centum of the net worth of the insurance company as shown in its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner or twenty per centum of the paid‑up capital of the issuing company, w/cever is lesser, unless otherwise approved by the Commissioner.

SECTION 206.       After satisfying the minimum capital investment required in section two hundred three, any life insurance company may invest its legal policy reserve, as provided in section two hundred eleven or in section two hundred twelve, in any of the classes of securities or types of investments described in sections one hundred ninety‑eight, two hundred, two hundred one & two hundred two, subject to the limitations therein contained, & in any securities issued by any “registered enterprise” mentioned in section two hundred four, free fr. any lien or encumbrance, in such amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. Such company may likewise invest any portion of its earned surplus in the aforesaid securities or investments subject to the aforesaid limitations.

SECTION 207.       Any investment made in violation of the applicable provisions of this title shall be considered non‑admitted assets.

SECTION 208.

(1)            All bonds or other evidences of indebtedness having a fixed term & rate of interest & held by any life insurance company authorized to do business in this country, if amply secured & if not in default as to principal or interest, shall be valued as follows: If purchased at par, at the par value; if purchased above or below par, on the basis of the purchase price adjusted so as to bring the value to par at maturity & so as to yield in the meantime the effective rate of interest at w/c the purchase was made, or in the discretion of the Commissioner, on the basis of the method of calculation commonly known as the pro‑rata method. In applying the foregoing rule the purchase price shall in no case be taken at a higher figure than the actual market value at the time of acquisition. The Commissioner shall have the power to determine the eligibility of any such investments for valuation on the basis of amortization, & may by regulation prescribe or limit the classes of securities so eligible for amortization. All bonds or other evidences of indebtedness w/c in the judgment of the Commissioner are not amply secured shall not be eligible for amortization & shall be valued in accordance w/ paragraph two. The Commissioner may, if he finds that the interest of policy holders so permit or require, by official regulation permit or require any class or classes of insurers, other than life insurance companies, authorized to do business in this country, to value their bonds or other evidences of indebtedness in accordance w/ the foregoing rule.

(2)            The investments of all insurers authorized to do business in this country, except securities subject to amortization & except as otherwise provided in this chapter, shall be valued, in the discretion of the Commissioner, at their market value, or at their appraised value, or at prices determined by him as representing their fair market value. If the Commissioner finds that in view of the character of investments of any insurer authorized to do business in this country it would be prudent for such insurer to establish a special reserve for possible losses or fluctuations in the values of its investments, he may require such insurer to establish such reserve, reasonable in amount, & may require that such reserve be maintained & reported in any statement or report of the financial condition of such insurer. The Commissioner may, in connection w/ any examination or required financial statement of an authorized insurer, require such insurer to furnish him complete financial statements & audited report of the financial condition of any corporation of w/c the securities are owned wholly or partly by such insurer & may cause an examination to be made of any subsidiary or affiliate of such insurer.

(3)            The stock of an insurance company shall be valued at the lesser of its market value or its book value as shown by its last approved annual statement or the last report on examination, w/cever is more recent. The book value of a share of common stock of an insurance company shall be ascertained by dividing (a) the amount of its capital & surplus less the value of all of its preferred stock, if any, outstanding, by (b) the number of shares of its common stock issued & outstanding. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, an insurer may, at its option, value its holdings of stock in a subsidiary insurance company in an amount not less than acquisition cost if such acquisition cost is less than the value determined as hereinbefore provided.

(4)            Real estate required by foreclosure or by deed in lieu thereof, in the absence of a recent appraisal deemed by the Commissioner to be reliable, shall not be valued at an amount greater than the unpaid principal of the defaulted loan at the date of such foreclosure or deed, together w/ any taxes & expenses paid or incurred by such insurer at such time in connection w/ such acquisition, & the cost of additions or improvements thereafter paid by such insurer & any amount or amounts thereafter paid by such insurer on any assessments levied for improvements in connection w/ the property.

(5)            Purchase money mortgages received on dispositions of real property held pursuant to section one hundred ninety‑eight shall be valued in an amount equivalent to ninety per centum of the value of such real property. Purchase money mortgages received on disposition of real property otherwise held shall be valued in an amount not exceeding ninety per centum of the value of such real property as determined by an appraisal made by an appraiser at or about the time of disposition of such real property.

(6)            The stock of a subsidiary of an insurer shall be valued on the basis of the greater of (i) the value of only such subsidiary of the assets of such subsidiary as would constitute lawful investments for the insurer if acquired or held directly by the insurer or (ii) such other value determined pursuant to standards & cumulative limitations, contained in a regulation to be promulgated by the Commissioner.

(7)            Notwithstanding any provision contained in this section or elsewhere in this chapter, if the Commissioner find that the interests of policyholders so permit or require, he may permit or require any class or classes of insurers authorized to do business in this country to value their investments or any class or classes thereof as of any date heretofore or hereafter in accordance w/ any applicable valuation or method.

SECTION 209.       It shall be the duty of the officers of the insurance company to report within the first fifteen days of every month all such investments as may be made by them during the preceding month, & the Commissioner may, if such investments or any of them seem injudicious to him, require the sale or disposal of the same. The report shall also include a list of investments sold or disposed of by the company during the same period.

Title V   RESERVES

SECTION 210.       Every life insurance company, doing business in the Philippines, shall annually make a valuation of all policies, additions thereto, unpaid dividends, & all other obligations outstanding on the thirty‑first day of December of the preceding year. All such valuations shall be made upon the net premiums basis, according to the standard adopted by the company, w/c standard shall be stated in its annual report.

Such standard of valuation whether of the net level premium, full preliminary term, any modified preliminary term, or select & ultimate reserve basis, shall be according to a standard table of mortality w/ interest at not more than six per centum compound interest. When the preliminary term basis is used, the term insurance shall be limited to the first policy year.

The results of such valuations shall be reported to the Commissioner on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year accompanied by a sworn statement of the company’s actuary certifying to the figures & stating upon what mortality table it is based, upon what rate of interest the valuation is made, & the methods used in arriving at the result obtained.

SECTION 211.       The aggregate net value so ascertained of the policies of such company shall be deemed its reserve liability, to provide for w/c it shall hold funds in secure investments equal to such net value, above all its other liabilities; & it shall be the duty of the Commissioner, after having verified, to such an extent as he may deem necessary, the valuation of all policies in force, to satisfy himself that the company has such amount in safe legal securities after all other debts & claims against it have been provided for.

The reserve liability for variable contracts defined in section two hundred thirty‑two shall be established in accordance w/ actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, & shall be approved by the Commissioner.

SECTION 212.       Every domestic life insurance company, conducted on the mutual plan or a plan in w/c policyholders are by the terms of their policies entitled to share in the profits or surplus shall, on all policies of life insurance heretofore or hereafter issued, under the conditions of w/c the distribution of surplus is deferred to a fixed or specified time & contingent upon the policy being in force & the insured living at that time, annually ascertain the amount of the surplus to w/c all such policies as separate class are entitled, & shall annually apportion to such policies as a class the amount of the surplus so ascertained, & carry the amount of such apportioned surplus, plus the actual interest earnings & accretions to such fund, as a distinct & separate liability to such class of policies on & for w/c the same was accumulated, & no company or any of its officers shall be permitted to use any part of such apportioned surplus fund for any purpose whatsoever other than for the express purpose for w/c the same was accumulated.

SECTION 213.       Every insurance company, other than life, shall maintain a reserve for unearned premiums on its policies in force, w/c shall be charged as a liability in any determination of its financial condition. Such reserve shall be equal to forty per centum of the gross premiums, less returns & cancellations, received on policies or risks having not more than a year to run, & pro rata on all gross premiums received on policies or risks having more than a year to run; Provided, That for marine cargo risks the reserve shall be equal to forty per centum of the premiums written in the policies upon yearly risks, & the full amount of the premiums written during the last two months of the calendar year upon all other marine risks not terminated.

SECTION 214.       In addition to its liabilities & reserves on contracts of insurance issued by it, every insurance company shall be charged w/ the estimated amount of all of its other liabilities, including taxes, expenses & other obligations due or accrued at the date of statement, & including any special reserves required by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code.

Title VI   LIMIT OF SINGLE RISK

SECTION 215.       No insurance company other than life, whether foreign or domestic, shall retain any risk on any one subject of insurance in an amount exceeding twenty per centum of its net worth. For purposes of this section, the term “subject of insurance” shall include all properties or risks insured by the same insurer that customarily are considered by non‑life company underwriters to be subject to loss or damage fr. the same occurrence of any hazard insured against.

Reinsurance ceded as authorized under the succeeding title shall be deducted in determining the risk retained. As to surety risk, deduction shall also be made of the amount assumed by any other company authorized to transact surety business & the value of any security mortgage, pledged, or held subject to the surety’s control & for the surety’s protection.

Title VII   REINSURANCE TRANSACTIONS

SECTION 216.       An insurance company doing business in the Philippines may accept reinsurances only of such risks, & retain risk thereon within such limits, as it is otherwise authorized to insure.

SECTION 217.       No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall cede all or part of any risks situated in the Philippines by way of reinsurance directly to any foreign insurer not authorized to do business in the Philippines unless such foreign insurer or, if the services of a non‑resident broker are utilized, such non‑resident broker is represented in the Philippines by a resident agent duly registered w/ the Commissioner as required in this Code.

The resident agent of such unauthorized foreign insurer or non‑ resident broker shall immediately upon registration furnish the Commissioner w/ the annual statement of such insurer, or of such company or companies where such broker may place Philippine business as of the year preceding such registration, & annually thereafter as soon as available.

SECTION 218.       All insurance companies, both life & non‑life, authorized to do business in the Philippines shall cede their excess risks to other companies similarly authorized to do business in the Philippines in such amounts & under such arrangements as would be consistent w/ sound underwriting practices before they enter into reinsurance arrangements w/ unauthorized foreign insurers.

SECTION 219.       Any insurance company doing business in the Philippines desiring to cede their excess risks to foreign insurance or reinsurance companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines may do so under the following conditions:

(1)            Except in facultative reinsurance & excess of loss covers, the full amount of the reserve fund required by law shall be set up in the books of & held by the ceding company for so long as the risk concerned is in force; Provided, That in case of facultative insurance, the ceding company shall show to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the Philippine market cannot provide the facilities sought abroad.

(2)            The reserve fund withheld shall be invested in bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government‑owned or controlled corporations & entities, including the Central Bank, &/or other securities acceptable under section two hundred.

Should any reinsurance agreement be for any reason cancelled or terminated, the ceding company concerned shall inform the Commissioner in writing of such cancellation or termination within thirty days fr. the date of such cancellation or termination or fr. the date notice or information of such cancellation or termination is received by such company as the case may be.

SECTION 220.       Every insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall report to the Commissioner on forms prescribed by him the particulars of reinsurance treaties as of the first day of January of the year following the approval of this Code & shall thereafter similarly report to the Commissioner particulars of any new treaties or changes in existing treaties.

SECTION 221.       No credit shall be allowed as an admitted asset or as a deduction fr. liability, to any ceding insurer for reinsurance made, ceded, renewed, or otherwise becoming effective after January first, nineteen hundred seventy‑five, unless the reinsurance shall be payable by the assuming insurer on the basis of the liability of the ceding insurer under the contract or contracts reinsured without diminution because of the insolvency of the ceding insurer nor unless under the contract or contracts of reinsurance the liability for such reinsurance is assumed by the assuming insurer or insurers as of the same effective date; nor unless the reinsurance agreement provides that payments by the assuming insurer shall be made directly to the ceding insurer or to its liquidator, receiver, or statutory successor except (a) where the contract specifically provides another payee of such reinsurance in the event of the insolvency of the ceding insurer & (b) where the assuming insurer w/ the consent of the direct insured or insureds has assumed such policy obligations of the ceding insurer as direct obligations of the assuming insurer to the payees under such policies & in substitution for the obligations of the ceding insurer to such payees.

SECTION 222.       No life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall reinsure its whole risk on any individual life or joint lives, or substantially all of its insurance in force, without having first obtained the written permission of the Commissioner.

Title VIII   ANNUAL STATEMENT

SECTION 223.       Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall terminate its fiscal period on the thirty‑first day of December every year, & shall annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year render to the Commissioner a statement signed & sworn to by the chief officer of such company showing, in such form & details as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty‑first day of December.

Any entry in the statement w/c is found to be false shall constitute a misdemeanor & the officer signing such statement shall be subject to the penalty provided for under section four hundred nineteen.

SECTION 224.       Every insurance company authorized under title ten of this chapter to issue, deliver or use variable contracts shall annually file w/ the Commissioner separate annual statement of its separate variable accounts. Such statement shall be on a form prescribed or approved by the Commissioner & shall include details as to all of the income, disbursements, assets & liability items of & associated w/ the said separate variable accounts. Said statement shall be under oath of two officers of the company & shall be filed simultaneously w/ the annual statement required by the preceding section.

SECTION 225.       Within thirty days after receipt of the annual statement approved by the Commissioner, every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall publish in two newspapers of general circulation in the City of Manila, one published in English & one in Pilipino, a full sypnosis of its annual financial statement showing fully the conditions of its business, & setting forth its resources & liabilities.

Title IX   POLICY FORMS

SECTION 226.       No policy, certificate or contract of insurance shall be issued or delivered within the Philippines unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner, & no application form shall be used w/, & no rider, clause, warranty or endorsement shall be attached to, printed or stamped upon such policy, certificate or contract unless the form of such application, rider, clause, warranty or endorsement has been approved by the Commissioner.

SECTION 227.       In the case of individual life or endowment insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following conditions:

(a)            A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period either of thirty days or of one month within w/c the payment of any premium after the first may be made, subject at the option of the insurer to an interest charge not in excess of six per centum per annum for the number of days of grace elapsing before the payment of the premium, during w/c period of grace the policy shall continue in full force, but in case the policy becomes a claim during the said period of grace before the overdue premium is paid, the amount of such premium w/ interest may de deducted fr. the amount payable under the policy in settlement;

(b)           A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two years fr. its date of issue as shown in the policy, or date of approval of last reinstatement, except for non‑payment of premium & except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to military or naval service in time of war;

(c)            A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, but if the company desires to make the application a part of the contract it may do so provided a copy of such application shall be indorsed upon or attached to the policy when issued, & in such case the policy shall contain a provision that the policy & the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties;

(d)           A provision that if the age of the insured is considered in determining the premium & the benefits accruing under the policy, & the age of the insured has been misstated, the amount payable under the policy shall be such as the premium would have purchased at the correct age;

(e)            If the policy is participating, a provision that the company shall periodically ascertain & apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under conditions specified therein;

(f)            A provision specifying the options to w/c the policyholder is entitled to in the event of default in a premium payment after three full annual premiums shall have been paid. Such option shall consist of:

(1)            A cash surrender value payable upon surrender of the policy w/c shall not be less than the reserve on the policy, the basis of w/c shall be indicated, for the then current policy year & any dividend additions thereto, reduced by a surrender charge w/c shall not be more than one‑fifth of the entire reserve or two & one‑half per centum of the amount insured & any dividend additions thereto;

(2)            One or more paid‑up benefits on a plan or plans specified in the policy of such value as may be purchased by the cash surrender value;

(g)           A provision that at anytime after a cash surrender value is available under the policy & while the policy is in force, the company will advance, on proper assignment or pledge of the policy & on sole security thereof, a sum equal to, or at the option of the owner of the policy, less than the cash surrender value on the policy, at a specified rate of interest, not more than the maximum allowed by law, to be determined by the company fr. time to time, but not more often than once a year, subject to the approval of the Commissioner; & that the company will deduct fr. such loan value any existing indebtedness on the policy & any unpaid balance of the premium for the current policy year, & may collect interest in advance on the loan to the end of the current policy year, w/c provision may further provide that such loan may be deferred for not exceeding six months after the application therefor is made;

(h)            A table showing in figures cash surrender values & paid‑up options available under the policy each year upon default in premium payments, during at least twenty years of the policy beginning w/ the year in w/c the values & options first become available, together w/ a provision that in the event of the failure of the policyholder to elect one of the said options within the time specified in the policy, one of said options shall automatically take effect & no policyholder shall ever forfeit his right to same by reason of his failure to so elect;

(i)             In case the proceeds of a policy are payable in installments or as an annuity, a table showing the minimum amounts of the installments or annuity payments;

(j)             A provision that the policyholder shall be entitled to have the policy reinstated at any time within three years fr. the date of default of premium payment unless the cash surrender value has been duly paid, or the extension period has expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company & upon payment of all overdue premiums & any indebtedness to the company upon said policy, w/ interest rate not exceeding that w/c would have been applicable to said premiums & indebtedness in the policy years prior to reinstatement.

Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to single premium or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein; & any such policy may be issued & delivered in the Philippines w/c in the opinion of the Commissioner contains provisions on any one or more of the foregoing requirements more favorable to the policyholder than hereinbefore required.

This section shall not apply to policies of group life or industrial life insurance.

SECTION 228.       No policy of group life insurance shall be issued & delivered in the Philippines unless it contains in substance the following provisions, or provisions w/c in the opinion of the Commissioner are more favorable to the persons insured, or at least as favorable to the persons insured & more favorable to the policy‑holders:

(a)            A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period of either thirty days or of one month for the payment of any premium due after the first, during w/c grace period the death benefit coverage shall continue in force, unless the policyholder shall have given the insurer written notice of discontinuance in advance of the date of discontinuance & in accordance w/ the terms of the policy. The policy may provide that the policyholder shall be liable for the payment of a pro rata premium for the time the policy is in force during such grace period;

(b)           A provision that the validity of the policy shall not be contested, except for non‑payment of premiums after it has been in force for two years fr. its date of issue; & that no statement made by any insured under the policy relating to his insurability shall be used in contesting the validity of the insurance w/ respect to w/c such statement was made after such insurance has been in force prior to the contest for a period of two years during such person’s lifetime nor unless contained in written instrument signed by him;

(c)            A provision that a copy of the application, if any, of the policyholder shall be attached to the policy when issued, that all statements made by the policyholder or by persons insured shall be deemed representations & not warranties, & that no statement made by any insured shall be used in any contest unless a copy of the instrument containing the statement is or has been furnished to such person or to his beneficiary;

(d)           A provision setting forth the conditions, if any, under w/c the insurer reserves the right to require a person eligible for insurance to furnish evidence of individual insurability satisfactory to the insurer as a condition to part or all of his coverage;

(e)            A provision specifying an equitable adjustment of premiums or of benefits or of both to be made in the event that the age of a person insured has been misstated, such provision to contain a clear statement of the method of adjustment to be used;

(f)            A provision that any sum becoming due by reason of death of the person insured shall be payable to the beneficiary designated by the insured, subject to the provisions of the policy in the event that there is no designated beneficiary, as to all or any part of such sum, living at the death of the insured, & subject to any right reserved by the insurer in the policy & set forth in the certificate to pay at its option a part of such sum not exceeding five hundred pesos to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred funeral or other expenses incident to the last illness or death of the person insured;

(g)           A provision that the insurer will issue to the policyholder for delivery to each person insured an individual certificate setting forth a statement as to the insurance protection to w/c he is entitled, to whom the insurance benefits are payable, & the rights set forth in paragraphs (h), (i) & (j) following;

(h)            A provision that if the insurance, or any portion of it, on a person covered under the policy ceases because of termination of employment or of membership in the class or classes eligible for coverage under the policy, such person shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer, without evidence of insurability, an individual policy of life insurance without disability or other supplementary benefits, provided application for the individual policy & payment of the first premium to the insurer shall be made within thirty days after such termination & provided further that:

(1)            the individual policy shall be on any one of the forms, except term insurance, then customarily issued by the insurer at the age & for an amount not in excess of the coverage under the group policy; &

(2)            the premium on the individual policy shall be at the insurer’s then customary rate applicable to the form & amount of the individual policy, to the class of risk to w/c such person then belongs, & to his age attained on the effective date of the individual policy.

(i)             A provision that if the group policy terminates or is amended so as to terminate the insurance of any class of insured persons, every person insured thereunder at the date of such termination whose insurance terminates & who has been so insured for five years prior to such termination date shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer an individual policy of life insurance subject to the same limitations as set forth in paragraph (h), except that the group policy may provide that the amount of such individual policy shall not exceed the smaller of (a) the amount of the person’s life insurance protection ceasing less the amount of any life insurance for what he is or becomes eligible under any group policy issued or reinstated by the same or another reinsurer within thirty days after such termination, & (b) two thousand pesos;

(j)             A provision that if a person insured under the group policy dies during the thirty‑day period within w/c he would have been entitled to an individual policy issued to him in accordance w/ (h) & (i) above & before such individual policy shall have become effective, the amount of life insurance w/c he would have been entitled to have issued to him as an individual policy shall be payable as a claim under the group policy whether or not application for the individual policy or the payment of the first premium has been made;

(k)            In the case of a policy issued to a creditor to insure debtors of such creditor, a provision that the insurer will furnish to the policyholder for delivery to each debtor insured under the policy a form w/c will contain a statement that the life of the debtor is insured under the policy & that any death benefit paid thereunder by reason of his death shall be applied to reduce or extinguish indebtedness.

The provisions of paragraphs (f) to (j) shall not apply to policies issued to a creditor to insure his debtors. If a group life policy is on a plan of insurance other than term, it shall contain a non‑forfeiture provision or provisions w/c in the opinion of the Commissioner is or are equitable to the insured or the policyholder; Provided, That nothing herein contained shall be so construed as to require group life policies to contain the same non‑forfeiture provisions as are required of individual life policies.

SECTION 229.       The term “industrial life insurance” as used in this Code shall mean that form of life insurance under w/c the premiums are payable either monthly or oftener, if the face amount of insurance provided in any policy is not more than five hundred times that of the current statutory minimum daily wage in the City of Manila, & if the words “industrial policy” are printed upon the policy as part of the descriptive matter.

An industrial life policy shall not lapse for non‑payment of premium if such non‑payment was due to the failure of the company to send its representative or agent to the insured at the residence of the insured or at some other place indicated by him for the purpose of collecting such premium; Provided, That the provisions of this paragraph shall not apply when the premium on the policy remains unpaid for a period of three months or twelve weeks after the grace period has expired.

SECTION 230.       In the case of industrial life insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following provisions:

(a)            A provision that the insured is entitled to a grace period of four weeks within w/c the payment of any premium after the first may be made, except that where premiums are payable monthly, the period of grace shall be either one month or thirty days; & that during the period of grace, the policy shall continue in full force, but if during such grace period the policy becomes a claim, then any overdue & unpaid premiums may be deducted fr. any amount payable under the policy in settlement;

(b)           A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it has been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a specified period, not more than two years fr. its date of issue, except for non‑payment of premiums & except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to naval or military service, or services auxiliary thereto, & except as to provisions relating to benefits in the event of disability as defined in the policy, & those granting additional insurance specifically against death by accident or by accidental means, or to additional insurance against loss of, or loss of use of, specific members of the body;

(c)            A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, or if a copy of the application is endorsed upon & attached to the policy when issued, a provision that the policy & the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, & in the latter case, a provision that all statements made by the insured shall, in the absence of fraud, be deemed representations & not warranties;

(d)           A provision that if the age of the person insured, or the age of any person, considered in determining the premium, or the benefits accruing under the policy, has been misstated, any amount payable or benefit accruing under the policy shall be such as the premium paid would have purchased at the correct age;

(e)            A provision that if the policy is a participating policy, the company shall periodically ascertain & apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under the conditions specified therein;

(f)            A provision that in the event of default in premium payments after three full years’ premiums have been paid, the policy shall be converted into a stipulated form of insurance, & that in the event of default in premium payments after five full years’ premiums have been paid, a specified cash surrender value shall be available, in lieu of the stipulated form of insurance, at the option of the policyholder. The net value of such stipulated form of insurance & the amount of such cash value shall not be less than the reserve on the policy & dividend additions thereto, if any, at the end of the last completed policy year for w/c premiums shall have been paid (the policy to specify the mortality table, rate of interest & method of valuation adopted to compute such reserve), exclusive of any reserve on disability benefits & accidental death benefits, less an amount not to exceed two & one‑half per centum of the maximum amount insured by the policy & dividend additions thereto, if any, at the end of the last completed policy year for w/c premiums shall have been paid (the policy to specify the mortality table, rate of interest & method of valuation adopted to compute such reserve), exclusive of any reserve on disability benefits & accidental death benefits, less an amount not to exceed two & one‑half per centum of the maximum amount insured by the policy & dividend additions thereto, if any, when the issue age is under ten years, & less an amount not to exceed two & one‑half per centum of the current amount insured by the policy & dividend additions thereto, if any, if the issue age is ten years or older, & less any existing indebtedness to the company on or secured by the policy;

(g)           A provision that the policy may be surrendered to the company at its home office within a period of not less than sixty days after the due date of a premium in default for the specified cash value, provided that the insurer may defer payment for not more than six months after the application therefor is made;

(h)            A table that shows in figures the non‑forfeiture benefits available under the policy every year upon default in payment of premiums during at least the first twenty years of the policy, such table to begin w/ the year in w/c such values become available, & a provision that the company will furnish upon request an extension of such table beyond the year shown in the policy;

(i)             A provision that specifies w/c one of the stipulated forms of insurance provided for under the provision of paragraph (f) of this section shall take effect in the event of the insured’s failure, within sixty days fr. the due date of the premium in default, to notify the insurer in writing as to w/c one of such forms he has selected;

(j)             A provision that the policy may be reinstated at any time within two years fr. the due date of the premium in default unless the cash surrender value has been paid or the period of extended term insurance expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company & payment of arrears of premiums w/ interest at a rate not exceeding six per centum per annum payable annually;

(k)            A provision that when a policy shall become a claim by death of the insured, settlement shall be made upon receipt of due proof of death, or not later than two months after receipt of such proof;

(l)             A title on the face & on the back of the policy correctly describing its form;

(m)           A space on the front or the back of the policy for the name of the beneficiary designated by the insured w/ a reservation of the insured’s right to designate or change the beneficiary after the issuance of the policy. The policy may also provide that no designation or change of beneficiary shall be binding on the insurer until endorsed on the policy by the insurer, & that the insurer may refuse to endorse the name of any proposed beneficiary who does not appear to the insurer to have an insurable interest in the life of the insured. Such policy may also contain a provision that if the beneficiary designated in the policy does not surrender the policy w/ due proof of death within the period stated in the policy, w/c shall not be less than thirty days after the death of the insured, or if the beneficiary is the estate of the insured, or is a minor, or dies before the insured, or is not legally competent to give valid release, then the insurer may make any payment thereunder to the executor or administrator of the insured, or to any of the insured’s relatives by blood or legal adoption or connections by marriage or to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred expense for the maintenance, medical attention or burial of the insured; &

(n)            A provision that when an industrial life insurance policy is issued providing for accidental or health benefits, or both, in addition to life insurance, the foregoing provisions shall apply only to the life insurance portion of the policy.

(a)            Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to non‑participating or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein. The foregoing provisions shall not apply to policies issued or granted pursuant to the non‑forfeiture provisions prescribed in provisions of paragraphs (f) & (i) of this section, nor shall provisions of paragraphs (f), (g), (h), & (i) hereof be required in term insurance of twenty years or less but such term policies shall specify the mortality table, rate of interest, & method of computing reserves.

SECTION 231.       No policy of industrial life insurance shall be issued or delivered in the Philippines if it contains any of the following provisions:

(a)            A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has had any disease or ailment, whether specified or not, or because the insured has received institutional, hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention, except a provision w/c gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void if the insured has, within two years prior to the issuance of the policy, received institutional hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention & if the insured or the claimant under the policy fails to show that the condition occasioning such treatment or attention was not of a serious nature or was not material to the risk;

(b)           A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has been rejected for insurance, unless such right be conditioned upon a showing by the insurer that knowledge of such rejection would have led to a refusal by the insurer to make such contract;

(c)            A provision that allows the company to pay the proceeds of the policy at the death of the insured to any person other than the named beneficiary, except in accordance w/ a standard provision as specified under the provisions of paragraph (m) of the preceding section;

(d)           A provision that limits the time within w/c any action at law or in equity may be commenced to less than six years after the cause of action shall accrue; &

(e)            A provision that specifies any mode of settlement at maturity of less value than the amount insured by the policy plus dividend additions, if any, less any indebtedness to the company on the policy & less any premium that may by the terms of the policy be deducted, payments to be made in accordance w/ the terms of the policy.

Nothing contained in this section nor in the provision of paragraph (b) of the preceding section, relating to incontestability, shall be construed as prohibiting the life insurance company fr. placing in its industrial life policies provisions limiting its liability w/ respect to: (1) death resulting fr. aviation other than as a fare‑paying passenger on a regularly scheduled route between definitely established airports; & (2) military or naval service; Provided, That if the liability of the company is limited as herein provided, such liability shall in no event be fixed at an amount less than the reserve on the policy (excluding the reserve for any additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means or for benefits in the event of any type of disability), less any indebtedness on or secured by such policy; nor shall any provision of this section apply to any provision in an industrial life insurance policy for additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means.

Title X  VARIABLE CONTRACTS

SECTION 232.

(1)    No insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines shall issue, deliver, sell or use any variable contract in the Philippines, unless & until such company shall have satisfied the Commissioner that its financial & general condition & its methods of operations, including the issue & sale of variable contracts, are not & will not be hazardous to the public or to its policy & contract owners. No foreign insurance company shall be authorized to issue, deliver or sell any variable contract in the Philippines, unless it is likewise authorized to do so by the laws of its domicile.

(2)    The term “variable contract” shall mean any policy or contract on either a group or on an individual basis issued by an insurance company providing for benefits or other contractual payments or values thereunder to vary so as to reflect investment results of any segregated portfolio of investments or of a designated separate account in w/c amounts received in connection w/ such contracts shall have been placed & accounted for separately & apart fr. other investments & accounts. This contract may also provide benefits or values incidental thereto payable in fixed or variable amounts, or both. It shall not be deemed to be a “security” or “securities” as defined in The Securities Act, as amended, or in the The Investment Company Act, as amended, nor subject to regulation under said Acts.

(3)    In determining the qualifications of a company requesting authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts, the Commissioner shall always consider the following: (a) the history, financial & general condition of the company; Provided, That such company, if a foreign company, must have deposited w/ the Commissioner for the benefit & security of its variable contract owners in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines or its instrumentalities w/ an actual market value of two million pesos; (b) the character, responsibility & fitness of the officers & directors of the company; & (c) the law & regulation under w/c the company is authorized in the state of domicile to issue such contracts.

(4)    If after notice & hearing, the Commissioner shall find that the company is qualified to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts in accordance w/ this Code & the regulations & rules issued thereunder, the corresponding order of authorization shall be issued. Any decision or order denying authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall clearly & distinctly state the reasons & grounds on w/c it is based.

SECTION 233.       Any insurance company issuing variable contracts pursuant to this Code may in its discretion issue contracts providing a combination of fixed amount & variable amount of benefits & for option lump‑sum payment of benefits.

SECTION 234.       Every variable contract form delivered or issued for delivery in the Philippines, & every certified form evidencing variable benefits issued pursuant to any such contract on a group basis, & the application, rider & endorsement forms applicable thereto & used in connection therewith, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner.

SECTION 235.       Illustration of benefits payable under any variable contract shall not include or involve projections of past investment experience into the future & shall conform w/ the rules & regulations promulgated by the Commissioner.

SECTION 236.       Variable contracts may be issued on the industrial life basis, provided that the pertinent provisions of this Code & of the rules & regulations of the Commissioner governing variable contracts are complied w/ in connection w/ such contracts.

SECTION 237.       Every life insurance company authorized under the provisions of this Code to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall, in connection w/ same, establish one or more separate accounts to be known as separate variable accounts. All amounts received by the company in connection w/ any such contracts w/c are required by the terms thereof, to be collected or applied to one or more designated separate variable accounts shall be placed in such designated account or accounts. The assets & liabilities of each such separate variable account shall at all times be clearly identifiable & distinguishable fr. the assets & liabilities in all other accounts of the company. Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, the assets held in any such separate variable account shall not be chargeable w/ liabilities arising out of any other business the company conduct but shall be held & applied exclusively for the benefit of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. In the event of the insolvency of the company, the assets of each such separate variable account shall be applied to the contractual claims of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. Except as otherwise specifically provided by the contract, no sale, exchange or other transfer of assets may be made by a company, between any of its separate accounts or between any other investment account & one or more of its separate accounts, unless in the case of a transfer into a separate account, such transfer is made solely to establish the account or to support the operation of the contracts w/ respect to the separate account to w/c the transfer is made, or in case of a transfer fr. a separate account, such transfer would not cause the remaining assets of the account to become less than the reserves & other contract liabilities w/ respect to such separate account. Such transfer, whether into or fr. a separate account, shall be made by a transfer of cash, or by a transfer of securities having a valuation w/c could be readily determined in the market place, provided that such transfer of securities is approved by the Commissioner. The Commissioner may authorize other transfers among such accounts, if, in his opinion, such transfer would not be inequitable. All amounts & assets allocated to any such separate variable account shall be owned by the company & w/ respect to same the company shall not be nor hold itself out to be a trustee.   cdt

SECTION 238.       Any insurance company w/c has established one or more separate variable accounts pursuant to the preceding section may invest & re‑invest all or any part of the assets allocated to any such account in the securities & investments authorized by sections one hundred ninety‑eight, two hundred, two hundred one & two hundred two for any of the funds of an insurance company in such amount or amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. In addition thereto, such company may also invest in common stocks or other equities w/c are listed on or admitted to trading in a securities exchange located in the Philippines, or w/c are publicly held & traded in the “over‑the‑counter market” as defined by the Commissioner & as to w/c market quotations have been available; Provided, however, That no such company shall invest in excess of ten per centum of the assets of any such separate variable accounts in any one corporation issuing such common stock. The assets & investments of such separate variable accounts shall not be taken into account in applying the quantitative investment limitations applicable to other investments of the company. In the purchase of common capital stock or other equities, the insurer shall designate to the broker, or to the seller if the purchase is not made through a broker, the specific variable account for w/c the investment is made.

SECTION 239.       Assets allocated to any separate variable account shall be valued at their market value on the date of any valuation, or if there is no readily available market then in accordance w/ the terms of the variable contract applicable to such assets, or if there are no such contract terms then in such manner as may be prescribed by the rules & regulations of the Commissioner.

SECTION 240.       The reserve liability for variable contracts shall be established in accordance w/ actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, & shall be approved by the Commissioner.

Title XI CLAIMS SETTLEMENT

SECTION 241.

(1)    No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall refuse, without just cause, to pay or settle claims arising under coverages provided by its policies, nor shall any such company engage in unfair claim settlement practices. Any of the following acts by an insurance company, if committed without just cause & performed w/ such frequency as to indicate a general business practice, shall constitute unfair claim settlement practices:

(a)            knowingly misrepresenting to claimants pertinent facts or policy provisions relating to coverage at issue;

(b)           failing to acknowledge w/ reasonable promptness pertinent communications w/ respect to claims arising under its policies;

(c)            failing to adopt & implement reasonable standards for the prompt investigation of claims arising under its policies;

(d)           not attempting in good faith to effectuate prompt, fair & equitable settlement of claims submitted in w/c liability has become reasonably clear; or

(e)            compelling policyholders to institute suits to recover amounts due under its policies by offering without justifiable reason substantially less than the amounts ultimately recovered in suits brought by them.

2.     Evidence as to numbers & types of valid & justifiable complaints to the Commissioner against an insurance company, & the Commissioner’s complaint experience w/ other insurance companies writing similar lines of insurance shall be admissible in evidence in an administrative or judicial proceeding brought under this section.

3.     If it is found, after notice & an opportunity to be heard, that an insurance company has violated this section, each instance of non‑compliance w/ paragraph (1) may be treated as a separate violation of this section & shall be considered sufficient cause for the suspension or revocation of the company’s certificate of authority.

SECTION 242.       The proceeds of a life insurance policy shall be paid immediately upon maturity of the policy, unless such proceeds are made payable in installments or as an annuity, in w/c case the installments, or annuities shall be paid as they become due: Provided, however, That in the case of a policy maturing by the death of the insured, the proceeds thereof shall be paid within sixty days after presentation of the claim & filing of the proof of the death of the insured. Refusal or failure to pay the claim within the time prescribed herein will entitle the beneficiary to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

The proceeds of the policy maturing by the death of the insured payable to the beneficiary shall include the discounted value of all premiums paid in advance of their due dates, but are not due & payable at maturity.

SECTION 243.       The amount of any loss or damage for w/c an insurer may be liable, under any policy other than life insurance policy, shall be paid within thirty days after proof loss is received by the insurer & ascertainment of the loss or damage is made either by agreement between the insured & the insurer or by arbitration; but if such ascertainment is not had or made within sixty days after such receipt by the insurer of the proof of loss, then the loss or damage shall be paid within ninety days after such receipt. Refusal or failure to pay the loss or damage within the time prescribed herein will entitle the assured to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

SECTION 244.       In case of any litigation for the enforcement of any policy or contract of insurance, it shall be the duty of the Commissioner or the Court, as the case may be, to make a finding as to whether the payment of the claim of the insured has been unreasonably denied or withheld; & in the affirmative case, the insurance company shall be adjudged to pay damages w/c shall consist of attorney’s fees & other expenses incurred by the insured person by reason of such unreasonable denial or withholding of payment plus interest of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board of the amount of the claim due the insured, fr. the date following the time prescribed in section two hundred forty‑two or in section two hundred forty‑three, as the case may be, until the claim is fully satisfied; Provided, That the failure to pay any such claim within the time prescribed in said sections shall be considered prima facie evidence of unreasonable delay in payment.

Title XII   EXAMINATION OF COMPANIES

SECTION 245.       The Commissioner shall require every insurance company doing business in the Philippines to keep its books, records, accounts & vouchers in such manner that he or his authorized representatives may readily verify its annual statements & ascertain whether the company is solvent & has complied w/ the provisions of this Code or the circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commissioner.

SECTION 246.       The Commissioner shall at least once a year & whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs, financial condition & method of business of every insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines & of any other person, firm or corporation managing the affairs &/or property of such insurance company. Such company, as well as such managing person, firm or corporation, shall submit to the examiner all such books, papers & securities as he may require & such examiner shall also have the power to examine the officers of such company under oath touching its business & financial condition, & the authority to transact business in the Philippines of any such company shall be suspended by the Commissioner if such examination is refused & such company shall not thereafter be allowed to transact further business in the Philippines until it has fully complied w/ the provisions of this section.

Government‑owned or controlled corporations or entities engaged in social private insurance shall similarly be subject to such examination by the Commissioner unless their respective charters otherwise provide.

Title XIII   SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF AUTHORITY

SECTION 247.       If the Commissioner is of the opinion upon examination of other evidence that any domestic or foreign insurance company is in an unsound condition, or that it has failed to comply w/ the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it, or that its condition or method of business is such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or to its policyholders, or that its paid‑up capital stock, in the case of a domestic stock company, or its available cash assets, in the case of a domestic mutual company, or its security deposits, in the case of a foreign company, is impaired or deficient, or that the margin of solvency required of such company is deficient, the Commissioner is authorized to suspend or revoke all certificates of authority granted to such insurance company, its officers & agents, & no new business shall thereafter be done by such company or for such company by its agent in the Philippines while such suspension, revocation or disability continues or until its authority to do business is restored by the Commissioner. Before restoring such authority, the Commissioner shall require the company concerned to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts & disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three years. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

Title XIV   APPOINTMENT OF CONSERVATOR

SECTION 248.       If at any time before, or after, the suspension or revocation of the certificate of authority of an insurance company as provided in the preceding title, the Commissioner finds that such company is in a state of continuing inability or unwillingness to maintain a condition of solvency or liquidity deemed adequate to protect the interest of policy holders & creditors, he may appoint a conservator to take charge the assets, liabilities, & the management of such company, collect all moneys & debts due said company & exercise all powers necessary to preserve the assets of said company, reorganize the management thereof, & restore its viability. The said conservator shall have the power to overrule or revoke the actions of the previous management & board of directors of the said company, any provision of law, or of the articles of incorporation or by‑laws of the company, to the contrary notwithstanding, & such other powers as the Commissioner shall deem necessary.

The conservator may be another insurance company doing business in the Philippines, by officer or officers of such company, or any other competent & qualified person, firm or corporation. The remuneration of the conservator & other expenses attendant to the conservation shall be borne by the insurance company concerned.

The conservator shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection w/ the exercise, of the powers conferred on the conservator.

The conservator appointed shall report & be responsible to the Commissioner until such time as the Commissioner is satisfied that the insurance company can continue to operate on its own & the conservatorship shall likewise be terminated should be Commissioner, on the basis of the report of the conservator or of his own findings, determine that the continuance in business of the insurance company would be hazardous to policy holders & creditors, in w/c case the provisions of Title 15 shall apply.

Title XV   PROCEEDINGS UPON INSOLVENCY

SECTION 249.       Whenever, upon examination or other evidence, it shall be disclosed that the condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines is one of insolvency, or that its continuance in business would be hazardous to its policyholders & creditors, the Commissioner shall forthwith order the company to cease & desist fr. transacting business in the Philippines & shall designate a receiver to immediately take charge of its assets & liabilities, as expeditiously as possible collect & gather all the assets & administer the same for the benefit of its policyholders & creditors, & exercise all the powers necessary for these purposes including, but not limited to, bringing suits & foreclosing mortgages in the name of the insurance company.

The Commissioner shall thereupon determine within thirty days whether the insurance company may be reorganized or otherwise placed in such condition so that it may be permitted to resume business w/ safety to its policyholders & creditors & shall prescribe the conditions under w/c such resumption of business shall take place as well as the time for fulfillment of such conditions. In such case, the expenses & fees in the collection & administration of the insurance company shall be determined by the Commissioner & shall be paid out of the assets of such company.

If the Commissioner shall determine & confirm within the said period that the insurance company is solvent, as defined hereunder, or cannot resume business w/ safety to its policyholders & creditors, he shall, if the public interest requires, order its liquidation, indicate the manner of its liquidation & approve a liquidation plan & implement it immediately. The Commissioner shall designate a competent & qualified person as liquidator who shall take over the functions of the receiver previously designated &, w/ all convenient speed, reinsure all its outstanding policies, convert the assets of the insurance company to cash, or sell, assign or otherwise dispose of the same to the policyholders, creditors & other parties for the purpose of settling the liabilities or paying the debts of such company & he may, in the name of the company, institute such actions as may be necessary in the appropriate Court to collect & recover accounts & assets of the insurance company, & to do such other acts as may be necessary to complete the liquidation as ordered by the Commissioner.

The provisions of any law to the contrary notwithstanding, the actions of the Commissioner under this Section shall be final & executory, & can be set aside by the Court upon petition by the company & only if there is convincing proof that the action is plainly arbitrary & made in bad faith. The Commissioner, through the Solicitor General, shall then file the corresponding answer reciting the proceeding taken & praying the assistance of the Court in the liquidation of the company. No restraining order or injunction shall be issued by the Court enjoining the Commissioner fr. implementing his actions under this Section, unless there is convincing proof that the action of the Commissioner is plainly arbitrary & made in bad faith & the petitioner or plaintiff files w/ the clerk or Judge of the Court in w/c the action is pending a bond executed in favor of the Commissioner in an amount to be fixed by the Court. The restraining order or injunction shall be refused or, if granted, shall be dissolved upon filing by the Commissioner, if he so desires, of a bond in an amount twice the amount of the bond of the petitioner or plaintiff conditioned that it will pay the damages w/c the petition or plaintiff may suffer by the refusal or the dissolution of the injunction. The provisions of Rule 58 of the New Rules of Court insofar as they are applicable shall govern the issuance & dissolution of the restraining order or injunction contemplated in this Section.

All proceedings under this Title shall be given preference in the Courts. The Commissioner shall not be required to pay any fee to any public officer for filing, recording, or in any manner authenticating any paper or instrument relating to the proceedings.

As used in this Title, the term “Insolvency” shall mean the inability of an insurance company to pay its lawful obligations as they fall due in the usual & ordinary course of business as may be shown by its failure to maintain the margin of solvency required under Section 194 of this Code. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1141 & further amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 250.       In case of liquidation of an insurance company, after payment of the cost of the proceedings, including reasonable expenses & fees incurred in the liquidation to be allowed by the Court, the Commissioner shall pay all allowed claims against such company, under order of the Court, in accordance w/ their legal priority.

SECTION 251.       The receiver or the liquidator, as the case may be, designated under the provisions of this title shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection w/ the exercise, of the powers conferred on such receiver or liquidator.

Title XVI   CONSOLIDATION AND MERGER OF INSURANCE COMPANIES

SECTION 252.       Upon prior notice to the Commissioner, two or more domestic insurance companies, acting through their respective boards of directors, may negotiate to merge into a single corporation w/c shall be one of the constituent corporations, or consolidate into a single corporation w/c shall be a new corporation to be formed by the consolidation. A common agreement of the proposed merger or consolidation shall be drawn up for submission to the stockholders or members of the constituent companies for adoption & approved in accordance w/ the provisions of the respective by‑laws of the constituent companies & all existing laws that may be pertinent.

SECTION 253.       Such agreement shall include, aside fr. the proposed merger or consolidation, provisions relative to the manner of transfer of assets to & assumption of liabilities by the absorbing or acquiring company fr. the absorbed or dissolved company or companies; the proposed articles of merger or consolidation & by‑laws of the surviving or acquiring company; the corporate name to be adopted w/c should not be that of any other existing company transacting similar business or one so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public; the rights of the stockholders or members of the absorbed or dissolved companies; date of effectivity of the merger or consolidation; & such particulars as may be necessary to explain & make manifest the objects & purposes of the absorbing or acquiring company.

SECTION 254.       Upon execution of such agreement to merge or consolidate by & between or among the boards of directors of the constituent companies, notice thereof shall be mailed immediately to their policyholders & creditors. The company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved shall discharge all its accrued liabilities; otherwise, such liabilities shall, w/ the consent of its creditors, be transferred to & assumed by the absorbing or acquiring company, or such liabilities be reinsured by the latter. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved, same may be cancelled pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such transfer, assumption, or reinsurance.

SECTION 255.       Upon approval or adoption in the meetings of the stockholders or members called for the purpose in each of the constituent companies of the agreement to merge or consolidate, all stockholders or members dissenting or objecting to merger or consolidation shall be paid the value of their shares by the company concerned in accordance w/ the by‑laws thereof.

SECTION 256.       Upon the approval or adoption of the agreement to merge or consolidate by the stockholders or members of the constituent companies, the corresponding articles of merger or of consolidation shall be duly executed by the presidents & attested by the corporate secretaries & shall bear the corporate seals of the merging or consolidating companies setting forth:

(1)            The plan of merger or the plan of consolidation;

(2)            As to each corporation, the number of shares outstanding, or in case of mutual corporations, the number of members; &

(3)            As to each corporation, the number of shares or members voted for & against such plan respectively. Thereafter, a certified copy of such articles of merger or consolidation, together w/ a certificate of approval or adoption by the stockholders or members of such articles of merger or consolidation, verified by affidavits of such officers & under the seal of the constituent companies, shall be submitted to the Commissioner, together w/ such other papers or documents w/c the Commissioner may require, for his consideration.

SECTION 257.       The articles of merger or of consolidation, signed & verified as hereinabove required, shall be filed w/ the Securities & Exchange Commission for its examination & approval.

SECTION 258.       Upon receipt fr. the Securities & Exchange Commission of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, the constituent companies shall surrender to the Commissioner their respective certificates of authority to transact insurance business. The absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, shall immediately file w/ the commissioner the corresponding application for issuance of a new certificate of authority to transact insurance business, together w/ a certified copy of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, & of the certificate of increase of stocks, if there is any, issued by the Securities & Exchange Commission.

SECTION 259.       Nothing in this title shall be construed to enlarge the powers of the absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, except those conferred by the certificate of merger or of consolidation & the articles of merger of consolidation, or the amended articles of incorporation, as registered w/ the Securities & Exchange Commission.

SECTION 260.       No director, officer, or stockholder of any such constituent companies shall receive any fee, commission, compensation, or other valuable consideration whatsoever, directly or indirectly, or in any manner aiding, promoting or assisting in such merger or consolidation.

SECTION 261.       The merger of consolidation of companies under, this Code shall be subject to the provisions of the Corporation Law, &, in those cases specified in Republic Act No. 5455, as amended, be further subject to the provisions of said law.

Title XVII   MUTUALIZATION OF STOCK LIFE INSURANCE COMPANIES

SECTION 262.       Any domestic stock life insurance company doing business in the Philippines may convert itself into an incorporated mutual life insurer. To that end it may provide & carry out a plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of its capital stock for the benefit of its policyholders, or any class or classes of its policyholders, by complying w/ the requirements of this chapter.

SECTION 263.       Such plan shall include appropriate proceedings for amending the insurer’s articles of incorporation to give effect to the acquisition, by said insurer, for the benefit of its policyholders or any class or classes thereof, of the outstanding shares of its capital stock & the conversion of the insurer fr. a stock corporation into a non‑stock corporation for the benefit of its members. The members of such non‑stock corporation shall be the policyholders fr. time to time of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of the insurer was acquired, & the policyholders of such other class or classes as may be specified in such corporation’s articles of incorporation as they may be amended fr. time to time. Such plan shall be:

(1)            Adopted by a vote of a majority of the directors;

(2)            Approved by the vote of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares at a special meeting of shareholders called for that purpose, or by the written consent of such sharesholders;

(3)            Submitted to the Commissioner & approved by him in writing;

(4)            Approved by a majority vote of all the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired voting at an election by the policyholders called for that purpose, subject to the provisions of section two hundred sixty‑five. The terms “policyholder” or “policyholders” as used in this chapter shall be deemed to mean the person or persons insured under an individual policy of life insurance, or of health & accident insurance, or of any combination of life, health & accident insurance. They shall also include the person or persons to whom any annuity or pure endowment is presently or prospectively payable by the terms of an individual annuity or pure endowment contract, except where the policy or contract declares some other person to be the owner or holder thereof, in w/c case such other person shall be deemed policyholder. In any case where a policy or contract names two or more persons as joint insured, payees, owners or holders thereof, the persons so named shall be deemed collectively to be one policyholder for the purpose of this chapter. In any case where a policy or contract shall have been assigned by assignment absolute on its face to an assignee other than the insurer, & such assignment shall have been filed at the principal office of the insurer at least thirty days prior to the date of any election or meeting referred to in this chapter, then such assignee shall be deemed at such election or meeting to be the policyholder. For the purpose of this chapter the terms “policyholder” & “policyholders” include the employer to whom, or a president, secretary or other executive officer of any corporation or association to w/c a master group policy has been issued, but exclude the holders of certificates or policies issued under or in connection w/ a master group policy. Beneficiaries under unmatured contracts shall not as such be deemed to be policyholders;

(5)            Filed w/ the Commissioner after having been approved as provided in this section.

SECTION 264.       The Commissioner shall examine the plan submitted to him under the provisions of sub‑paragraph three of section two hundred sixty‑three. He shall not approve such plan unless in his opinion the rights & interest of the insurer, its policyholders & shareholders are protected nor unless he is satisfied that the plan will be fair & equitable in its operation.

SECTION 265.       The election prescribed by sub‑paragraph four of section two hundred sixty‑three shall be called by the board of directors or the president, & every policyholder of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired, whose insurance shall have been in force for at least one year prior to such election shall have one vote, regardless of the number of policies or amount of insurance he holds, & regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance or policies of health & accident insurance or annuity contracts. Notice of such election shall be given to policyholders entitled to vote by mail fr. the principal office of such insurer at least thirty days prior to the date set for such election, in a sealed envelope, postage prepaid, addressed to each such policyholder at his last known address.

Voting shall be by one of the following methods:

(1)            At a meeting of such policyholders, held pursuant to such notice, by ballot in person or by proxy.

(2)            If not by the method described in the preceding sub‑paragraph, then by mail pursuant to a procedure & on forms to be prescribed by such plan.

Such election shall be conducted under the direction & supervision of three impartial & disinterested inspectors appointed by the insurer & approved by the Commissioner. In case any person appointed as inspector fails to appear at such meeting or fails or refuses to act at such election, the vacancy, if occurring in advance of the convening of the meeting or in advance of the opening of the mail vote, may be filled in the manner prescribed for the appointment of inspectors &, if occurring at the meeting or during the canvass of the mail vote, may be filled by the person acting as chairman of said meeting or designated for that purpose in such plan. The decision, act or certificate of a majority of the inspectors shall be effective in all respects as the decision, act or certificate of all. The inspectors of election shall determine the number of policyholders, the voting power of each, the policyholders represented at the meeting or voting by mail, the existence of a quorum & the authenticity, validity & effect of proxies. They shall receives votes, hear & determine all challenges & questions in any way arising in connection w/ the right to vote, count & tabulate all votes, determine the result, & do such other acts as are proper to conduct the vote w/ fairness to all policyholders. The inspectors of election shall, before commencing performance of their duties, subscribe to & file w/ the insurer & w/ the Commissioner on oath that they, & each of them, will perform their duties impartially, in good faith, to the best of their ability & as expeditiously as in practicable. On the request of the insurer, the Commissioner, a policyholder or his proxy, the inspectors shall make a report in writing of any challenge or question or matter determined by them & execute a certificate of any fact found by them. They shall also certify the result of such vote to the insurer & to the Commissioner. Any report or certificate made by them shall be prima facie evidence of facts stated therein. All necessary expenses incurred in connection w/ such election shall be paid by the insurer. For the purpose of this section, a quorum shall consist of five per centum of the policyholders of such insurer entitled to vote at such election.

SECTION 266.       In carrying out any such plan, the insurer may acquire any shares of its own stock by gift, bequest or purchase. Any shares so acquired shall, unless as a result of such acquisition all of the shares of the insurer shall have been acquired, be acquired in trust for the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the plan provides that the stock of the insurer shall be acquired as hereinafter provided. Such shares shall be assigned & transferred on the books of such insurer & approved by the Commissioner. Such trustees shall hold such stock in trust until all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, but for not longer than thirty years w/ such extensions of not more than five years each as may be granted by the Commissioner. Such extensions may be granted by the Commissioner if the plan so provides & if in his opinion the plan of acquisition of all of such stock can be completed within a reasonable period. Such trustees shall vote such stock at all corporate meetings at w/c stockholders have the right to vote. When all the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, all said shares shall be cancelled, the certificate of amendment of the insurer’s articles of incorporation giving effect thereto shall be filed in accordance w/ the provisions of the Corporation Law, & the insurer shall become a non‑stock corporation for the profit of its members & such trust shall thereupon terminate. Thereafter such corporation shall be conducted for the mutual benefit, ratably, of its policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock was acquired & shall have power to issue non‑assessable policies on a reserve basis subject to all provisions of law applicable to incorporated life insurers issuing nonassessable policies on a reserve basis. Policies so issued may be upon the basis of full or partial participation therein as agreed between the insurer & the insured.

Upon the termination of any such voting trust, either in accordance w/ its terms or as hereinabove provided, such plan of mutualization shall terminate, unless theretofore completed. Upon such termination, unless the plan of mutualization provides for the disposition of the shares acquired by the insurer under such plan or for the disposition of the proceeds thereof, the shares held by such trustees shall be disposed of in accordance w/ an order of the court of competent jurisdiction in the judicial district in w/c is located the principal office of such insurer, made upon a verified petition of the Commissioner.

SECTION 267.       Any such plan of mutualization may provide for the creation of a voting trust under a trust agreement for the holding & voting by three or more trustees of any portion or all of the shares of the insurer not required upon the adoption of such plan. The voting trustees shall be named in accordance w/ such plan or, if no provision is made therein for the naming of such trustees, then by the insurer. The voting trust agreement & voting trustees shall be subject to the approval of the Commissioner. Any or all of the trustees under such voting trust agreement may be the same person or persons as any or all of the trustees referred to in section two hundred sixty‑six. Such voting trust agreement shall provide that in the event of acquisition by the insurer of any of the shares of stock held thereunder in accordance w/ the provisions of the plan, such shares so acquired together w/ the voting rights thereof shall be transferred by the trustees named under the provisions of this section to the trustees named under the provisions of section two hundred sixty‑six. Any voting trust agreement created pursuant to the provisions of this section may be made irrevocable for not longer than thirty years & thereafter until the termination of the trust provided for in section two hundred sixty‑six. The trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section shall terminate in any event upon termination of the trust provided for in section two hundred sixty‑six. Upon the termination of the trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section, any shares held in such trust shall revert to the persons entitled thereto by law.

SECTION 268.       Every payment for the acquisition of any shares of the capital stock of such insurer, the purchase price of w/c is not fixed by such plan, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner. Neither such plan, nor any such payment, may be approved by the Commissioner unless he finds that the rights & interests of the insurer, its policyholders, & shareholders are protected.

SECTION 269.       The trustees referred to in section two hundred sixty‑six shall file w/ such insurer & w/ the Commissioner a verified acceptance of their appointments & verified declarations that they will faithfully discharge their duties as such trustees. All dividends & other sums received by said trustees on the shares held by them, after paying the necessary expenses of executing their trust, shall be immediately repaid to such insurer for the benefit of all who are, or may become, policyholders of such insurance of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of such insurer was acquired & entitled to participate in the profits thereof & shall be added to & become part of the assets of such insurer.

SECTION 269‑A.   If, at any time within the period provided in the plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of stock of the insurer, ninety percent thereof has already been acquired & transferred to the trustees under the plan, the insurer by a vote of a majority of the directors may determine to make an offer, w/ the permission of the Commissioner & subject to such requirement as he may specify, to acquire by purchase all of the shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, at a specified price w/c the insurer considers to be their fair value as of the date of making such offer.

If the offer to acquire is permitted by the Commissioner, the insurer shall make a written offer by registered mail to each shareholder whose shares have not theretofore been acquired under the plan or otherwise, offering to acquire all his shares at such price if accepted in writing within thirty days after the mailing of such offer. Any shareholder accepting such offer, within the time therefor shall, within sixty days after his acceptance, transfer to the insurer the certificates representing such shares &, upon doing so, shall be paid by the insurer the amount of such offer for his shares. Any share so acquired shall be assigned & transferred to the trustees under the plan & held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

Each shareholder who does not accept such offer to acquire his shares within the time stated in such offer for acceptance thereof shall within fifteen days after the expiration of such offer apply to the Secretary of Finance for determination of the fair value of his shares as of the date of making such offer. The Secretary of Finance may himself, after due notice & hearing, determine upon the evidence received the fair value of the shares as of the date of making such offer, or appoint three impartial & disinterested persons to appraise the fair value of such shares w/ such direction as he shall deem proper & necessary to expedite the proceedings. Upon completion of the appraisal proceedings, the appraisers shall file w/ the Secretary of Finance their report in writing stating the fair value of such shares as of the date of the making of such offer & setting forth their findings in support of such statement. The appraisers shall furnish each party to the proceedings a copy of their appraisal report, & within ten days after receipt thereof any such party may signify his objection, if any, to the report or move for the approval thereof. Upon the expiration of the period of ten days referred to above, the report shall be set for hearing, after w/c the Secretary of Finance shall issue an order adopting, modifying or rejecting the report in whole or in part or he may receive further evidence or may recommit it w/ instructions. Whenever the Secretary of Finance shall determine in any manner, as aforesaid, the fair value of such shares, he may also determine the terms of payment thereof by the insurer. The expenses incidental to the proceedings including charges of the appraisers, if any, shall be paid equally by the insurer & the shareholder.

The findings of the Secretary of Finance on all questions of fact raised at the hearing of the application for determination of the fair value of such shares shall be conclusive upon all parties to the proceedings. The order of the Secretary of Finance determining the fair value of the shares & the terms of payment thereof shall have the force & effect of a judgment w/c shall be appealable on any question of law. Such order shall become final & executory fifteen days after receipt thereof by the parties to the proceedings.

Upon any such order becoming final & fr. w/c no appeal is pending, or when the time to appeal therefr. has expired, each shareholder party to the proceedings shall transfer his shares to the insurer & surrender to the said insurer the certificates representing such shares & the insurer shall make payment therefor as provided in such order. Any shares so acquired by the insurer shall be assigned & transferred to the trustees & held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

Any shareholder who does not apply to the Secretary of Finance in the manner & within the time hereinbefore prescribed shall be deemed to have accepted the offer referred to above, effective, however, upon the expiration of the time hereinabove prescribed for making such application, & such shareholder’s time for accepting such offer shall, for that purpose only, be deemed to have been extended accordingly.

Any offer to acquire shares made pursuant to this section shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be irrevocable until all proceedings upon such offer have been completed or all shares have otherwise been earlier acquired by the insurer.

Any shareholder who has expressly or impliedly accepted the plan or the offer to acquire his shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, & any shareholder who has rejected such plan or such offer & has applied, as aforesaid, to the Secretary of Finance for a determination of the fair value of his shares subsequent to w/c an agreement has been reached or a final order issued fixing such fair value but who fails to surrender his certificates for cancellation upon payment of the amount to w/c he is entitled, may be compelled to do so by an order of the Secretary of Finance for that purpose & such order may provide that upon failure of such shareholder to surrender such certificates for cancellation such order shall stand in lieu of such surrender & cancellation. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1280)

SECTION 270.       Such insurer, after mutualization, shall be a continuation of the original insurer, & such mutualization shall not affect such insurer’s certificate of authority nor existing suits, rights or contracts except as provided in said plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer, approved as provided in this chapter. Such insurer, after mutualization, shall exercise all the rights & powers & shall perform all the duties conferred or imposed by law upon insurers writing the classes of insurance written by it, & to protect rights & contracts existing prior to mutualization, subject to the effect of said plan. The board of directors of such insurer, prior to mutualization, may adopt amendments to its by‑laws to take effect upon mutualization.

SECTION 271.

(1)    An annual meeting of members shall be held at ten o’clock in the morning of the fourth Tuesday of March of each year at the principal office of the insurer, unless a different time or place be provided in the by‑laws.

(2)    Special meetings of the members, for any purpose or purposes whatsoever, may be called at any time by the president, or by the board of directors, or by one or more members holding not less than one‑fifth of the voting power of such insurer, or by such other officers or persons as the by‑laws authorize.

(3)    Notice of all meetings of members whether annual or special shall be given in writing to the members entitled to vote by the secretary, or an assistant secretary, or other person charged w/ that duty, or if there be no such officer, or in case of his neglect or refusal, by any director or member. At the option of the insurer such notice may be imprinted on premium notices of receipts or on both.

A notice may be given by such insurer to any member either personally, or by mail, or other means of written communication, charges prepaid, addressed to such member at his address appearing on the books of the insurer, or given by him to the insurer for the purpose of notice. If a member gives no address, notice shall be deemed to have been given him if sent by mail or other means of written communication addressed to the place where the principal office of the insurer is situated, or if published at least once in some newspaper of general circulation in the place in w/c said office is located.

Notice of any meeting of members shall be sent to each member entitled thereto not less than seven days before such meeting, unless the by‑laws provide otherwise.

Notice of any meeting of members shall specify the place, the day & the hour of the meeting & the general nature of the business to be transacted.

Notice of an annual meeting to be held at the time & place specified in sub‑paragraph one of this section shall be sufficiently given if published at least once in each of four successive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the place in w/c the principal office of such insurer is located, & if so published no other notice of such meeting shall be required.

(4)    The presence in person or by proxy of five per centum of the members entitled to vote at any meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, unless otherwise provided by the by‑laws.

(5)    Each such member shall have one vote at any meeting of members regardless of the number of policies or the amount of insurance that such member holds & regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance, or of health & accident insurance, or both. Any member entitled to vote shall have the right to do so either in person or by an agent or agents authorized by a written proxy executed by such person or his duly authorized agent & filed w/ the secretary of such insurer.

(6)    The directors of the insurer in office at the time the insurer is mutualized as provided in this chapter shall continue in office until the first annual meeting of members. At the first annual meeting of members & at each annual meeting thereafter directors shall be elected by the members for the term or terms authorized by this chapter.

(7)    The articles of incorporation or the bay‑laws may provide that the directors may be divided into two or more classes whose terms of office shall expire at different times, but no terms shall continue longer than six years. In the absence of such provisions, each director, except members of the board of directors at the time the insurer is mutualized, shall be elected for a term of one year. All directors shall hold office for a term for w/c they are elected & until their successors are elected & qualified. A director may, but need not be a member or policyholder of the insurer of w/c he is acting as director. Vacancies in the board of directors may be filled by a majority of the remaining directors, though less than a quorum, & each director so elected shall hold office until the next annual meeting.

(8)    All insurers mutualized under the provisions of this chapter shall be subject to all other applicable provisions of this Code & of the Corporation Law.

SECTION 272.       The provisions of Commonwealth Act No. 83, otherwise known as the Securities Act, as amended, shall not apply to any of the following:

(a)            Shares of the capital stock of such insurer acquired as provided in section two hundred sixty‑six & assigned & transferred to the trustees as is provided in said section, & the assignment & transfer of said shares as so provided;

(b)           Any certificate or other instrument issued to a policyholder of such mutualized insurer conferring or evidencing membership in such mutualized insurer or conferring or evidencing such member’s right to participate in the profits or share in the assets of such mutualized insurer by the virtue of his membership therein, & the issuance of such certificate or other instrument;

(c)            The plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer authorized by the provisions of this chapter, the submission of said plan to the Commissioner & to the policyholders of such insurer as provided in this chapter, & the approval & carrying out of said plan or any part thereof in accordance w/ the provisions of this chapter.

Title XVIII   WITHDRAWAL OF FOREIGN INSURANCE COMPANIES

SECTION 273.       A foreign insurance company doing business in the Philippines, upon payment of the fee hereinafter prescribed & surrender to the Commissioner of its certificate of authority, may apply to withdraw fr. the Philippines. Such application shall be duly executed in writing, accompanied by evidence of due authority for such execution, properly acknowledged.

SECTION 274.       The Commissioner shall publish the application for withdrawal daily for a period of one week in two newspapers of general circulation in the City of Manila, one in English & the other in Pilipino. The expenses of such publication shall be paid by the insurance company filing such application.

SECTION 275.       Every foreign insurance company desiring to withdraw fr. the Philippines shall, prior to such withdrawal, discharge its liabilities to policyholders & creditors in this country. In case of its policies insuring residents of the Philippines, it shall cause the primary liabilities under such policies to be reinsured & assumed by another insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the withdrawing company, it may cancel such policies pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such reinsurance & assumption of liabilities.

SECTION 276.       The Commissioner shall make an examination of the books & records of the withdrawing company, & if, upon such examination, the Commissioner finds that the insurer has no outstanding liabilities to residents of the Philippines, it shall cancel the withdrawing company’s certificate of authority, if unexpired, & shall permit the insurer to withdraw. The cost & expenses of all such examination shall be paid as prescribed in section four hundred seventeen.

SECTION 277.       Upon the failure of such withdrawing insurance company or its agents in the Philippines to pay the expenses of such publication within thirty days after the presentation of the bill therefor, the Commissioner shall collect such fee fr. the deposit furnished in accordance w/ the provisions of section one hundred ninety‑one.

SECTION 278.       A foreign life insurance company that withdraws fr. the Philippines shall be considered a “servicing insurance company” if its business transactions are confined to accepting periodic premium payments fr., or granting policy loans & paying cash surrender values of outstanding policies to, or reviving lapsed policies of, Philippine policyholders, & such other related services.

SECTION 279.       No company shall act as a servicing insurance company until after it shall have obtained a special certification of authority to act as such fr. the Commissioner upon application therefor & payment by the company of the fees hereinafter prescribed. Such certificate shall expire on the last day of June of each year & shall be renewed annually, while the company continues to service its policyholders, & to comply w/ all the applicable provisions of law & regulations.

Title XIX   PROFESSIONAL REINSURERS

SECTION 280.       Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no person, partnership, association or corporation shall transact any business in the Philippines as a professional reinsurer until it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose fr. the Commissioner upon the application therefor & payment by such person, partnership, association or corporation of the fees hereinafter prescribed. As used in this Code, the term “professional reinsurer” shall mean any person, partnership, association or corporation that transacts solely & exclusively reinsurance business in the Philippines.

The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any such person, partnership, association or corporation if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote public interest. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such person, partnership, association or corporation unless & until the Commissioner shall have satisfied himself by such examination as he may make & such evidence as he may require that such person, partnership, association or corporation is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein as a professional reinsurer.

Before issuing such certificate of authority of the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the applicant is not that of any other known company transacting insurance or reinsurance business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public.

Such certificate of authority shall expire on the last day of June of each year & shall be renewed annually if such person, partnership, association, or corporation is continuing to comply w/ provisions of this Code, or the circulars, instructions, rulings, or decisions of the Commissioner & such other pertinent law, rules & regulations.

Every such person, partnership, association, or corporation receiving such certificate of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code & other related laws, & to the jurisdiction & supervision of the Commissioner.

SECTION 281.       Any person, partnership, association, or corporation authorized to transact solely reinsurance business must have a paid‑up capital stock of at least ten million pesos, twenty‑five per centum of w/c must be invested in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner, consisting of bonds or other evidences of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government‑owned or controlled corporations & entities, including the Central Bank of the Philippines, & deposited w/ the Commissioner, & the remaining seventy‑five per centum in such other securities as may be allowed & permitted by the Commissioner, w/c securities shall at all times be maintained free fr. any lien or encumbrance; Provided, That reinsurers already doing business as such in the Philippines shall comply w/ the requirement of this section by increasing their respective capital as herein provided not later than December thirty‑one, nineteen hundred eighty; Provided, Further, That the provisions of this chapter applicable to insurance companies shall so far as practicable be likewise applicable to professional reinsurers. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455).

Title XX   HOLDING COMPANIES

SECTION 282.       As used in this title, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth unless the context shall otherwise require:

(a)            “Person” means an individual, partnership, firm, association, corporation, trust, any similar entity or any combination of the foregoing acting in concert;

(b)           “Control”, including the terms “controlling”, “controlled by” & “under common control w/”, means the possession directly or indirectly of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management & policies of a person, whether through the ownership of voting securities by a contract other than a commercial contract for goods or non‑management services or otherwise. Subject to section two hundred eight‑four, control shall be presumed to exist if any person directly or indirectly owns, controls or holds w/ the power to vote forty per centum or more of the voting securities of any other person; Provided, That no person shall be deemed to control another person solely by reason of his being an officer or director of such other person;

(c)            “Holding company” means any person who directly or indirectly controls any authorized insurer;

(d)           “Controlled insurer” means an authorized insurer controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company;

(e)            “Controlled person” means any person, other than a controlled insurer, who is controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company;

(f)            “Holding company system” means a holding company together w/ its controlled insurers & controlled persons.

SECTION 283.       Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of section two hundred eighty‑two, the Commissioner may determine after notice & opportunity to be heard, that a person exercises directly or indirectly either alone or pursuant to an agreement w/ one or more other persons such a controlling influence over the management or policies of an authorized insurer as to make it necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of policyholders or stockholders of the insurer that the person be deemed to control the insurer.

SECTION 284.       The Commissioner may determine upon application that any person, either alone or pursuant to agreement w/ one or more other persons, does not or will not upon the taking of some proposed action control another person. The filing of an application hereunder in good faith by any person shall relieve the applicant fr. any obligation or liability imposed by this title w/ respect to the subject of the application, except as contained in section two hundred ninety‑four, until the Commissioner has acted upon the application. Within thirty days or such further period as he may prescribe, the Commissioner may prospectively revoke or modify his determination, after notice & opportunity to be heard, whenever in his judgment revocation or modification is consistent w/ his title.

SECTION 285.       Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, the following shall not be deemed holding companies:

(a)            authorized insurers or reinsurers or their subsidiaries;

(b)           the Government of the Philippines, or any political subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, or any corporation w/c is wholly owned directly or indirectly by one or more of the foregoing.

The Commissioner may conditionally or unconditionally exempt any specified person or class of persons fr. any of the obligations or liabilities imposed under this title, if & to the extent he finds the exemption necessary to appropriate in the public interest or not adverse to the interests of policyholders or stockholders & consistent w/ the purposes of this title.

SECTION 286.

(1)    Every person who on the date this Code takes effect is a controlled insurer & every person who thereafter becomes a controlled insurer, shall, within sixty days thereafter, or within thirty days after becoming a controlled insurer, w/cever is later, register w/ the Commissioner. Such registration shall be amended within thirty days following any change in the identity of its holding company. The Commissioner may grant one or more reasonable extensions of the time to register.

(2)    Every registrant shall furnish the Commissioner w/ the following information concerning its holding company: (a) a copy of its charter or articles of incorporation & its by‑laws, (b) the identities of its principal shareholders, officers, directors & controlled persons, & (c) information as to its capital structure & financial condition, & a description of its principal business activities.

SECTION 287.       Every controlled insurer shall file w/ the Commissioner such reports or material as he may direct for the purpose of disclosing information concerning the operations of persons within the holding company system w/c may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of the insurer.

SECTION 288.       Every holding company & every controlled person within a holding company system shall be subject to examination by order of the Commissioner if he has cause to believe that the operations of such persons may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of any controlled insurer w/ the system & that he is unable to obtain relevant information fr. such controlled insurer. The grounds relied upon by the Commissioner for such examination shall be stated in his order, w/c order shall be subject to judicial review only at the instance of the person sought to be examined. Such examination shall be confined to matters specified in the order. The cost of such examination shall be assessed against the person examined & no portion thereof shall thereafter be reimbursed to it directly or indirectly by the controlled insurer.

SECTION 289.       The Commissioner shall keep the contents of each report made pursuant to this title & any information obtained by him in connection therewith confidential & shall not make the same public without the prior written consent of the controlled insurer to w/c it pertains unless the Commissioner after notice & an opportunity to be heard shall determine that the interests of policyholders, stockholders or the public will be served by the publication thereof. In any action or proceeding by the Commissioner against the person examined or any other person within the same holding company system a report of such examination published by him shall be admissible as evidence of the facts stated therein.

SECTION 290.       Transactions within a holding company system to w/c a controlled insurer is a party shall be subject to the following:

(a)            The terms shall be fair & equitable;

(b)           charges or fees for services performed shall be reasonable;

(c)            expenses incurred & payments received shall be allocated to the insurer on an equitable basis in conformity w/ customary insurance accounting practices consistently applied.

The books, accounts & records of each party to all such transactions shall be maintained as to clearly & accurately disclose the nature & details of the transactions including such accounting information as is necessary to support the reasonableness of the charges or fees to the respective parties.

SECTION 291.       The prior written approval of the Commissioner shall be required for the following transactions between a controlled insurer & any person in its holding company system: sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving five per centum or more of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty‑first day of December next preceding.

SECTION 292.       The following transactions between a controlled insurer & any person in its holding company system may not be entered into unless the insurer has notified the Commissioner in writing of its intention to enter into any such transaction at least thirty days prior thereto, or such shorter period as he may permit, & he has not disapproved it within such period:

(a)            sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving more than one‑half of one per centum but less than five per centum of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty‑first day of December next preceding;

(b)           reinsurance treaties or agreements;

(c)            rendering of services on a regular or systematic basis; or

(d)           any material transaction, specified by regulation, w/c the Commissioner determines may adversely affect the interest of the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders or of the public.

Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to authorize or permit any transaction w/c, in the case of a non‑controlled insurer, would be otherwise contrary to law.

SECTION 293.       The Commissioner, in reviewing transactions pursuant to sections two hundred ninety‑one & two hundred ninety‑two, shall consider whether the transactions comply w/ the standard set forth in section two hundred ninety & whether they may adversely affect the interests of policyholders. This section shall not apply to transactions subject to other sections of this Code w/c impose notice or approval requirements greater than those prescribed by this title.

SECTION 294.

(1)    No person, other than an authorized insurer, shall acquire control of any domestic insurer, whether by purchase of its securities or otherwise, except (a) after twenty days written notice to its insurer or such shorter period as the Commissioner may permit, of its intention to acquire control, & (b) w/ the prior written approval of the Commissioner.

(2)    The Commissioner shall disapprove the acquisition of control of a domestic insurer if he determines, after notice & an opportunity to be heard, that such action is reasonably necessary to protect the interest of the people of this country. The following shall be the only factors to be considered by him in reaching the foregoing determination: (a) the financial condition of the acquiring person or & the insurer; (b) the trustworthiness of the acquiring person or any of its officers or directors; (c) a plan for the proper & effective conduct of the insurer’s operations; (d) the source of the funds or assets for the acquisition; (e) the fairness of any exchange of stock, assets, cash or other consideration for the stock or assets to be received; (f) whether the effect of the acquisition may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance or to tend to create a monopoly therein; & (g) whether the acquisition is likely to be hazardous or prejudicial to the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders.

(3)    The following conditions affecting any controlled insurer, regardless of when such control has been acquired, are violations of this title: (a) the controlling person or any of its officers or directors have demonstrated untrustworthiness; & (b) the effect of retention of control may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance in this country or to tend to create a monopoly therein. If, after notice & an opportunity to be heard, the Commissioner determines that any of the foregoing violations exists, he shall reduce his findings to writing & shall issue an order based thereon & cause the same to be served upon the insurer & upon all persons affected thereby directing any person found to be in violation thereof to take appropriate action to cure such violation. Upon the failure of any such person to comply w/ such order, section two hundred ninety‑eight shall become applicable.

(4)    The Commissioner may require the submission of such information as he deems necessary to determine whether any acquisition or retention of control complies w/ this title & may require, as a condition of approval of such acquisition or retention of control, that all or any portion of such information be disclosed to the insurer’s stockholders.

(5)    Unless subject to registration under section two hundred eighty‑six or unless acquisition of its control is subject to paragraphs one & two hereof, every authorized insurer shall, on or before the first day of July, nineteen hundred seventy‑five, or within thirty days after any event requiring notice hereunder, w/cever is later, notify the Commissioner in writing of the identity of any person whom the insurer then knows or has reason to believe controls or has taken any action, other than preliminary negotiations or discussion, to acquire control of the insurer.

SECTION 295.

(1)    Notwithstanding the control of an authorized insurer by any person, the officers & directors of the insurer shall not thereby be relieved of any obligation or liability to w/c they would otherwise be subject by law, & the insurer shall be managed so as to assure its separate operating identity consistent w/ this title.

(2)    Nothing herein shall preclude an authorized insurer fr. having or sharing a common management or cooperative or joint use of personnel, property or services w/ one or more other persons under arrangements meeting the standards of section two hundred ninety.

SECTION 296.       To the extent that any information or material is set forth in forms or other matter on file w/ any government agency or in a registration form filed w/ the Commissioner by another person within the same holding company system, the controlled insurer may comply w/ the registration or reporting requirements of this title by referring in its registration form or report to such other filed matter & attaching a copy thereof certified by the insurer as a true & complete copy, to such registration form or report or, if such other filed matter is on file w/ the Commissioner, incorporating such matter by reference.

SECTION 297.       No holding company or controlled person shall directly or indirectly or through another person do or cause to be done for or in behalf of the controlled insurer any act intended to affect the insurance operations of the insurer w/c, if done by the insurer, would violate any provision of this Code.

SECTION 298.       In addition to any other penalty provided by law, the Commissioner may, upon the willful failure of any person within a holding company system to comply w/ this title or any regulation or order promulgated hereunder:

(a)            proceed under title fourteen or title fifteen, Chapter III, of this Code w/ respect to insurer within the holding company system; or

(b)           revoke or refuse to renew the authority to do business in this country of an insurer within the holding company system or refuse to issue such authority to any other insurer in the system; or

direct that, in addition to any other penalty provided by law, such person forfeit to the people of this country a sum not exceeding five hundred pesos for a first violation & two thousand five hundred pesos for any subsequent violation. An additional sum not exceeding two thousand five hundred pesos shall be imposed for each month during w/c any such violation shall continue.

CHAPTER IV — SALES AGENCIES AND TECHNICAL SERVICES

Title I   INSURANCE AGENTS AND INSURANCE BROKERS

SECTION 299.       No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, nor any agent  thereof, shall pay any commission or other compensation to any person for services in obtaining insurance, unless such person shall have first procured fr. the Commissioner a license to act as an insurance agent of such company or as an insurance broker as hereinafter provided.

No person shall act as an insurance agent or as an insurance broker in the solicitation or procurement of applications for insurance, or receive for services in obtaining insurance, any commission or other compensation fr. any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or any agent thereof, without first procuring a license to act fr. the Commissioner, w/c must be renewed annually on the first day of January, or within six months thereafter. Such license shall be issued by the Commissioner only upon the written application of the person desiring it, such application if for a license to act as insurance agent, being approved & countersigned by the company such person desires to represent, & shall be upon a form prescribed by the Commissioner giving such information as he may require, & upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed. The Commissioner shall satisfy himself as to competence & trustworthiness of the applicant & shall have the right to refuse to issue or renew & to suspend or revoke any such license in his discretion. No such license shall be valid after the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 300.       Any person who for compensation solicits or obtains insurance on behalf of any insurance company or transmits for a person other than himself an application for a policy or contract of insurance to or fr. such company or offers or assumes to act in the negotiating of such insurance shall be an insurance agent within the intent of this section & shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities & penalties to w/c an insurance agent is subject.

SECTION 301.       Any person who for any compensation, commission or other thing of value acts or aids in any manner in soliciting, negotiating or procuring the making of any insurance contract or in placing risk or taking out insurance, on behalf of an insured other than himself, shall be an insurance broker within the intent of this Code, & shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities & penalties to w/c an insurance broker is subject.

SECTION 302.       Every applicant for an insurance broker’s license shall file w/ the application & shall thereafter maintain in force while so licensed, a bond in favor of the people of the Republic of the Philippines executed by a company authorized to become surety upon official recognizances, stipulations, bonds & undertakings. The bond shall be in such amount as may be fixed by the Commissioner, but in no case less than one hundred thousand pesos, & shall be conditioned upon full accounting & due payment to the person entitled thereto of funds coming into the broker’s possession through insurance transactions under license. The bond shall remain in force until released by the Commissioner, or until cancelled by the surety. Without prejudice to any liability previously incurred thereunder, the surety may cancel the bond on thirty days advance written notice to both the broker & the Commissioner.

Upon approval of the application, the applicant must also file two errors & omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies issued separately by two insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines, satisfactory to the Commissioner to indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as insurance broker w/c may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as insurance broker, provided that the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than five hundred thousand pesos. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 303.       The Commissioner shall, in order to determine the competence of every applicant to have the kind of license applied for, require such applicant to submit to a written examination & to pass the same to the satisfaction of the Commissioner. Such examination shall be held at such times & places as the Commissioner shall fr. time to time determine.

SECTION 304.       An applicant for the written examination mentioned in the preceding section must be of good moral character & must not have been convicted of any crime involving moral turpitude. He must satisfactorily show to the Commissioner that he has been trained in the kind of insurance contemplated in the license applied for.

Such examination may be waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the applicant has undergone extensive education &/or training in insurance.

SECTION 305.       An application for the issuance or renewal of a license to act as an insurance agent or insurance broker may be refused, or such license, if already issued or renewed, shall be suspended or revoked if the Commissioner finds that the applicant for, or holder of, such license:

(a)            has willfully violated any provision of this Code; or

(b)           has intentionally made a material misstatement in the application to qualify for such license; or

(c)            has obtained or attempted to obtain a license by fraud or misrepresentation; or

(d)           has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or

(e)            has misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld moneys required to be held in a fiduciary capacity;

(f)            has not demonstrated trustworthiness & competence to transact business as an insurance agent or insurance broker in such manner as to safeguard the public; or

(g)           has materially misrepresented the terms & conditions of policies or contracts of insurance w/c he seeks to sell or has sold; or

(h)            has failed to pass the written examination prescribed, if not otherwise exempt fr. taking the same.

In addition to the foregoing causes, no license to act as insurance agent or insurance broker shall be renewed if the holder thereof has not been actively engaged as such agent or broker in accordance w/ such rules as the Commissioner may prescribe. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1814)

SECTION 306.       The premium, or any portion thereof, w/c an insurance agent or insurance broker collects fr. an insured & w/c is to be paid to an insurance company because of the assumption of liability through the issuance of policies or contracts of insurance, shall be held by the agent or broker in a fiduciary capacity & shall not be misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld by the agent or broker.

Any insurance company w/c delivers to an insurance agent or insurance broker a policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed to have authorized such agent or broker to receive on its behalf payment of any premium w/c is due on such policy or contract of insurance at the time of its issuance or delivery or w/c becomes due thereon.

SECTION 307.       Any provision of existing laws to the contrary notwithstanding, no person shall, within the Philippines, sell or offer for sale a variable contract or do or perform any act or thing in the sale, negotiation, making or consummating of any variable contract other than for himself unless such person shall have a valid & current license fr. the Commissioner authorizing such person to act as a variable contract agent. No such license shall be issued unless & until the Commissioner is satisfied, after examination that such person is by training, knowledge, ability & character qualified to act as such agent. Any such license may be withdrawn & cancelled by the Commissioner after notice & hearing, if he shall find that the holder thereof does not then have the qualifications required for the issuance of such license.

SECTION 308.       It shall be unlawful for any person, company or corporation in the Philippines to act as general agent of any insurance company unless he is empowered by a written power of attorney duly executed by such insurance company, & registered w/ the Commissioner to receive notices, summons & legal processes for & in behalf of the insurance company concerned in connection w/ actions or other legal proceedings against said insurance company. It shall be the duty of said general agent to notify the Commissioner of his post office address in the Philippines, or any change thereof. Notices, summons, or processes of any kind sent by registered mail to the last registered address of such general agent of the company concerned or to the Commissioner shall be sufficient service & deemed as if served on the insurance company itself.

SECTION 309.       Except as otherwise provided by law or treaty, it shall be unlawful for any person, partnership, association or corporation in the Philippines, for himself or itself, or for some other person, partnership, association or corporation, either to procure, receive or forward applications of insurance in, or to issue or to deliver or accept policies or contracts of insurance of or for, any insurance company or companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines, covering risks, life or nonlife, situated in the Philippines; & any such person, partnership, association or corporation violating the provisions of this section shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, & upon conviction thereof, shall for each such offense be punished by a fine of ten thousand pesos, or imprisonment of six months, or both at the discretion of the court; Provided, That the provisions of this section shall not apply to reinsurance.

Title II   REINSURANCE BROKERS

SECTION 310.       Except as provided in the next succeeding title, no person shall act as reinsurance broker in the Philippines unless he is authorized as such by the Commissioner.

A reinsurance broker is one who, for compensation, not being a duly authorized agent, employee or officer of an insurer in w/c any reinsurance is effected, act or aids in any manner in negotiating contracts of reinsurance, or placing risks of effecting reinsurance, for any insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines.

SECTION 311.       Upon application & payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed, & the filing of two errors & omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies hereinafter described, a person may, if found qualified, be issued a license to act as reinsurance broker by the Commissioner. No such license shall be valid after the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

The errors & omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies mentioned above shall indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as reinsurance broker w/c may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as reinsurance broker; Provided, That the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be issued separately by two insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines & shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than five hundred thousand pesos. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 312.       The Commissioner may recall, suspend or revoke the license granted to a reinsurance broker for violation of any existing law, rule & regulation, or any provision of this Code after due notice & hearing.

Title III   RESIDENT AGENTS

SECTION 313.       No person shall act as resident agent, as hereinafter defined, unless he is registered as such w/ the Commissioner.

SECTION 314.       The term “resident agent”, as used in this title, is one duly appointed by a foreign insurer or broker not authorized to do business in the Philippines to receive in its behalf notices, summons & legal processes in connection w/ actions or other legal proceedings against such foreign insurer or broker.

SECTION 315.       The application for a certificate of registration as resident agent filed w/ the Commissioner must be accompanied w/: (a) a copy of the power of attorney, duly notarized & authenticated by the Philippine Consul in the place where such foreign insurer or broker is domiciled, empowering the applicant to act as resident agent & to receive notices, summons & legal processes for & in behalf of such foreign insurer or broker in connection w/ any action or legal proceeding against such foreign insurer or broker; & (b) a copy of the corresponding certificate issued by the Board of Investments as required under Section 4 of Republic Act No. 5455, if such foreign insurer or broker is not otherwise exempt fr. such requirement.

SECTION 316.       It shall be the duty of such resident agent to notify immediately the Commissioner of any change of his office address.

SECTION 317.       A certificate of registration issued to a resident agent shall expire on the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

The Commissioner may, after due notice & hearing, recall or cancel the certificate of registration issued to a resident agent for violation of any existing law, rule or regulation, or any provision of this Code. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455).

Title IV   NON‑LIFE COMPANY UNDERWRITER

SECTION 318.       No person shall act, & no company shall employ any person, as non‑life company underwriter, whose duty & responsibility it shall be to select, evaluate & accept risks for, & to determine the terms & conditions, including those pertaining to amounts of retentions, under w/c such risks are to be accepted by the company, unless such underwriter is registered as such w/ the Commissioner.

SECTION 319.       Every non‑life insurance company doing business in the Philippines must maintain at all times a register of risks accepted & a claims register for each line of risks engaged in by such non‑life insurance company w/ such entries therein as are now or as may hereafter be required by the Commissioner, & it shall be the responsibility of the underwriter on the particular line or risk involved to see to it that the said registers are well maintained & kept, & that all entries therein are properly & correctly recorded. Such registers shall be open to inspection & examination of duly authorized representative of the Commissioner at all times during business hours.

SECTION 320.       No person shall be registered w/ the Commissioner, unless such person shall be at least twenty‑one years of age on the date of such registration; a resident of the Philippines; of good moral character & w/ no conviction of any crime involving moral turpitude; has had at the time such registration is made at least two years of underwriting work in the particular line or risk involved; & has passed such qualifying written examination that the Commissioner shall conduct at such time & in such place as he may decide to hold for applicants desiring to act as underwriters.

Such examination shall not be required of any person who has served as non‑life company underwriter for a period of at least five years, if the Commissioner is satisfied of the applicant’s competence as shown by the results of his underwriting work in the non‑life insurance company or companies that employed him in that capacity. The minimum underwriting experience herein required may be reduced or waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the non‑life company underwriter has undergone extensive education &/or training in insurance.

SECTION 321.       Any applicant who misrepresents or omits any material fact in his application for registration as a non‑life company underwriter, or commits any dishonest act in taking or in connection w/ the qualifying written examination for underwriters, shall be barred fr. being registered as such non‑life company underwriter &, if already registered, his registration shall be cancelled & the certificate of registration issued in his favor shall be recalled immediately by the Commissioner.

In the event that the certificate of authority of a non‑life insurance company to transact business is suspended or revoked due to business failure arising largely fr. the imprudent & injudicious acceptance of risks by the underwriter concerned, the registration of such underwriter shall likewise be cancelled & his certificate of registration shall be recalled by the Commissioner, & no similar certificate shall thereafter be issued in his favor.

SECTION 322.       No certificate of registration issued to an underwriter shall be valid after the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

The Commissioner may, after due notice & hearing, also suspend or cancel such certificate for violation of existing laws, rules & regulations or of any provisions of this Code. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

Title V   ADJUSTERS

SECTION 323.       No person, partnership, association, or corporation shall act as an adjuster, as hereinafter defined, unless authorized so to act by virtue of a license issued or renewed by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code; Provided, That in the case of a natural person, he must be a Filipino citizen & in the case of a partnership, association or corporation, at least sixty per centum of its capital must be owned by citizens of the Philippines.

SECTION 324.       An adjuster may be an independent adjuster or a public adjuster.

The term “independent adjuster” means any person, partnership, association or corporation w/c, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts for or on behalf of an insurer in the adjusting of claims arising under insurance contracts or policies issued by such insurer.

The term “public adjuster” means any person, partnership, association or corporation w/c, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts on behalf of an insured in negotiating for, or effecting, the settlement of a claim or claims of the said insured arising under insurance contracts or policies, or w/c advertises for or solicits employment as an adjuster of such claims.

SECTION 325.       For every line of insurance claim adjustment, adjusters shall be licensed either as independent adjusters or as public adjusters. No adjuster shall act on behalf of an insurer unless said adjuster is licensed as an independent adjuster; & no adjuster shall act on behalf of an insured unless said adjuster is licensed as a public adjuster: Provided, however, That when a firm or person has been licensed as public adjuster, he shall not be granted another license as independent adjuster & vice versa.

No license, however, shall be required of any company adjuster who is a salaried employee of an insurance company for the adjustment of claims filed under policies issued by such insurance company.

SECTION 326.       Such license or any renewal thereof may be issued by the Commissioner upon written application filed by the person interested on the form or forms prescribed by the Commissioner, w/c shall contain such information as he may require, & upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed.

SECTION 327.       The Commissioner shall conduct, at such times, & in such places as he may decide to hold, written examinations to determine the competence & ability of applicants desiring to act as adjuster of insurance claims.

SECTION 328.       Every adjuster’s license issued hereunder shall be valid until after the thirtieth day of June of the year following the issuance of such license unless it is renewed. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 329.       Nothing contained in this title shall apply to any duly licensed attorney‑at‑law who acts or aids in adjusting insurance claims as an incident to the practice of his profession & who does not advertise himself as an adjuster.

SECTION 330.       The Commissioner may suspend or revoke any adjuster’s license if, after giving notice & hearing to the adjuster concerned, the Commissioner finds that the said adjuster (1) has violated any provision of this Code & of the circulars, rulings & instructions of the Commissioner or has violated any law in the course of his dealings as an adjuster; or (2) has made a material misstatement in the application for such license; or (3) has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or (4) has demonstrated his incompetence or untrustworthiness to act as adjuster; or (5) has made patently unjust valuation of loss; or (6) has failed to make a report of the adjustment he proposed within sixty days fr. the date of the filing of the claim by the insured w/ the insurer, unless prevented so to do by reasons beyond his control; or has refused to allow an examination into his affairs or method of doing business as hereinafter provided.

SECTION 331.       Every adjuster shall submit to the Commissioner a quarterly report of all losses w/c are the subject of adjustment effected by him during each month in the form prescribed by the Commissioner. The report shall be filed within one month after the end of each quarter.

SECTION 332.       Every adjuster shall keep his or its books, records, reports, accounts, & vouchers in such manner that the Commissioner or his duly authorized representatives may readily verify the quarterly reports of the said adjuster & ascertain whether the said adjuster has complied w/ the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon him or whether the method of doing business of the said adjuster has been fair, just & honest.

SECTION 333.       The Commissioner shall, at least once a year & whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs & method of doing business of every adjuster.

SECTION 334.       Any violation of any provision of this title shall be punished by a fine of not more than ten thousand pesos, or by imprisonment in the discretion of the court; Provided, That, in case of a partnership, association or corporation, the said penalty shall be imposed upon the partner, president, manager, managing director, director or person in charge of its business or responsible for the violation.

Title VI   ACTUARIES

SECTION 335.       No life insurance company shall be licensed to do business in the Philippines nor shall any life insurance company doing business in the Philippines be allowed to continue doing such business unless they shall engage the services of an actuary duly accredited w/ the Commissioner who shall, during his tenure of office, be directly responsible for the direction & supervision of all actuarial work connected w/ or that may be involved in the business of the insurance company.

SECTION 336.       Any person may be officially accredited by the Commissioner to act as any actuary in any life insurance company or in any mutual benefit association authorized to do business in the Philippines upon application therefor & the payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed, Provided that: (1) he is a fellow of good standing of the Acturial Society of the Philippines at the time of his appointment & remains in such good standing during the tenure of his engagement; or (2) in the case of one who is not a fellow of the Acturial Society of the Philippines, he meets all the requirements of the said Society for accreditation as a fellow of the Society, & has been given permission by the pertinent government authorities in the Philippines to render services in the Philippines, in the event that he is not a citizen of the Philippines.

No certificate of registration issued under this title shall be valid after the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 337.       The following documents, w/c are fr. time to time submitted to the Commissioner by a life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines, shall be duly certified by an accredited actuary employed by such company:

1.             Policy reserves & net due & deferred premiums.

2.             Statements of bases & net premiums, loading for gross premiums, & on non‑forfeiture values & reserves, when applying for approval of gross premiums, reserves & non‑forfeiture values.

3.             Policies of insurance under any plan submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

4.             Annual statements & valuation reports submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

5.             Financial projection showing the probable income & outgo & reserve requirements, enumerating the acturial assumptions & bases of projections.

6.             Valuation of annuity funds or retirement plans.

Any life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines may employ any person who is not officially accredited under either of the qualifications for any kind of acturial work, provided that he shall not, at any time, have the authority to certify to the correctness of the foregoing documents.

SECTION 338.       No accredited actuary shall serve more than one client or employer at the same time. However, one already in the employ of an insurance company may be allowed by the Commissioner to serve a mutual benefit association or any other insurance company, provided the following conditions are first complied w/: (a) that the request to engage his services by the other employer is in writing; (b) that his present employer acquiesced to it in writing; & (c) that he furnishes the Commissioner w/ copies of said request & acquiescence.

Title VII   RATING ORGANIZATION AND RATE MAKING

SECTION 339.       Every organization w/c now exists or w/c may hereafter be formed for the purpose of making rates to be used by more than one insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall be known as a “rating organization.”  The term “rate” as used in this title shall generally mean the ratio of the premium to the amount insured & shall include, as the context may require, either the consideration to be paid or charged for insurance contracts, including surety bonds, or the elements & factors forming the basis for the determination or application of the same, or both.

SECTION 340.       Every rating organization w/c now exists or w/c may hereafter be formed shall be subject to the provisions of this title.

SECTION 341.       No rating organization hereafter formed shall commence rate‑making operations until it shall have obtained a license fr. the Commissioner. Before obtaining such license, such rating organization shall file w/ the Commissioner a notice of its intention to commence rate‑making operations, a copy of its constitution, articles of agreement or association, or of incorporation, & its by‑laws, a list of insurance companies that have agreed to become members or subscribers, & such other information concerning such rating organization & its operations as may be required by the Commissioner. If the Commissioner finds that the organization has complied w/ the provisions of law & that it has a sufficient number of members or subscribers & is otherwise qualified to function as a rating organization, the Commissioner may issue a license to such rating organization authorizing it to make rates for the kinds of insurance or subdivisions thereof as may be specified in such license. No license issued to a rating organization shall be valid after the thirtieth day of June of the year following its issuance unless it is renewed. No rating organization w/c now exists & is not licensed pursuant to this section shall continue rate‑making operations until it shall have obtained fr. the Commissioner a license w/c he may issue if satisfied that such organization is complying w/ the provisions of this title. Every rating organization shall notify the Commissioner promptly of every change in (1) its constitution, its articles of agreement or association or its certificate of incorporation, & its by‑laws rules & regulations governing the conduct of its business, & (2) its list of members & subscribers.

A “member” means an insurer who participates in or is entitled to participate in the management of a rating organization.

A “subscriber” means an insurer w/c is furnished at its request w/ rates & rating manuals by a rating organization of w/c it is not a member. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 342.       Each rating organization shall furnish its rating service without discrimination to all of its members & subscribers, & shall, subject to reasonable rules & regulations, permit any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, not admitted to membership, to become a subscriber to its rating services for any kind of insurance or subdivisions thereof. Notice of proposed changes in such rules & regulations shall be given to subscribers. The reasonableness of any rule or regulation in its application to subscribers, or the refusal of any rating organization to admit an insurance company as a subscriber, shall, at the request of any subscriber or any such insurance company, be reviewed by the Commissioner at a hearing held upon at least ten days’ written notice to such rating organization & to such subscriber or insurance company. The Commissioner may, after such hearing, issue an appropriate order.

SECTION 343.       No rating organization or any other association shall refuse to do business w/, or prohibit or prevent the payment of commissions to, any person licensed as an insurance broker pursuant to the provisions of title one of this chapter.

SECTION 344.       Rating organization shall be subject to examination by the Commissioner, as often as he may deem such examination expedient, pursuant to the provisions of this Code applicable to the examination of insurance companies. He shall cause such an examination of each rating organization to be made at least once in every five years.

SECTION 345.       The Commissioner may suspend or revoke the license of any rating organization w/c fails to comply w/ his order within the time limited by such order, or any extension thereof w/c he may grant. The Commissioner may determine when a suspension of license shall become effective & it shall remain in effect for the period fixed by him, unless he modifies or rescinds such suspension.

SECTION 346.       Any rating organization may subscribe for or purchase acturial, technical or other services, & such services shall be available to all members & subscribers without discrimination.

SECTION 347.       Any rating organization may provide for the examination of policies, daily reports, binders, renewal certificates, endorsements or other evidences of insurance, or the cancellation thereof, & may make reasonable rules governing their submission. Such rules shall contain a provision that in the event an insurance company does not within sixty days furnish satisfactory evidence to the rating organization of the correction of any error or omission previously called to its attention by the rating organization, it shall be the duty of the rating organization to notify the Commissioner thereof. All information so submitted for examination shall be confidential.

SECTION 348.       Cooperation among rating organizations or among rating organizations & insurers in rate making or in other matters within the scope of this title is hereby authorized, provided the filings resulting fr. such cooperation are subject to all provisions of this title w/c are applicable to filings generally. The Commissioner may review such cooperative activities & practices & if he finds that any such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent w/ the provisions of this title, he may issue a written order specifying in what respects such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent w/ the provisions of this title, & requiring the discontinuance of such activity or practice.

SECTION 349.       Every rating organization & every insurance company w/c makes & files its own rates, shall make rates for all risks rated by such organization or insurance company in accordance w/ the following provisions:

(a)            Basic classification, manual, minimum, class, or schedule rates or rating plans, shall be made & adopted for all such risks. Any departure fr. such rates shall be in accordance w/ schedules, rating plans & rules filed w/ the Commissioner;   aisa dc

(b)           Rates shall be reasonable & adequate for the class of risks to w/c they apply;

(c)            No rate shall discriminate unfairly between risks involving essentially the same hazards & expense elements or between risks in the application of like charges & credits;

(d)           Consideration shall be given to the past & prospective loss experience, including the conflagration & catastrophe hazards, if any, to all factors reasonably attributable to the class of risks, to a reasonable profit, to commissions paid during the most recent annual period & to past & prospective other expenses. In case of fire insurance rates, consideration shall be given to the experience of the fire insurance business during a period of not less than five years next preceding the year in w/c the review is made;

(e)            Risk may be grouped by classifications for the establishment of rates & minimum premiums. Classification rates may be modified to produce rates for individual risks in accordance w/ rating plans w/c establish standards for measuring variations in hazards or expense provisions, or both. Such standards may measure any difference among risks that can be demonstrated to have a probable effect upon losses or expenses.

SECTION 350.       No rating organization & no insurance company w/c makes & files its own rates shall make or promulgate any rate or schedule of rates w/c is to be applied to any fire risk on the condition that the whole amount of insurance on any risk or any specified part thereof shall be placed w/ the members of or subscribers to such rating organization or w/ such insurer.

SECTION 351.       Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall annually file w/ the rating organization of w/c it is a member or subscriber, or w/ such other agency as the Commissioner may designate, a statistical report showing a classification schedule of its premiums & losses on all kinds or types of insurance business to w/c section three hundred forty‑nine is applicable, & such other information as the Commissioner may deem necessary or expedient for the administration of the provisions of this title.

SECTION 352.       Every non‑life rating organization & every non‑life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall file w/ the Commissioner, except as to risks w/c by general custom of the business are not written according to manual rates or rating plans, every rate manual, schedule of rates, classification of risks, rating plan, & every other rating rule & every modification of any of the foregoing w/c it proposes to use. An insurance company may satisfy its obligation to make such filings for any kind or type of insurance by becoming a member of or subscriber to a rating organization w/c makes such filings for such kind or type of insurance, & by authorizing the Commissioner to accept such filings of the rating organization on behalf of such insurance company.

SECTION 353.       Every manual or schedule of rates & every rating plan filed as provided in the preceding section shall state or clearly indicate the character & extent of the coverage to w/c any such rate or any modification thereof will be applied.

SECTION 354.       The Commissioner shall review filings as soon as reasonably possible after they have been made in order to determine whether they meet the requirements of this title. When a filing is not accompanied by the information upon w/c the insurance company supports such filing, & the Commissioner does not have sufficient information to determine whether such filing meets the requirements of this title, he shall require such insurance company to furnish the information upon w/c it supports such filing. The information furnished in support of a filing may include: (1) the experience or judgment of the insurance company or rating organization making the filing, (2) its interpretation of any statistical data it relies upon, (3) the experience of other insurance companies or rating organization, or (4) any other relevant factors.

SECTION 355.       If the Commissioner finds that any rate filings theretofore filed w/ him do not comply w/ the provisions of this title or that they provide rates or rules w/c are inadequate, excessive, unfairly discriminatory or otherwise unreasonable, he may order the same withdrawn & at the expiration of sixty days thereafter the same shall be deemed no longer on file. Before making any such finding & order, the Commissioner shall give notice, not less than ten days in advance, & a hearing, to the rating organization, or to the insurer, w/c filed the same. Such order shall not affect any contract or policy made or issued prior to the expiration of such sixty day period.

SECTION 356.       No member or subscriber of a rating organization, & no insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or agent, employee or other representative of such company, & no insurance broker shall charge or demand a rate or receive a premium w/c deviates fr. the rates, rating plans, classifications, schedules, rules & standards, made & last filed by a rating organization or by or on behalf of the insurance company, or shall issue or make any policy or contract involving violation of such rate filings.

SECTION 357.       Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, upon the written application of the insurer, stating his reasons therefor, filed w/ & approved by the Commissioner, a rate in excess of that provided by a filing otherwise applicable may be used on any specific risk.

SECTION 358.       Whenever the Commissioner shall determine, after notice & a hearing, that the rates charged or filed on any class of risks are excessive, discriminatory, inadequate or unreasonable, he shall order that such rates be appropriately adjusted. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this section, the Commissioner may fr. time to time approve reasonable classifications of risks for any or all such classes, having due regard to the past & prospective loss experience, including conflagration or catastrophe hazards, if any, to all other relevant factors & to a reasonable profit.

SECTION 359.       Nothing contained in this title shall be construed as requiring any insurer to become a member of or subscriber to any rating organization.

SECTION 360.       Agreements may be made among insurance companies w/ respect to the equitable apportionment among them of insurance w/c may be afforded applicants who are in good faith entitled to but are unable to procure such insurance through ordinary methods & such insurance companies may agree among themselves on the use of reasonable rates & modifications for such insurance, such agreements & rate modifications to be subject to the approval of the Commissioner; Provided, however, That the provisions of this section shall not be deemed to apply to workmen’s compensation insurance.

SECTION 361.       No insurance company doing business in the Philippines or any agent thereof, no insurance broker, & no employee or other representative of any such insurance company, agent, or broker, shall make, procure or negotiate any contract of insurance or agreement as to policy contract, other than is plainly expressed in the policy or other written contract issued or to be issued as evidence thereof, or shall directly or indirectly, by giving or sharing a commission or in any manner whatsoever, pay or allow or offer to pay or allow to the insured or to any employee of such insured, either as an inducement to the making of such insurance or after such insurance has been effected, any rebate fr. the premium w/c is specified in the policy, or any special favor or advantage in the dividends or other benefits to accrue thereon, or shall give or offer to give any valuable consideration or inducement of any kind, directly or indirectly, w/c is not specified in such policy or contract of insurance; nor shall any such company, or any agent thereof, as to any policy or contract of insurance issued, make any discrimination against any Filipino in the sense that he is given less advantageous rates, dividends or other policy conditions or privileges than are accorded to other nationals because of his race.

SECTION 362.       No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, & no officer, director, or agent thereof, & no insurance broker or any other person, partnership or corporation shall issue or circulate or cause or permit to be issued or circulated any literature, illustration, circular or statement of any sort misrepresenting the terms of any policy issued by any insurance company of the benefits or advantages promised thereby, or any misleading estimate of the dividends or share of surplus to be received thereon, or shall use any name or title of any policy or class of policies misrepresenting the true nature thereof; nor shall any such company or agent thereof, or any other person, partnership or corporation make any misleading representation or incomplete comparison of policies to any person insured in such company for the purpose of inducing or tending to induce such person to lapse, forfeit, or surrender his said insurance.

SECTION 363.       If the Commissioner, after notice & hearing, finds that any insurance company, rating organization, agent, broker or other person has violated any of the provisions of this title, it shall order the payment of a fine not to exceed five hundred pesos for each such offense, & shall immediately revoke the license issued to such insurance company, rating organization, agent, or broker. The issuance, procurement or negotiation of a single policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed a separate offense.

Title VIII   PROVISION COMMON TO AGENTS, BROKERS, AND ADJUSTERS

SECTION 364.       A license issued to a partnership, association or corporation to act as an insurance agent, general agent, insurance broker, reinsurance broker, or adjuster shall authorize only the individual named in the license who shall qualify therefor as though an individual licensee. The Commissioner shall charge, & the licensee shall pay, a full additional license fee as to each respective individual so named in such license in excess of one.

Licenses & certificates of registration issued under the provisions of this chapter may be renewed by the filing of notices of intention on forms to be prescribed by the Commissioner & payment of the fees therefor. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

CHAPTER V — SECURITY FUND

SECTION 365.       There is hereby created a fund to be known as the “Security Fund” w/c shall be used in the payment of allowed claims against an insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines remaining unpaid by reason of the solvency of such company. The said Fund may also be used to reinsure the policy of the insolvent insurer in any solvent insurer authorized to do business in the Philippines as provided in section two hundred forty‑nine. In the event of national emergency or calamity, the Fund may likewise be used to pay insured claims w/c otherwise would not be compensable under the provisions of the policy. No payment fr. the Security Fund shall, however, be made to any person who owns or controls ten per centum or more of the voting shares of stock of the insolvent insurer & no payment on any one claim shall exceed twenty thousand pesos.

SECTION 366.       Such Fund shall consist of all payments made to the Fund by insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines. Payments made by life insurance companies shall be treated separately fr. those made by non‑life insurance companies & the corresponding fund shall be called “Life Account” & “Non‑Life Account”, respectively, & shall be held & administered as such by the Commissioner in accordance w/ the provisions of this title. The “Life Account” shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to life insurance companies, while the “Non‑Life Account” shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to non‑life insurance companies.

SECTION 367.       All insurance companies doing business in the Philippines shall contribute to the Security Fund, Life or Non‑Life Account, as the case may be, on or before the fifteenth day of June, nineteen hundred & seventy‑five, the aggregate amount of five million pesos for each Account. The contributions of the life insurance companies & of the non‑life insurance companies shall be in direct proportion to the ratio between a particular life insurance company or a particular non‑life insurance company’s net worth & the aggregate net worth of all life insurance companies or all non‑life insurance companies, as the case may be, as shown in their latest financial statements approved by the Commissioner. This proportion applied to the five million pesos shall be the contribution of a particular company to the corresponding Account of the Security Fund.

The amount of five million pesos in each Account shall be in the form of a revolving trust fund. The respective contributions of the companies shall remain as admitted assets in their books & any disbursement therefr. shall be deducted proportionately fr. the contributions of each company w/c will be allowed as deductions for income tax purposes. Any earnings of the Fund shall be turned over to the contributing companies in proportion to their contributions.

In the case of disbursements of funds fr. the Fund as provided in the foregoing paragraph, the life & non‑life companies, as the case may be, shall replenish the amount disbursed in direct proportion to the individual company’s net worth & the aggregate net worth of the life or non‑life companies, as the case may be. However, in no case shall the Fund exceed the aggregate amount of ten million pesos, or five million pesos for each Account.

Should the Fund, Life of Non‑Life Account, as the case may be, be inadequate for a disbursement as provided for, then the Life or Non‑Life companies, as the case may be, shall contribute to the Fund their respective shares in the proportion previously mentioned.

SECTION 368.       The Commissioner may adopt, amend, & enforce all reasonable rules & regulations necessary for the proper administration of the Fund & of the Accounts. In the event any insurer shall fail to make any payment required by this title, or that any payment made is incorrect, he shall have full authority to examine all the books & records of the insurer for the purpose of ascertaining the facts & shall determine the correct amount to be paid & may proceed in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover for the benefit of the Fund or of the Account concerned any sum shown to be due upon such examination & determination. Any insurer w/c fails to make any payment to the Fund or to the Account concerned when due, shall thereby forfeit to said Fund or Account concerned a penalty of five per centum of the amount determined to be due as provided by this title, plus one per centum of such amount for each month of delay or fraction thereof, after the expiration of the first month of such delay, but the Commissioner, if satisfied that the delay was excusable, may remit all or any part of such penalty. The Commissioner, in his discretion, may suspend or revoke the certificate of authority to do business in the Philippines of any insurance company w/c shall fail to comply w/ this title or to pay any penalty imposed in accordance therewith.

SECTION 369.       The Accounts created by this title shall be separate & apart fr. each other & fr. any other fund. The Treasurer of the Philippines shall be the custodian of the Life Account & Non‑Life Account of the Security Fund; & all disbursements fr. any Account shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines upon vouchers signed by the Commissioner or his deputy, as hereinafter provided. The moneys of said Account may be invested by the Commissioner only in bonds or other evidences of debt of the government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities. The Commissioner may sell any of the securities in w/c an Account is in vested, if advisable, for its proper administration or in the best interest of such Account.

SECTION 370.       Payments fr. either the Life Insurance Account or Non‑Life Account, as the case may be, shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines to the Commissioner, upon the authority of appropriate certificate filed w/ him by the Commissioner acting in such capacity.

SECTION 371.       The Commissioner may, in his discretion, designate or appoint a duly authorized representative or representatives to appear & defend before any court or other body or official having jurisdiction any or all actions or proceedings against principals or assureds on insurance policies or contracts issued to them where the insurer has become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. The Commissioner shall have, as of the date of insolvency of such insurer or as of the date of its inability meet its insurance obligations, only the rights w/c such insurer would have had if it had not become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. For the purpose of this title the Commissioner shall have power to employ such counsel, clerks & assistants as he may deem necessary.

SECTION 372.       The expense of administering an Account shall be paid out of the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall serve as administrator of the Fund & of the Accounts without additional compensation, but may be allowed & paid fr. the Account concerned expenses incurred in the performance of his duties in connection w/ said Account. The compensation of those persons employed payable fr. the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall include in his annual report to the Secretary of Finance a statement of the expenses of administration of the Fund & of the Life Account & Non‑Life Account for the preceding year.

CHAPTER VI — COMPULSORY MOTOR VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE

SECTION 373.       For purposes of this chapter:

(a)            “Motor Vehicle” is any vehicle as defined in section three, paragraph (a) of Republic Act Numbered Four Thousand One Hundred Thirty‑Six, Otherwise known as the “Land Transportation & Traffic Code.”

(b)           “Passenger” is any fare paying person being transported & conveyed in & by a motor vehicle for transportation of passengers for compensation, including persons expressly authorized by law or by the vehicle’s operator or his agents to ride without fare.

(c)            “Third‑Party” is any person other than a passenger as defined in this section & shall also exclude a member of the household, or a member of the family within the second degree of consanguinity or affinity, of a motor vehicle owner or land transportation operator, as likewise defined herein, or his employee in respect of death, bodily injury, or damage to property arising out of & in the course of employment. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1814 & 1981)

(d)           “Owner” or “Motor vehicle owner” means the actual legal owner of a motor vehicle, in whose name such vehicle is duly registered w/ the Land Transportation Commission;

(e)            “Land transportation operator” means the owner or owners of motor vehicles for transportation of passengers for compensation, including school buses;

(f)            “Insurance policy” or “Policy” refers to a contract of insurance against passenger & thirty‑party liability for death or bodily injuries & damaged to property arising fr. motor vehicle accidents. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455 & 1814)

SECTION 374.       It shall be unlawful for any land transportation operator or owner of a motor vehicle to operate the same in the public highways unless there is in force in relation thereto a policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond issued in accordance w/ the provisions of this chapter to indemnify the death, bodily injury, &/or damage to property of a third‑party or passenger, as the case may be, arising fr. the use thereof. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455 & 1814)

SECTION 375.       The Commissioner shall furnish the Land Transportation Commissioner w/ a list of insurance companies authorized to issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1814)

SECTION 376.       The Land Transportation Commission shall not allow the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle without first requiring fr. the land transportation operator or motor vehicle owner concerned the presentation & filing of a substantiating documentation in a form approved by the Commissioner evidencing that the policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond required by this chapter is in effect. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 377.       Every land transportation operator & every owner of a motor vehicle shall, before applying for the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle, at his option, either secure an insurance policy or surety bond issued by any insurance company authorized by the Commissioner or make a cash deposit in such amount as herein required as limit of liability for purposes specified in section three hundred seventy‑four.

(1)            In the case of a land transportation operator the insurance guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or bodily injuries of third‑parties &/or passengers arising out of the use of such vehicle in the amount not less than twelve thousand pesos per passenger or third party & an amount, for each of such categories, in any one accident of not less than that set forth in the following scale —

(a)            Motor vehicles w/ an authorized capacity of twenty‑six or more passengers: Fifty thousand pesos;

(b)           Motor vehicles w/ an authorized capacity of fr. twelve to twenty‑five passengers: Forty thousand pesos;

(c)            Motor vehicles w/ an authorized capacity of fr. six to eleven passengers: Thirty thousand pesos;

(d)           Motor vehicles w/ an authorized capacity of five or less passengers: Five thousand pesos multiplied by the authorized capacity.

Provided, however, That such cash deposit made to, or surety bond posted w/, the Commissioner shall be resorted to by him in cases of accidents the indemnities for w/c to third‑parties &/or passengers are not settled accordingly by the land transportation operator &, in that event, the said cash deposit shall be replenished or such surety bond shall be restored w/ sixty days after impairment or expiry, as the case may be, by such land transportation operator, otherwise, he shall secure the insurance policy required by this chapter. The aforesaid cash deposit may be invested by the Commissioner in readily marketable government bonds &/or securities.

(2)            In the case of an owner of a motor vehicle, the insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or injury to third parties in an amount not less than that set forth in the following scale in any one accident:

I.              Private Cars

(a)           Bantam   :               Twenty thousand pesos;

(b)           Light       :               Twenty thousand pesos;

(c)            Heavy     :               Thirty thousand pesos;

II.            Other Private Vehicles

(a)            Tricycles, motorcycles, & scooters  :  Twelve thousand pesos;

(b)           Vehicles w/ an unladen weight of 2,600 kilos or less : Twenty thousand pesos;

(c)            Vehicles w/ an unladen weight of between 2,601 kilos & 3,930 kilos : Thirty thousand pesos;

(d)           Vehicles w/ an unladen weight over 3,930 kilos : Fifty thousand pesos.

The Commissioner may, if warranted, set forth schedule of indemnities for the payment of claims for death or bodily injuries w/ the coverages set forth herein. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455 & 1814)

SECTION 378.       Any claim for death or injury to any passenger or third party pursuant to the provisions of this chapter shall be paid without the necessity of proving fault or negligence of any kind; Provided, That for purposes of this section —

(a)            The total indemnity in respect of any person shall not exceed five thousand pesos;

(ii)            The following proofs of loss, when submitted under oath, shall be sufficient evidence to substantiate the claim:

(a)            Police report of accident; &

(b)           Death certificate & evidence sufficient to establish the proper payee; or

(c)            Medical report & evidence of medical or hospital disbursement in respect of w/c refund is claimed.

(iii)           Claim may be made against one motor vehicle only. In the case of an occupant of a vehicle, claim shall lie against the insurer of the vehicle in w/c the occupant is riding, mounting or dismounting fr.. In any other case, claim shall lie against the insurer of the directly offending vehicle. In all cases, the right of the party paying the claim to recover against the owner of the vehicle responsible for the accident shall be maintained.

SECTION 379.       No land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle shall be unreasonably denied the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter by the insurance companies authorized to issue the same, otherwise, the Land Transportation Commission shall require fr. said land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, in lieu of a policy of insurance or surety bond, a certificate that a cash deposit has been made w/ the Commissioner in such amount required as limits of indemnity in section three hundred seventy‑seven to answer for the passenger &/or third‑party liability of such land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle.

No insurance company may issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required under this chapter unless so authorized under existing laws.

The authority to engage in the casualty &/or surety lines of business of an insurance company that refuses to issue or renew, without just cause, the insurance policy or surety bond therein required shall be withdrawn immediately. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455 & 1814)

SECTION 380.       No cancellation of the policy shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given to the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle & to the Land Transportation Commission at least fifteen days prior to the intended effective date thereof.

Upon receipt of such notice, the Land Transportation Commission, unless it receives evidence of a new valid insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond as prescribed in this chapter, or an endorsement of revival of the cancelled one, shall order the immediate confiscation of the plates of the motor vehicle covered by such cancelled policy. The same may be re‑issued only upon presentation of a new insurance policy or that a guaranty in cash or surety band has been made or posted w/ the Commissioner & w/c meets the requirements of this chapter, or an endorsement or revival of the cancelled one. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 381.       If the cancellation of the policy or surety bond is contemplated by the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, he shall, before the policy or surety bond ceases to be effective, secure a similar policy of insurance or surety bond to replace the policy or surety bond to be cancelled or make a cash deposit in sufficient amount w/ the Commissioner & without any gap, file the required documentation w/ the Land Transportation Commission, & notify the insurance company concerned of the cancellation of its policy or surety bond. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 382.       In case of change of ownership of a motor vehicle, or change of the engine of an insured vehicle, there shall be no need of issuing a new policy until the next date of registration or renewal of registration of such vehicle, & provided that the insurance company shall agree to continue the policy, such change of ownership or such change of the engine shall be indicated in a corresponding endorsement by the insurance company concerned, & a signed duplicate of such endorsement shall, within a reasonable time, be filed w/ the Land Transportation Commission.

SECTION 383.       In the settlement & payment of claims, the indemnity shall not be availed of by any accident victim or claimant as an instrument of enrichment by reason of an accident, but as an assistance or restitution insofar as can fairly be ascertained.

SECTION 384.       Any person having any claim upon the policy issued pursuant to this Chapter shall, without any unnecessary delay, present to the insurance company concerned a written notice of claim setting forth the nature, extent & duration of the injuries sustained as certified by a duly licensed physician. Notice of claim must be filed within six months fr. date of accident, otherwise, the claim shall be deemed waived. Action or suit for recovery of damage due to loss or injury must be brought, in proper cases, w/ the Commissioner or the Courts within one year fr. denial of the claim, otherwise, the claimant’s right of action shall prescribe. (As amended by Presidential Decree 1814 & Batasang Pambansa Blg. 874)

SECTION 385.       The insurance company concerned shall forthwith ascertain the truth & extent of the claim & make payment within five working days after reaching an agreement. If no agreement is reached, the insurance company shall pay only the “no‑fault” indemnity provided in section three hundred seventy‑eight without prejudice to the claimant fr. pursuing his claim further, in w/c case, he shall not be required or compelled by the insurance company to execute any quit claim or document releasing it fr. liability under the policy of insurance or surety bond issued. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

In case of any dispute in the enforcement of the provisions of any policy issued pursuant to this chapter, the adjudication of such dispute shall be within the original & exclusive jurisdiction of the Commissioner, subject to the limitations provided in section four hundred sixteen.

SECTION 386.       It shall be unlawful for a land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle to require his or its drivers or other employees to contribute in the payment of premiums.

SECTION 387.       No government office or agency having the duty of implementing the provisions of this chapter nor any official or employee thereof shall act as agent in procuring the insurance policy or surety bond provided for herein. The commission of an agent procuring the said policy or bond shall in no case exceed ten per centum of the amount of the premiums therefor.

SECTION 388.       Any land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle or any other person violating any of the provisions of the preceding sections shall be punished by a fine of not less than five hundred pesos but not more than one thousand pesos &/or imprisonment for not more than six months. The violation of section three hundred seventy‑seven by a land transportation operator shall be a sufficient cause for the revocation of the certificate of public convenience issued by the Board of Transportation covering the vehicle concerned.

SECTION 389.       Whenever any violation of the provisions of this chapter is committed by a corporation or association, or by a government office or entity, the executive officer or officers of said corporation, association or government office or entity who shall have knowingly permitted, or failed to prevent, said violation shall be held liable as principals.

CHAPTER VII — MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS AND TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

Title I  MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS

SECTION 390.       Any society, association or corporation, without capital stock, formed or organized not for profit but mainly for the purpose of paying sick benefits to members, or of furnishing financial support to members while out of employment, or of paying to relatives of deceased members of fixed or any sum of money, irrespective of whether such aim or purpose is carried out by means of fixed dues or assessments collected regularly fr. the members, or of providing, by the issuance of certificates of insurance, payment of its members of accident or life insurance benefits out of such fixed & regular dues or assessments, but in no case shall include any society, association, or corporation w/ such mutual benefit features & w/c shall be carried out purely fr. voluntary contributions collected not regularly & or no fixed amount fr. whomsoever may contribute, shall be known as a mutual benefit association within the intent of this Code.

Any society, association, or corporation principally organized as labor union shall be governed by the Labor Code notwithstanding any mutual benefit feature provisions in its charter as incident to its organization.

In no case shall a mutual benefit association be organized & authorized to transact business as a charitable or benevolent organization, & whenever it has this feature as incident to its existence, the corresponding charter provision shall be revised to conform w/ the provision of this section. Mutual benefit association, already licensed  to transact business as such on the date this Code becomes effective, having charitable or benevolent feature shall abandon such incidental purpose upon effectivity of this Code if they desire to continue operating as such mutual benefit associations. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 391.       A mutual benefit association, before it may transact as such, must first secure a license fr. the Commissioner. The application for such license shall be filed w/ the Commissioner together w/ certified true copies of the articles of incorporation or the constitution & by‑laws of the association, & all amendments thereto, & such other documents or testimonies as the Commissioner may require.

No license shall be granted to a mutual benefit association until the Commissioner shall have been satisfied by such examination as may make & such evidence as he may require that the association is qualified under existing laws to operate & transact business as such. The Commissioner may refuse to issue a license to any mutual benefit association if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the members of such association & of the people of this country. Any license issued shall expire on the last day of June of the year following its issuance &, upon proper application, may be renewed if the association is continuing to comply w/ existing laws, rules & regulations, orders, instructions, rulings & decisions of the Commissioner. Every association receiving any such license shall be subject to the supervision of the Commissioner; Provided, That no such license shall be granted to any such association if such association has no actuary.

All mutual benefit association existing & licensed as such under the provisions of Article Eight, Chapter Forty‑One of the Revised Administrative Code, as amended by Act No. 3612, shall, upon effectivity of this Code, surrender their respective licenses to the Commissioner & apply for new licenses under the provisions of this code if they still desire to continue operating as such mutual benefit associations.

SECTION 392.       No mutual benefit association shall be issued a license to operate as such unless it has constituted & established a Guaranty Fund by depositing w/ the Commissioner an initial minimum amount of ten thousand pesos in cash, or in government securities w/ a total value equal to such amount, to answer for any valid benefit claim of any of its members.

All moneys received by the Commissioner for this purpose must be deposited by him in interest‑bearing deposits w/ any bank or banks authorized to transact business in the Philippines for the account of the particular association constituting the Guaranty Fund.

Any accrual to such fund, be it interest earned or dividend additions on moneys or securities so deposited, may, w/ the prior approval of the Commissioner, be withdrawn by the association if there is no pending benefit claim against it, including interest thereon or dividend additions thereto.

The Commissioner, prior to or after licensing a mutual benefit association, may require such association to increase its Guaranty Fund fr. the initial minimum amount required to an amount equal to at least ten per centum of its assets, if such assets exceed one hundred thousand pesos, but in no case shall such increase exceed the maximum amount of capital investment required of a domestic insurance company under section two hundred & three of this Code. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 393.       Every mutual benefit association licensed to do business as such shall issue membership certificates to its members specifying the benefits to w/c such members are entitled.

Such certificates, together w/ the articles of incorporation of the association or its constitution & by‑laws, & all existing laws as may be pertinent shall constitute the agreement, as of the date of its issuance, between the association & the member. The membership certificate shall be in a form previously approved by the Commissioner.

SECTION 394.       A mutual benefit association may, by reinsurance agreement, cede in whole or in part any individual risk or risks under certificates of insurance issued by it, only to a life insurance company authorized to transact business or to a professional reinsurer authorized to accept life risks in the Philippines; Provided, That copy of the draft of such reinsurance agreement shall be submitted to the Commissioner for his approval. The association may take credit for the reserves on such ceded risks to the extent reinsured.

SECTION 395.       The constitution or by‑laws of a mutual benefit association must distinctly state the purpose for w/c dues &/or assessments are made & collected & the portion thereof w/c may be used for expenses.

Death benefit & other relief funds shall be created & used exclusively for paying benefits due the members under their respective membership certificates. A general fund shall likewise be created & used for expenses of administration of the association.

SECTION 396.       Every outstanding membership certificate must have, after three full years of being continuously in force, an equity value equivalent to at least fifty per centum of the total membership dues collected thereon.

SECTION 397.       Every mutual benefit association must accumulate & maintain, out of the periodic dues collected fr. its members, sufficient reserves for the payment of claims or obligations for w/c it shall hold funds in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines, or any of its political subdivisions & instrumentalities, or in such other good securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

The reserve liability shall be established in accordance w/ acturial procedures & shall be approved by the Commissioner.

The articles of incorporation or the constitution & by‑laws of a mutual benefit association must provide that if its reserve as to all or any class of certificates becomes impaired, its board of directors or trustees may require that there shall be paid by the members to the association the amount of the members’ equitable proportion of such deficiency as ascertained by said board & that if the payment be not made it shall stand as an indebtedness against the membership certificates of the defaulting members & draw interest not to exceed five per centum per annum compounded annually.

SECTION 398.       A mutual benefit association may invest such portion of its funds as shall not be required to meet pending claims & other obligations in any of the classes of investments or types of securities in w/c life insurance companies doing business in the Philippines may invest.

It may also grant loans to members on the security of a pledge or chattel mortgage of personal properties of the borrowers, or in the absence thereof, on the security of the membership certificate of the borrowing members, in w/c event such loan shall become a first lien on the proceed thereof.

SECTION 399.       The Commissioner or any of his duly designated representatives, shall have the power of visitation, audit & examination into the affairs, financial condition, & methods of doing business of all mutual benefit associations, & he shall cause such examination to be made at least once every two years or whenever it may be deemed proper & necessary. Free access to the books, records & documents of the association shall be accorded to the Commissioner, to his representatives, in such manner that the Commissioner or his representatives may readily verify or determine the true affairs, financial condition, & method of doing business of such association. In the course of such examination, the Commissioner or his duly designated representatives shall have authority to administer oaths & take testimony or other evidence on any matter relating to the affairs of the association.

All minutes of the proceedings of the board of directors or trustees of the association, & those of the regular or special meetings of the members, shall be take, & a copy thereof, in English or in Pilipino, shall be submitted to the Commissioner’s representatives or examiners in the course of such examination.

A copy of the findings of such examination, together w/ the recommendations of the Commissioner, shall be furnished the association for its information & compliance, & the same shall be taken up immediately in the meetings of the board of directors or trustees & of the members of the association.

SECTION 400.       Every mutual benefit association shall, annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year, render to the Commissioner an annual statement in such form & details as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, signed & sworn to by the president, secretary, treasurer, & actuary of the association, showing the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty‑first day of December.

SECTION 401.       No money, aid or benefit to be paid, provided or tendered by any mutual benefit association, shall be liable to attachment, garnishment, or other process, or be seized, taken, appropriated, or applied by any legal or equitable process to pay any debt of liability of a member or beneficiary, or any other person who may have a right thereunder, either before or after payment.

SECTION 402.       Any member of a mutual benefit association shall have the right at all times to change the beneficiary or beneficiaries or add another beneficiary or other beneficiaries in accordance w/ the rules & regulations of the association unless he has expressly waived this right in the membership certificate. Every association may, under such rules as it may adopt, limit the scope of beneficiaries & provide that no beneficiary shall have or obtain any vested interest in the proceeds of any certificate until the certificate has become due & payable under the terms of the membership certificate.

SECTION 403.       Any chapter affiliate independently licensed as a mutual benefit association may consolidate or merge w/ any other similar chapter affiliate or w/ the mother association.

SECTION 404.       Any mutual benefit association may be converted into & licensed as a mutual life insurance company by complying w/ the requirements of the pertinent provisions of this Code & submitting the specific plan for such conversion to the Commissioner for his approval. Such plan, as approved, shall then be submitted to the members either in the regular meeting or in a special meeting called for the purpose for their adoption. The affirmative vote of at least two‑thirds of all the members shall be necessary in order to consider such plan as adopted.

No such conversion shall take effect unless & until approved by the Commissioner.

SECTION 405.       No mutual benefit association shall be dissolved without first notifying the Commissioner & furnishing him w/ a certified copy of the resolution authorizing the dissolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of two‑thirds of the members at a meeting called for that purpose, the financial statements as of the date of the resolution, & such other papers or documents as may be required by the Commissioner.

No dissolution shall proceed until & unless approved by the Commissioner & all proceedings in connection therewith shall be witnessed & attested by his duly designated representative.

No mutual benefit association shall be officially declared as dissolved until after the Commissioner so certifies that all outstanding claims against the association have been duly settled & liquidated.

SECTION 406.       The Commissioner shall after notice & hearing, have the power either to suspend or revoke the licensed issued to a mutual benefit association if he finds that the association has:

(a)            failed to comply w/ any provision of this Code;

(b)           failed to comply w/ any other law or regulation obligatory upon it;

(c)            failed to comply w/ any order, ruling, instruction, requirement, or recommendation of the Commissioner;

(d)           exceeded its power to the prejudice of its members;

(e)            conducted its business fraudulently or hazardously;

(f)            rendered its affairs & condition to one of insolvency; or

(g)           failed to carry out its aims & purposes for w/c it was organized due to any cause.

After receipt of the order fr. the Commissioner suspending or revoking the license, the association must immediately exert efforts to remove such cause or causes w/c brought about the order, &, upon proper showing, may apply w/ the Commissioner for the lifting of the order & restoration or revival of the license so revoked or suspended.

SECTION 407.       For failure to remove such cause or causes w/c brought about the suspension or revocation of the license of a mutual benefit association, the Commissioner shall apply under this Code for an order fr. the proper court to liquidate such association.

The provisions of titles fourteen & fifteen, chapter three, pertaining to the appointment of a conservator & proceedings upon insolvency of an insurance company, shall, insofar as practicable, apply to mutual benefit associations.

SECTION 408.       To secure the enforcement of any provision under this title, the Commissioner may issue such rules, rulings, instructions, orders & circulars, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Finance.

SECTION 409.       The violation of any provision of this title shall subject the person violating or the officer of the association responsible therefor to a fine of not exceeding one thousand pesos, or imprisonment of not exceeding three years, or both such fine & imprisonment, at the discretion of the court.

Title II   TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

SECTION 410.       The term “trust for charitable uses”, within the intent of this Code, shall include, all the real or personal properties or funds, as well as those acquired w/ the fruits or income therefr. or in exchange or substitution thereof, given to or received by any person, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, it instrumentalities or political subdivisions, for charitable, benevolent, educational, pious, religious, or other uses for the benefit of the public at large or a particular portion thereof or for the benefit of an indefinite number of persons.

SECTION 411.       The term “trustee” shall include any individual, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, in charge of, or acting for, or concerned w/ the administration of, the trust referred to in the section immediately preceding & w/ the proper application of trust property.

SECTION 412.       The term “trust property” shall include all real or personal properties or funds pertaining to the trust as well as those acquired w/ the fruits or income therefr. or in exchange or substitution thereof.

SECTION 413.       All trustees shall, before entering in the performance of the duties of their trust, obtain a certificate of registration fr. the Commissioner.

Trustees who are already discharging the duties of their trust on the date this Code becomes effective may continue as such, subject to the provisions of this Code.

All provisions of this Code governing mutual benefit associations & such other provisions herein, whenever practicable & necessary, shall be applicable to trusts for charitable uses.

CHAPTER VIII — THE INSURANCE COMMISSIONER

Title I   ADMINISTRATIVE AND ADJUDICATORY POWERS

SECTION 414.       The Insurance Commissioner shall have the duty to see that all laws relating to insurance, insurance companies & other insurance matters, mutual benefit associations, & trusts for charitable uses are faithfully executed & to perform the duties imposed upon him by this Code, & shall, notwithstanding any existing laws to the contrary, have sole & exclusive authority to regulate the issuance & sale of variable contracts as defined in section two hundred thirty‑two & to provide for the licensing of persons selling such contracts, & to issue such reasonable rules & regulations governing the same.

The Commissioner may issue such ruling, instructions, circulars, orders & decision as he may deem necessary to secure the enforcement of the provisions of this Code, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Finance. Except as otherwise specified, decisions made by the Commissioner shall be appealable to the Secretary of Finance.

SECTION 415.       In addition to the administrative sanctions provided elsewhere in this Code, the Insurance Commissioner is hereby authorized, at his discretion, to impose upon the insurance companies, their directors &/or officers &/or agents, for any willful failure or refusal to comply w/, or violation of any provision of this Code, or any order, instruction, regulation, or ruling of the Insurance Commissioner, or any commission or irregularities, &/or conducting business in an unsafe or unsound manner as may be determined by the Insurance Commissioner, the following:

(a)            fines not in excess of five hundred pesos a day; &

(b)           suspension, or after due hearing, removal of directors &/or officers &/or agents.

SECTION 416.       The Commissioner shall have the power to adjudicate claims & complaints involving any loss, damage or liability for w/c in insurer may be answerable under any kind of policy or contract of insurance, or for w/c such insurer may be liable under a contract of suretyship, or for w/c a reinsurer may be sued under any contract of reinsurance it may have entered into; or for w/c a mutual benefit association may be held liable under the membership certificates it has issued to its members, where the amount of any such loss, damage or liability, excluding interest, cost & attorney’s fees, being claimed or sued upon any kind of insurance, bond, reinsurance contract, or membership certificate does not exceed in any single claim one hundred thousand pesos.

The insurer or surety may, in the same action file a counterclaim against the insured or the obligee.

The insurer or surety may also file a cross‑claim against a party for any claim arising out of the transaction or occurrence that is the subject matter of the original action or of a counterclaim therein.   cdasia

With leave of the Commissioner, an insurer or surety may file a third‑party complaint against its reinsurers for indemnification, contribution, subrogation or any other relief, in respect of the transaction that is the subject matter of the original action filed w/ the Commissioner.

The party filing an action pursuant to the provisions of this section thereby submits his person to the jurisdiction of the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall acquire jurisdiction over the person of the impleaded party or parties in accordance w/ & pursuant to the provisions of the Rules of Court.

The authority to adjudicate granted to the Commissioner under this section shall be concurrent w/ that of the civil courts, but the filing of a complaint w/ the Commissioner shall preclude the civil courts fr. taking cognizance of a suit involving the same subject matter.

Any decision, order or ruling rendered by the Commissioner after a hearing shall have the force & effect of a judgment. Any party may appeal fr. a final order, ruling or decision of the Commissioner by filing w/ the Commissioner within thirty days fr. receipt of copy of such order, ruling or decision a notice of appeal to the Intermediate Appellate Court in the manner provided for in the Rules of Court for appeals fr. the Regional Trial Court to the Intermediate Appellate Court. (As amended by Batasang Pambansa Blg. 874)

As soon as a decision, order or ruling has become final & executory, the Commissioner shall motu propio or on motion of the interested party, issue a writ of execution required the sheriff or the proper officer to whom it is directed to execute said decision, order or award, pursuant to Rule thirty‑nine of the Rules of Court.

For the purpose of any proceeding under this section, the Commissioner, or any officer thereof designated by him, empowered to administer oaths & affirmation, subpoena witnesses, compel their attendance, take evidence, & require the production of any books, papers, documents, or contracts or other records w/c are relevant or material to the inquiry. In case of contumacy by, or refusal to obey a subpoena issued to any person, the Commissioner may invoke the aid of any court of first instance within the jurisdiction of w/c such proceeding is carried on, where such person resides or carries on his own business, in requiring the attendance & testimony of witnesses & the production of books, papers, documents, contracts or other records. And such court may issue an order requiring such person to appear before the Commissioner, or officer designated by the Commissioner, there to produce records, if so ordered or to give testimony touching the matter in question. Any failure to obey such order of the court may be published by such court as a contempt thereof.

A full & complete record shall be kept of all proceedings had before the commissioner, or the officers thereof designated by him, & all testimony shall be taken down & transcribed by a stenographer appointed by the Commissioner.

A transcribed copy of the evidence & proceeding, or any specific part thereof, of any hearing taken by a stenographer appointed by the Commissioner, being certified by such stenographer to be a true & correct transcript of the testimony on this hearing of a particular witness, or of a specific proof thereof, carefully compared by him fr. his original notes, & to be a correct statement of evidence & proceeding had in such hearing so purporting to be taken & subscribed, may be received as evidence by the Commissioner & by any court w/ the same effect as if such stenographer were present & testified to the facts so certified. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

Title II   FEES AND OTHER SOURCES OF FUNDS

SECTION 417.

(1)    For the issuance or renewal of certificates of authority, licenses & certificates of registration, pursuant to pertinent provisions of this Code, the Commissioner shall collect & receive fees w/c shall be not less than the following:

v  For each certificate of authority issued to an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, two hundred pesos.

v  For each special certificate of authority issued to a servicing insurance company, one hundred pesos.

v  For each license issued to a general agent of an insurance company, fifty pesos.

v  For each license issued to an insurance agent, twenty‑five pesos.

v  For each license issued to an agent of variable contract policy, twenty‑five pesos.

v  For each license issued to an insurance broker, one hundred pesos.

v  For each license issued to an reinsurance broker, one hundred pesos.

v  For each license issued to an insurance adjuster, one hundred pesos.

v  For each certificate of registration issued to an actuary, fifty pesos.

v  For each certificate of registration issued to a resident agent, fifty pesos.

v  For each license issued to a rating organization, one hundred pesos.

v  For each certificate of registration issued to a non‑life company underwriter, fifty pesos.

v  For each license issued to a mutual benefit association, ten pesos.

v  For each certificate of registration issued to a trust for charitable uses, ten pesos.

All certificates of authority & all other licenses, as well as all certificates of registration, issued to any person, partnership, association or corporation under the pertinent provisions of this Code for w/c no expiration date has been prescribed, shall expire on the last day of June of each year & shall be renewed annually upon application therefor & payment of the corresponding fee, if the licensee or holder of such license or certificate is continuing to comply w/ all the applicable provisions of existing laws, & of rules, instructions, orders & decisions of the Commissioner.

(2)    For the filing of the annual statement referred to in section two hundred twenty‑three, the Commissioner shall collect & receive fr. the insurance company so filing a fee of five hundred pesos; Provided, That a fine of one hundred pesos shall be imposed & collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

For the filing of annual statement referred to in section four hundred, the Commissioner shall collect & receive fr. the mutual benefit association so filing a fee of ten pesos; Provided, That a fine of ten pesos shall be imposed & collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

(3)    For the examination prescribed in section two hundred forty‑six, the Commissioner shall collect & receive fees according to the amount of its total assets, in the case of a domestic company, or of its assets in the Philippines, in the case of a foreign company, as follows:

(a)            Two million pesos or more but less than four million pesos, Four hundred pesos;

(b)           Four million pesos or more but less than six million pesos, Eight hundred pesos;

(c)            Six million pesos or more but less than eight million pesos, One thousand two hundred pesos;

(d)           Eight million pesos or more but less than ten million pesos, One thousand six hundred pesos;

(e)            Ten million pesos or more, Two thousand pesos;

Provided, That if the said examination is made in places outside the Metropolitan Manila area, besides these fees, the Commissioner shall require of the company examined the payment of the actual & necessary travelling & subsistence expenses of the examiner or examiners concerned.

For the examination prescribed in section three hundred ninety‑nine, the Commissioner shall collect & receive a minimum fee of one hundred pesos fr. the mutual benefit association examined; Provided, That if such association has total assets of more than one hundred thousand pesos, an additional fee of ten pesos for every fifty thousand pesos in excess thereof shall be imposed; Provided, Further, That such fee shall not exceed two thousand pesos.

(4)    For the filing of an application to withdraw fr. the Philippines under title eighteen, the Commissioner shall collect & receive fr. the foreign company so withdrawing a fee of one thousand pesos.

(5)    The Commissioner may fix & collect fees or charges for documents, transcripts, or other materials w/c may be furnished by him not in excess of reasonable cost. (As amended by Presidential Decree No. 1455)

SECTION 418.       If the total expenses of the Insurance Commissioner for every fiscal year exceed the aggregate amount of the fees collected under the pertinent provisions of this Code, the excess shall be charged against the Insurance Fund, w/c shall hereafter be created out of the proceeds of taxes on insurance premiums mentioned in section two hundred fifty‑five of the National Internal Revenue Code, as amended; Provided, however, That pending the creation of said Insurance Fund, the provisions of section two, three & four of Republic Act Numbered Two Hundred Seventy‑Five, shall continue to remain in force & effect.

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

SECTION 419.       Any person, company or corporation subject to the supervision & control of the Commissioner who violates any provision of this Code, for w/c no penalty is provided, shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, & upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding ten thousand pesos or imprisonment of six months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

If the offense is committed by a company or corporation, the officers, directors, or other persons responsible for its operation, management, or administration, unless it can be proved that they have taken no part in the commission of the offense, shall likewise be guilty of a penal offense, & upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding ten thousand pesos or imprisonment of six months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

SECTION 420.       All criminal actions for the violation of any of the provisions of this Code shall prescribed after three years fr. the discovery of such violation: Provided, That such actions shall in any event prescribe after ten years fr. the commission of such violation.

SECTION 421.       Any person, partnership, association or corporation heretofore authorized, licensed or registered by the Insurance Commissioner shall be deemed to have been authorized, licensed or registered under the provisions of this Code & shall be governed by the provisions thereof: Provided, however, That where any such person, partnership, association or corporation is affected by the new requirements of this Code, said person, partnership association or corporation shall, unless otherwise herein provided, be given a period of one year fr. the effectivity of this Code within w/c to comply w/ the same.

SECTION 422.       Except as expressly provided by this Code, all laws or parts thereof inconsistent w/ any provision of this Code shall be deemed repealed.

SECTION 423.       Should any provisions of this Code or any part thereof be declared invalid, the other provisions, so far as they are separable fr. the invalid ones, shall remain in force.

SECTION 424.       This Code shall take effect immediately.

Legal Ethics

Star InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar Inactive

Legal Ethics

Legal Ethics – Code of Judicial Conduct

Code of Judicial Conduct

Preamble

An honorable, competent and independent judiciary exists to administer justice and thus promote the unity of the country, the stability of government, and the well being of the people.

CANON 1- A judge should uphold the integrity and independence of the judiciary 

Rule 1.01 – A judge should be the embodiment of competence, integrity, and independence.

Rule 1.02 – A judge should administer justice impartially and without delay.

Rule 1.03 – A judge should be vigilant against any attempt to subvert the independence of the judiciary and resist any pressure from whatever source.

  • Judges should avoid even the slightest infraction of the law.
  • Must be models of uprightness, fairness and honesty
  • Should not relax in his study of the law and court decisions.
  • Should not be swayed by public clamor or considerations of personal popularity
  • Must decide motions without delay.
  • Should also appear impartial.

CANON 2 – A judge should avoid impropriety and the appearance of impropriety in all activities. 

Rule 2.01 – A judge should so behave at all times as to promote public confidence in the integrity and impartiality of the judiciary.

Rule 2.02 – A judge should not seek publicity for personal vainglory.

Rule 2.03 – A judge shall not allow family, social, or other relationships to influence judicial conduct or judgment.  The prestige of judicial office shall not be used or lent to advance the private interests of others, nor convey or permit others to convey the impression that they are in a special position to influence the judge.

Rule 2.04 – A judge shall refrain from influencing in any manner the outcome of litigation or dispute pending before another court of administrative agency.

  • A judge must be beyond suspicion. He has the duty not only to render a just and impartial decision but also to render it in such a manner as to be free from any suspicion as to its fairness and impartiality, and also as to his integrity.
  • Every litigant is entitled to nothing short of the cold neutrality of an independent, wholly free, disinterested and impartial tribunal.
  • A judge must be temperate in his language and must not lose his cool.
  • A judge is prohibited from making public statements in the media regarding a pending case so as not to arouse public opinion for or against a party (violates the Principle of Subjudice)
  • Judges must not use or permit the use of any undignified/self-laudatory statement regarding their qualifications or legal services.
  • A judge must not allow anyone to ride on his prestige. He should not create the impression that someone or some people are so close to him to enjoy his favor.

CANON 3 -  A judge should perform official duties honestly, and with impartiality and diligence.

 

ADJUDICATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES

Rule 3.01 – A judge shall be faithful to the law and maintain professional competence.

  • Judge should be conversant with the law and its amendments.

Rule 3.02 – In every case, a judge shall endeavor diligently to ascertain the facts and the applicable law unswayed by partisan interest, public opinion or fear of criticism.

  • Finding of facts must be based not on the personal knowledge of the judge but upon the evidence presented.
  • If the personal view of the judge contradicts the applicable doctrine promulgated by the Supreme Court, nonetheless, he should decide the case in accordance with that doctrine and not in accordance with his personal views.  He is however not prohibited from stating his own opinion on the matter if he wants to invite constructive attention thereto.

Rule 3.03 – A judge shall maintain order and proper decorum in the courts.

Rule 3.04 – A judge should be patient, attentive, and courteous to lawyers, especially the inexperienced, to litigants, witnesses, and others appearing before the court.  A judge should avoid unconsciously falling into the attitude of mind that the litigants are made for the courts, instead of the courts for the litigants.

  • Conduct of trial must not be attended with fanfare and publicity; not permit pictures or broadcasting.
  • Must use temperate language; should not make insulting remarks.

Rule 3.05 – A judge shall dispose of the court’s business promptly and decide cases within the required periods.

Rule 3.06 – While a judge may, to promote justice, prevent waste of time or clear up some obscurity, properly intervene in the presentation of evidence during the trial, it should always be borne in mind that undue interference may prevent the proper presentation of the cause of the ascertainment of the truth.

 Rule 3.07 – A judge should abstain from making public comments on any pending or impending case and should require similar restraint on the part of court personnel.

  • Judge should take notes and rely on transcripts.
  • Judge is not excused if stenographer is overloaded. He is excused for delay on grounds of multifarious motions; appellate court enjoins judge from further proceeding; heavy caseload.

 

ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES

Rule 3.08 – A judge should diligently discharge administrative responsibilities, maintain professional competence in court managements, and facilitate the performance of the administrative functions of other judges and court personnel.

Rule 3.09 – A judge should organize and supervise the court personnel to ensure the prompt and efficient dispatch of business, and require at all times the observance of high standards of public service and fidelity.

Rule 3.10 – A judge should take or inititate appropriate disciplinary measures against lawyers or court personnel for unprofessional conduct of which the judge may have become aware.

Rule 3.11 – A judge should appoint commissioners, receivers, trustees, guardians, administrators and others strictly on the basis of merit and qualifications, avoiding nepotism, and favoritism. Unless otherwise allowed by law, the same criteria should be observed in recommending appointment of court personnel.  Where the payment of compensation is allowed, it should be reasonable and commensurate with the fair value of services rendered.

  • Ascertain that the records of all cases are properly kept and managed.
  • Maintain a checklist on the cases submitted for decision with a view to know exactly the specific deadlines for the resolution/decision of the said cases.
  • Loss of records: gross negligence
  • Should be a good manager.
  • May not summarily suspend a lawyer for indirect contempt.
  • Judge has the power to appoint, but the power to dismiss court employees is vested in the Supreme Court.
  • If knowingly nominate or appoint to any public office any person lacking the legal qualification therefor, shall be guilty of unlawful appointment punishable with imprisonment and fine (Art 244, RPC).

 

DISQUALIFICATIONS

Rule 3.12 – A judge should take no part in proceeding where the judge’s impartiality might reasonably be questioned.  These cases include, among others, proceedings where;

  1. the judge has personal knowledge of disputed evidentiary facts concerning the proceeding;
  2. the judge served as executor, administrator, guardian, trustee or lawyer in the case or matters in controversy, or a former associate of the judge served as counsel during their association, or the judge or lawyer was a material witness therein;
  3. the judge’s ruling in a lower court is subject of review
  4. the judge is related by consanguinity or affinity to a party litigant within the 6thdegree or to counsel within the 4thdegree;
  5. the judge knows that the judge’s spouse  or child has a financial interest, as heir, legatee, creditor, fiduciary, or otherwise, in the subject matter in controversy or in a party to the proceeding, or any other interest that could be substantially affected by the outcome of the proceeding.

In every instance the judge shall indicate the legal reason for inhibition.

  • Petition to disqualify judge must be filed before rendition of judgment by the judge; can’t be raised first time on appeal.
  • If a judge denies petition for disqualification, the ultimate test: is whether or not the complaint was deprived of a fair and impartial trial. Remedy: seek new trial.

REMITTAL OF DISQUALIFICATION

Rule 3.13 – A judge disqualified by the terms of Rule 3.12 may, instead of withdrawing from the proceeding, disclose on the record the basis of disqualification.  If, based on such disclosure, the parties and lawyers independently of the judge’s participation, all agree in writing that the reason for the inhibition is immaterial or insubstantial, the judge may then participate in the proceeding.  The agreement, signed by all parties and lawyers, shall be incorporated in the record of the proceeding.

 

CANON 4 – A judge may, with due regard to official duties, engage in activities to improve the law, the legal system and the administration of justice.

Rule 4.01 – A judge may, to the extent that the following activities do not impair the performance of judicial duties or case doubt on the judge’s impartiality:

  1. speak, write, lecture, teach or participate in activities concerning the law, the legal system and the administration of justice;
  2. appear at a public hearing before a legislative or executive body on matters concerning the law, the legal system or the administration of justice and otherwise consult with them on matters concerning the administration of justice;
  3. serve on any organization devoted to the improvement of the law, the legal system or the administration of justice.
  • Decision to engage in these activities depends upon the sound judgement of the judge.
  • If has not enough time to spare (such as when caseload is too heavy) prudence dictates, he must concentrate on his judicial duties.
  • If a judge has time to spare, the best attitude to take is to participate in activities which are closely related to the performance of his duties and which do not consume much of his time and energy.

CANON 5 – A judge should regulate extra-judicial activities to minimize the risk of conflict with judicial activities.

VOCATIONAL, CIVIC AND CHARITABLE ACTIVITIES

Rule 5.01 – A judge  may engage in the following activities provided that they do not interfere with the performance of judicial duties or detract from the dignity of the courts:

  1. write, lecture, teach and speak on non-legal subjects;
  2. engage in the arts, sports, and other special recreational activities;
  3. participate in civic and charitable activities;
  4. serve as an officer, director, trustee, or non-legal advisor of a non-profit or non-political, educational, religious, charitable, fraternal, or civic organization.
  • If they opt to engage in such activities, they must learn how to manage their time in such manner that their judicial responsibilities do not falter and suffer.

FINANCIAL ACTIVITIES

Rule 5.02 – A judge shall refrain from financial and business dealings that tends to reflect adversely on the court’s impartiality, interfere with the proper performance of judicial activities, or increase involvements with lawyers or persons likely to come before the court. A judge should so manage investments and other financial interests as to minimize the number of cases giving grounds for disqualification.

Rule 5.03 – Subject to the provisions of the proceeding rule, a judge may hold and manage investments but should not serve as an officer, director, manager, advisor, or employee of any business except as director of a family business of the judge.

Rule 5.04 – A judge or any, immediate member of the family, shall not accept a gift, bequest, favor or loan from anyone except as may be allowed by law.

Rule 5.05 – No information acquired in a judicial capacity shall be used or disclosed by a judge in any financial dealing or for any other purpose not related to judicial activities.

  • Prohibitions under the Revised Penal Code:

Art 215. Prohibited Transaction. The penalty of prision correccional in its minimum period or a fine ranging from P200 to P1000 or both, shall be imposed upon any appointive public officer who, during his incumbency, shall directly or indirectly become interested in any transaction of exchange or speculation within the territory subject to his jurisdiction.

Art 216. Possession of prohibited interest by a public officer. The penalty of arresto mayorin its medium period to prision correccional in its minimum period, or a fine ranging from P200 to P1000, or both, shall be imposed upon a public officer who directly and indirectly, shall become interested in any contract or business which it is his official duty to intervene.

  • Sec 3. Corrupt practices of public officers.  In addition to acts or omissions of public officers already penalized by existing law, the following shall constitute corrupt practices of any public officer and are hereby declared to be unlawful:

XXX

(h) Directly or indirectly having financial or pecuniary interest in any business, or contract or transaction in connection with which here intervenes or takes part in his official capacity or in which he is prohibited by the Constitution or by any law from having any interest, (Sec. 3(h), RA 3019)

  • General Rule: Avoid taking or receiving loans from litigants.
  • Exception(AGCPA): Unsolicited gifts or presents of small value offered or given as a mere ordinary token of gratitude or friendship according to local custom or usage.

FIDUCIARY ACTIVITIES

Rule 5.06 – A judge should not serve as the execution administrator, trustee, guardian, or other fiduciary, except for the estate, trust, or person of a member of the immediate family and then only if such service will not interfere with the proper performance of judicial duties. “member of immediate family” shall be limited to the spouse  and relatives within the second degree of consanguinity.  As a family fiduciary, a judge shall not:

  1. serve in proceedings that might come before the court of said judge; or
  2. act as such contrary to Rule 5.02 to 5.05

PRACTICE OF LAW AND OTHER PROFESSION

Rule 5.07 – A judge shall not engage in the private practice of law.  Unless prohibited by the Constitution or law, a judge may engage in the practice of any other profession provided that such practice will not conflict or tend to conflict with judicial functions.

  • Includes preparation of pleadings or papers in anticipation of litigation, and giving of legal advice to clients or persons needing the same.
  • Not engage in notarial work. Exception: “Notaries public ex-oficio” – may engage only in notarization of documents connected with the exercise of their official functions. Provided, all notarial fees on account of the government and certification attesting to lack of any lawyer or Notary Public.
  • Sworn statement of assets and liabilities including statement of amounts and services of income, the amount of personal and family expenses and the amount of income tax is paid for the next preceding calendar year.

FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

Rule 5.08 – A judge shall make full financial disclosure as required by law.

EXTRA-JUDICIAL APPOINTMENTS

Rule 5.09 – A judge shall not accept appointment or designation to any agency performing quasi-judicial or administrative functions.

POLITICAL ACTIVITIES

Rule 5.10 – A judge is entitled to entertain personal views on political questions.  But to avoid suspicion of political partisanship, a judge shall not make political speeches, contribute to party funds, publicly endorse candidates for political office or participate in other partisan political activities.

COMPLIANCE WITH THE CODE OF JUDICIAL CONDUCT

All judges shall strictly comply with this code

 

DATE OF EFFECTIVITY

This code, promulgated on 5 September 1989, shall take effect on 20 October 1989.

  • An administrative case against a judge is not necessarily dismissed by the withdrawal by or desistance of the complainant.
  • Retirement, resignation or promotion of a judge does not necessarily render moot and academic all the cases against him.
  • Civil Liabilities Re Official Functions:
  1. obstructs, defeats, violates or in any manner impedes or impairs the civil rights.
  2. Willful or negligent rendition of a decision which causes damages to another
  3. For damages: rendering/neglecting to decide a case causing loss to a party.
  • Civil Code Disabilities:

Rule:  Can’t purchase properties subject of litigation is his court.

Exception: Does not apply where the subject property was not acquired from any of the parties to the case, nor will it apply when the litigation is already finished.

But… while in a technical sense, the judge may not have acquired the property in litigation in a case before him, nevertheless, it is improper for him to have done so under the canons of judicial ethics.

  • Donations made to a judge by reason of his office are void.
  • Taking advantage of his position to boost his candidacy amounts to gross misconduct.
  • Cannot serve as officers or advisers of political groups.

Criminal Liabilities of Judges

  • Malfeasance under the RPC:
  1. Knowingly Rendering Unjust Judgment (Art. 204, RPC)

            The elements are:

  1. that the officer is a judge;
  2. that he renders judgment in a case submitted to him for decision;
  3. that the judgment is unjust;
  4. the judge knows that his judgment is unjust.
  5. Judgment Rendered Through Negligence (Art. 205, RPC)

            The elements are:

  1. that the offender is a judge;
  2. that he renders judgment in a case submitted to him for decision
  3. that the judgment is manifestly unjust;
  4. that is due to his inexcusable negligence or ignorance.

Notaries Public 

  • Powers and Duties of a Notary Public

Section 241 of the Revised Administrative Act enumerates the General Powers of a Notary Public:

  1. To administer all oaths and affirmations provided for by law:
    1. in all matters incident to his notarial office;
    2. in the execution of:
      1. affidavits
      2. depositions
      3. other documents requiring an oath
    3. To receive proof or acknowledgment of all writings relating to commerce, such as
      1. ships, vessels or boats:
        1. Bills of Exchange
        2. Bottomries
        3. Mortgages
        4. Hypothecations
        5. charter parties or affreightments
        6. letters of attorney
        7. land/buildings or interest therein:
          1. deeds
          2. mortgages
          3. transfers and assignments
          4. other writings as are commonly provided or acknowledged before notaries.

3. To act as magistrate in the writing of affidavits or depositions

4. To make declarations and certify the truth thereof under his seal of office,   concerning all matters done by him in virtue of his office.

  • The law imposes on the notary public two kinds of duties:
  1. execution of formalities required by law; and
  2. verification of the capacity and identity of the parties as well as the legality of the act executed.
  • Extent of Jurisdiction of a Notary Public:

Under the Notarial Law, the jurisdiction of a notary public in general, used to be CO-EXTENSIVE with the province for which he was commissioned; and for the notary public in the City of Manila, the jurisdiction is CO-EXTENSIVE with said city. Circular 8 of 1985 however, clarified further that the notary public may be commissioned for the same term only by one court within the Metro Manila region.

  • Q: Must a Notary Public always be a LAWYER?

A: General Rule: Only those admitted to the practice of law are qualified to be notaries public.

Exception: When there are no persons with the necessary qualifications OR where there are qualified persons but refuse appointment. In which case, the following persons may be appointed as notaries:

  1. those who have passed the studies of law in a reputable university
  2. a clerk or deputy clerk of court for a period of not less than two years
  • Effects of NOTARIZATION
  1. The notary, in effect, proclaims to the world:
    1. that all the parties therein personally appeared before him
    2. that they are personally known to him
    3. that they are the same persons who executed the instrument
    4. that he inquired into the voluntariness of the execution of the instrument; and
    5. that they acknowledged personally before him that they voluntarily and freely executed the same
    6. Converts a private document into a public one and renders it admissible in court without further proof of its authenticity. (Joson vs. Baltazar)
    7. Documents enjoy a presumption of regularity. It constitutes prima facie evidence of the facts which give rise to their execution and of the date of said execution, but not of the truthfulness of the statements. The reason for the former presumption is that the law assumes that the act which the officer witnesses and certified to or the date written by him are not shown to be false since notaries are public officers.

Legal Ethics – Special Disabilities of Lawyers and Judicial Ethics

Special Disabilities of Lawyers

            The following persons are prohibited from acquiring property under litigation by reason of the relation of trust or their peculiar control either directly or indirectly and even at a public or judicial auction:

  1. guardians;
  2. agents
  3. administrators
  4. public officers and employees
  5. judicial officers and employees
  6. prosecuting attorneys and lawyers (Art 1491, NCC)
  7. those specially disqualified by law (Rubias vs. Batilles, 31 SCRA 120)
  • Elements of Article 1491 (Civil Code; Laig vs. CA, 82 SCRA 294)
  1. there must be an attorney-client relationship
  2. the property or interest of the client must be in litigation
  3. the attorney takes part as counsel in the case
  4. the attorney by himself or through another purchases such property or interest during the pendency of the litigation.
  • General Rule: A lawyer may not purchase, even at a public or judicial auction, in person or through the mediation of another, any property or interest involved in any litigation in which he may take part by virtue of his profession. This prohibition is entirely independent of fraud and such need not be alleged or proven.

  Effects:

  1. malpractice on the part of the lawyer and may be disciplined for misconduct
  2. transaction is null and void
  • Exceptions:
  1. property is acquired by lawyer through a contingent fee arrangement
  2. any of the 4 elements of Art. 1491 is missing

 

Judicial Ethics

  • Sources of Judicial Ethics:
  1. Code of Judicial Conduct
  2. Constitution (Art VIII, Art IX and Art III)
  3. New Civil Code (Articles 9, 20, 27, 32, 35, 739, 1491, 2005, 2035, 2046)
  4. Revised Rules of Court (Rules 71, 135, 137, 139B, 140)
  5. Revised Penal Code (Articles 204, 205, 206, 207)
  6. Anti-Graft and Corrupt Practices Act (RA 3019)
  7. Canons of Judicial Ethics (Adm. Order No. 162)
  8. Code of Professional Responsibility
  9. Judiciary Act of 1948 (RA 296)

10. Judiciary Reorganization Act of 1930 (BP129)

11. Supreme Court Decisions

12. Foreign Decisions

13. Opinions of authorities

14. Other Statutes

15. SC Circulars

  • Court –a board or other tribunal which decides a litigation or contest (Hidalgo v. Manglapus, 64 OG 3189)
  • Judge –a public officer who, by virtue of his office, is clothed with judicial authority, a public officer lawfully appointed to decide litigated questions in accordance with law.
  • De Jure Judge –one who is exercising the office of judge as a matter of right; and officer of a court who has been duly and legally appointed, qualified and whose term has not expired.
  • De Facto Judge –an officer who is not fully vested with all the powers and duties conceded to judges, but is exercising the office of a judge under some color of right.
  • Qualification of Supreme Court Members:
  1. Natural born citizen of the Philippines;
  2. At least 40 years of age;
  3. Must have been at least for 15 years, a judge of a lower court or engaged in the practice of law (Sec 7(2), Art. VIII, 1987 Constitution).

Legal Ethics – Liabilities of Lawyers

Liabilities of Lawyers

  • Civil Liability
  1. Client is prejudiced by lawyer’s negligence or misconduct
  2. Breach of fiduciary obligation
  3. Civil liability to third persons
  4. Libelous words in pleadings; violation of communication privilege
  5. Liability for costs of suit (treble costs) – when lawyer is made liable for insisting on client’s patently unmeritorious case or interposing appeal merely to delay litigation
  • Criminal Liability
  1. Prejudicing client through malicious breach of professional duty
  2. Revealing client’s secrets
  3. Representing adverse interests
  4. Introducing false evidence
  5. Misappropriating client’s funds (estafa)
  • Contempt of Court
  1. Kinds of Contempt:
    1. Direct – consists of misbehavior in the presence of or so near a court or judge as to interrupt or obstruct the proceedings before the court or the administration of justice; punished summarily.
    2. Indirect – one committed away from the court involving disobedience of or resistance to a lawful writ, process, order, judgment or command of the court, or tending to belittle, degrade, obstruct, interrupt or embarrass the court.
    3. Civil- failure to do something ordered by the court which is for the benefit of a party.
    4. Criminal – any conduct directed against the authority or dignity of the court.

b. Acts Constituting Contempt:

  1. Misbehavior
  2. Disobedience
  3. Publication concerning pending litigation
  4. Publication tending to degrade the court; disrespectful language in pleadings
  5. Misleading the court or obstructing justice
  6. Unauthorized practice of law
  7. Belligerent attitude
  8. Unlawful retention of client’s funds

Administrative Liabilities of lawyers

 

  • Main Objectives of Disbarment and Suspension:
  1. to compel the attorney to deal fairly and honestly with his clients;
  2. to remove from the profession a person whose misconduct has proved him unfit to be entrusted with the duties and responsibilities belonging to the office of an attorney;
  3. to punish the lawyer;
  4. to set an example or a warning for the other members of the bar;
  5. to safeguard the administration of justice from incompetent and dishonest lawyers;
  6. to protect the public
  • Characteristics of Disbarment Proceedings:
  1. Neither a civil nor criminal proceedings;
  2. Double jeopardy cannot be availed of in a disbarment proceeding;
  3. It can be initiated motu propioby the SC or IBP.  It can be initiated without a complaint;
  4. It is imprescriptible;
  5. Conducted confidentially;
  6. It can proceed regardless of the interest of the lack thereof on the part of the complainant;
  7. It constitutes due process.
  • Grounds for Disbarment or Suspension:
  1. deceit;
  2. malpractice or other gross misconduct in office;
  3. grossly immoral conduct;
  4. conviction of a crime involving moral turpitude;
  5. violation of oath of office;
  6. willful disobedience of any lawful order of a superior court;
  7. corrupt or willful appearance as attorney for a party to case without authority to do so(Sec. 27, Rule 138, RRC)
  • Procedure for Disbarment
  1. Institution either by:
    1. the Supreme Court, motu proprio, or
    2. the IBP, motu proprio, or
    3. upon verified complaint by any person
  2. Six copies of the verified complaint shall be filed with the Secretary of the IBP or Secretary of any of its chapter and shall be forwarded to the IBP Board of Governors.
  3. Investigation by the National Grievance Investigators.
  4. Submission of investigative report to the IBP Board of Governors.
  5. Board of Governors decides within 30 days.
  6. Investigation by the Solicitor-General
  7. SC renders final decision for disbarment/suspension/dismissal.

Quantum of Proof Required: CLEAR, CONVINCING & SATISFACTORY evidence.

Burden of Proof: Rests on the COMPLAINANT, the one who instituted the suit

  • Officers authorized to investigate Disbarment cases:
  1. Supreme Court
  2. IBP through its Commission on Bar Discipline or authorized investigator
  3. Office of the Solicitor General
  • Mitigating Circumstances in Disbarment:
  1. Good faith in the acquisition of a property of the client subject of litigation (In re: Ruste, 70 Phil. 243)
  2. Inexperience of the lawyer (Munoz v. People, 53 SCRA 190)
  3. Age (Lantos v. Gan, 196 SCRA 16)
  4. Apology (Munoz v. People, 53 SCRA 190)
  5. Lack of Intention to slight or offend the Court (Rhum of the Philippines, Inc. v. Ferrer, 20 SCRA 441).

Normal
0

false
false
false

EN-US
X-NONE
X-NONE

MicrosoftInternetExplorer4

/* Style Definitions */
table.MsoNormalTable
{mso-style-name:”Table Normal”;
mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
mso-style-noshow:yes;
mso-style-priority:99;
mso-style-qformat:yes;
mso-style-parent:””;
mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
mso-para-margin-top:0in;
mso-para-margin-right:0in;
mso-para-margin-bottom:10.0pt;
mso-para-margin-left:0in;
line-height:115%;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:11.0pt;
font-family:”Calibri”,”sans-serif”;
mso-ascii-font-family:Calibri;
mso-ascii-theme-font:minor-latin;
mso-hansi-font-family:Calibri;
mso-hansi-theme-font:minor-latin;}

Reference: Legal Ethics Reviewer

Ateneo

Normal
0

false
false
false

EN-US
X-NONE
X-NONE

MicrosoftInternetExplorer4

/* Style Definitions */
table.MsoNormalTable
{mso-style-name:”Table Normal”;
mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
mso-style-noshow:yes;
mso-style-priority:99;
mso-style-qformat:yes;
mso-style-parent:””;
mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
mso-para-margin-top:0in;
mso-para-margin-right:0in;
mso-para-margin-bottom:10.0pt;
mso-para-margin-left:0in;
line-height:115%;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:11.0pt;
font-family:”Calibri”,”sans-serif”;
mso-ascii-font-family:Calibri;
mso-ascii-theme-font:minor-latin;
mso-hansi-font-family:Calibri;
mso-hansi-theme-font:minor-latin;}

Legal Ethics Chapter IV – The Lawyer and the Client

Chapter IV

The Lawyer and the Client

CANON 14 – A Lawyer shall not refuse his services to the needy.

Rule 14.01 – A lawyer shall not decline to represent a person solely on account of the latter’s race, sex, creed or status of life, or because of his own opinion regarding the guilt of said person.

Rule 14.02 – A lawyer shall not decline, except for serious and sufficient cause, an appointment as counsel de oficio or as amicus curae or a request from the Integrated Bar of the Philippines or any of its chapters for rendition of free legal aid.

Rule 14.03 – A lawyer may refuse to accept representation of a client if:

  1. He is not in position to carry out the work effectively and competently.
  2. He labors under conflict of interest between him and the prospective client or between a present client and the prospective client.

Rule 14.04 – A lawyer who accepts the cause of a person unable to pay his professional fees shall observe the same standard of conduct governing his relations with paying clients.

  • Duties to Client:
  1. owe utmost learning and ability
  2. maintain inviolate the confidence of the client
  3. disclose all circumstances/interest regarding the controversy
  4. undivided loyalty
  5. not reject cause of defenseless and oppressed
  6. candor, fairness and loyalty
  7. hold in trust money or property
  8. respond with zeal to the cause of the client
  • Appointment ofAmicus Curae
  1. by application to the judge
  2. the judge on his own initiative may invite the lawyer
  3. no right to interfere with or control the condition of the record, no control over the suit
  • Cannot refuse on the ground of insufficient of compensation or lack of it

CANON 15 – A lawyer shall observe candor, fairness and loyalty in all his dealings and transactions with his client.

 

Rule 15.01 – A lawyer in conferring with a prospective client, shall ascertain as soon as practicable whether the matter would involve a conflict with another client or his own interest, and if so, shall forthwith inform the prospective client.

Rule 15.02 – A lawyer shall be bound by the rule on privilege communication in respect of matters disclosed to him by a prospective client.

Rule on Revealing Client’s Identity

  • General Rule:  A lawyer may not invoke privilege communication to refuse revealing a client’s identity. (Regala vs. Sandiganbayan, 262 SCRA 122, September 20, 1996)

Exceptions:

  1. When by divulging such identity, it would implicate the client to that same controversy for which the lawyer’s services were required.
  2. It would open client to civil liability
  3. The disclosure of such identity will provide for the only link in order to convict the accused, otherwise, the government has no case.
  • Requisites of Privileged Communication:
  1. -client relationship (or a kind of consultancy relationship with a prospective client
  2. Communication made by client to lawyer in the course of lawyer’s professional employment
  3. Communication is intended to be confidential (see Rule 130, Sec. 21(b), Rules of Court)
  • When communication is not privileged:
  1. after pleading has been filed
  2. communication intended by the client to be sent to a third person through his counsel (it loses its confidential character as soon as it reaches the hands of third person)
  • Even if the communication is unprivileged, the rule of ethics prohibits him from voluntarily revealing or using to his benefit or to that of a third person, to the disadvantage of the client, the said communication unless the client consents thereto.
  • This is applicable to students under the Student Practice Law Program

Rule 15.03 – A lawyer shall not represent conflicting interests except by written consent of all concerned given after a full disclosure of the facts.

 

Rule on Conflicting Interest

            It is generally the rule based on sound public policy that an attorney cannot represent adverse interest. It is highly improper to represent both sides of an issue. The proscription against representation of conflicting interest finds application where the conflicting interest arises with respect to the same general matter and is applicable however slight such adverse interest may be. It applies although the attorney’s intention and motives were honest and he acted in good faith. However, representation of conflicting interest may be allowed where the parties consent to the representation after full disclosure of facts. (Nakpil vs. Valdez, 286 SCRA 758).

  • General Rule:An attorney cannot represent adverse interest.
  • Exception:Where the parties consent to the representation after full disclosure of facts.
  • The TEST in determining Conflicting Interest: The test is whether or not the acceptance of a new relation will prevent an attorney from the full discharge of his duty of individual fidelity and loyalty to his client or invite suspicion of unfaithfulness in double-dealing in the performance thereof.(Tiana vs. Ocampo)

Rule 15.04 – A lawyer may, with the written consent of all concerned, act as mediator, conciliator or arbitrator in settling disputes.

Rule 15.05 – A lawyer, when advising his client, shall give a candid and honest opinion on the merits and probable results of the client’s case, neither overstating nor understating the prospects of the case.

Rule 15.06 – A lawyer shall not state nor imply that he is able to influence any public official, tribunal or legislative body.

Rule 15.07 – A lawyer shall impress upon his client compliance with the laws and the principles of fairness.

Rule 15.08 – A lawyer who is engaged in another profession or occupation concurrently with the practice of law shall make clear to his client whether he is acting as a lawyer or in another capacity.

  • Lawyers should refrain from giving any advice unless they have obtained sufficient understanding of their client’s cause.  A careful investigation and examination of the facts must  first be had before any legal opinion be given by the lawyer to the client.
  • To avoid breach of legal ethics, a lawyer should keep any business, in which is engaged in concurrently with the practice of law, entirely separate and apart from the latter.

CANON 16 – A lawyer shall hold in trust all moneys and properties of his client that may come into his possession.

Rule 16.01 – A lawyer shall account for all money or property collected or received for or from the client.

Rule 16.02 – A lawyer shall keep the funds of each client separate and apart from his own and those of others kept by him.

Rule 16.03 – A lawyer shall deliver the funds and property of his client when due or upon demand.  However, he shall have a lien over the funds and may apply so much thereof as may be necessary to satisfy his lawful fees and disbursements, giving notice promptly thereafter to his client.  He shall also have a lien to the same extent on all judgments and executions he has secured for his client as provided for the Rules of Court.

            Attorneys’ Liens – an attorney shall have a lien upon the funds, documents and papers of his client which have lawfully come into his possession and may retain the same until his lawful fees and disbursements have been paid, and may apply such finds to the satisfaction thereof.  He shall also have a lien to the same extent upon all judgements for the payment of money, and executions issued in pursuance of such judgements which he has secured in a litigation of his client, from and after the time when he shall have caused a statement of his claim of such lien to be entered upon the records of the court rendering such judgement, or issuing such execution, and shall have caused written notice thereof to be delivered to his client and to the adverse party; and he shall have the same right and power over such judgments and executions as his client would have to enforce his lien and secure the payment of his fees and disbursements (Sec, 37, Rule 138, RRC)

Rule 16.04 – A lawyer shall not borrow money from his client unless the client’s interests are fully protected by the nature of the case or by independent advice.  Neither shall a lawyer lend money to a client except, when in the interest of justice, he has to advance necessary expenses in the legal matter he is handling for the client.

  • Attorney’s lien is not an excuse for non-rendition of accounting
  • Cannot disburse client’s money to client’s creditors without authority.
  • Failure to deliver upon demand gives rise to the presumption that he has misappropriated the funds for his own use to the prejudice of the client and in violation of the trust reposed in him.
  • Notify client if retaining lien shall be implemented
  • When a lawyer enforces a charging lien against his client, the client-lawyer relationship is terminated.
  • The principle behind Rule 16.04 is to prevent the lawyer from taking advantage of his influence over the client or to avoid acquiring a financial interest in the outcome of the case.

CANON 17 – A lawyer owes fidelity to the cause of his client and he shall be mindful of the trust and confidence reposed in him.

  • No fear of judicial disfavor or public popularity should restrain him from full discharge of his duty.
  • It is the duty of the lawyer at the time of retainer to disclose to the client all the circumstances of his relations to the parties and any interest in, or connection with, the controversy which might influence the client in the selection of counsel.
  • The lawyer owes loyalty to his client even after the relation of attorney and client has terminated.  It is not good practice to permit him afterwards to defend in another case other persons against his former client under the pretext that the case is distinct from and independent of the former case.

CANON 18 – A lawyer shall serve his client with competence and diligence.

Rule 18.01 – A lawyer shall not undertake a legal service which he knows or should know that he is not qualified to render.  However, he may render such service if, with the consent of his client, he can obtain as collaborating counsel a lawyer who is competent on the matter.

Rule 18.02 – A lawyer shall not handle any legal matter without adequate preparation.

Rule 18.03 – A lawyer shall not neglect a legal matter entrusted to him and his negligence in connection therewith shall render him liable.

Rule 18.04 – A lawyer shall keep the client informed of the status of his case and shall respond within a reasonable time to the client’s request for information.

  • Competence: sufficiency of lawyer’s qualification to deal with the matter in question and includes knowledge and skill and the ability to use them effectively in the interest of the client.
  • A lawyer must keep himself constantly abreast with the trend of authoritative pronouncements and developments in all branches of law.
  • There must be extraordinary diligence in prosecution or defense of his client’s cause.
  • If a lawyer errs like any other human being, he is not answerable for every error or mistake, and will be protected as long as he acts honestly and in good faith to the best of his skill and knowledge.
  • Lawyer is not an insurer of the result in a case where he is engaged in the counsel.

CANON 19 – A lawyer shall represent his client with zeal within the bounds of the law.

Rule 19.01 – A lawyer shall employ only fair and honest means to attain the lawful objectives of his client and shall not present, participate in presenting or threaten to present unfounded criminal charges to obtain an improper advantage in any case or proceeding.

Rule 19.02 – A lawyer who has received information that his client has, in the course of the representation, perpetuated a fraud upon a person or tribunal, shall promptly call upon the client to rectify the same, and failing which he ha to terminate the relationship with such client in accordance with the Rules of Court.

Rule 19.03 – A lawyer shall not allow his client to dictate the procedure in handling the case.

  • General Rule:  Negligence binds client

Exception:  Reckless imprudence (deprives client of due process)

Results in outright deprivation of one’s property through technicality

  • Must not present in evidence any document known to be false; nor present a false witness.
  • Negative pregnant is improper since it is an ambiguous pleading (improper if in bad faith and the purpose is to confuse the other party)

In defense: present every defense the law permits.   

  • Lawyer should do his best efforts to restrain and to prevent his clients from perpetrating acts which he himself ought not to do. Or else, withdraw.  But lawyer shall not volunteer the information about the client’s commission of fraud to anyone – counter to duty to maintain client’s confidence and secrets.

CANON 20 – A lawyer shall charge only fair and reasonable fees.

Rule 20.01 – A lawyer shall be guided by the following factors in determining his fees:

  1. The time spent and the extent of the services rendered or required.
  2. The novelty and difficulty of the questions involved;
  3. The importance of the subject matter;
  4. The skill demanded;
  5. The probability of losing other employment as a result of acceptance of the proffered case;
  6. The customary charges for similar services and the schedule of fees of the IBP chapter to which he belongs;
  7. The amount involved in the controversy and the benefits resulting to the client from the services;
  8. The contingency or certainty of compensation;
  9. The character of the employment, whether occasional or established; and
  10. The professional standing of the lawyer.
  • Kinds of Payment which may be stipulated upon:
  1. a  fixed or absolute fee which is payable regardless of the result of the case
  2. a contingent fee that is conditioned to the securing of a favorable judgment and recovery of money or property and the amount of which may be on a percentage basis
  3. a fixed fee payable per appearance
  4. a fixed fee computed by the number of hours spent
  5. a fixed fee based on a piece of work
  • Attorney’s Fees
  1. Ordinary attorney’s fee-the reasonable compensation paid to a lawyer by his client for the legal services he has rendered to the latter. The basis for this compensation is the fact of his employment by and his agreement with the client.
  2. Extraordinary attorney’s fee– an indemnity for damages ordered by the court to be paid by the losing party in litigation. The basis for this is any of the cases provided for by law where such award can be made, such as those authorized in Article 2208 of the Civil Code, and is payable NOT to the lawyer but to the client, unless they have agreed that the award shall pertain to the lawyer as additional compensation or as part thereof.
  • How attorney’s fees may be claimed by the lawyer:
  1. It may be asserted either in the very action in which the services of a lawyer had been rendered or in a separate action.
  2. A petition for attorney’s fees may be filed before the judgment in favor of the client is satisfied or the proceeds thereof delivered to the client.
  3. The determination as to the propriety of the fees or as to the amount thereof will have to be held in abeyance until the main case from which the lawyer’s claim for attorney’s fees may arise has become final. Otherwise, the determination of the courts will be premature.
  • Kinds of Retainer Agreements on Attorney’s fees:
  1. General Retaineror Retaining Fee – it is the fee paid to a lawyer to secure his future services as general counsel for any ordinary legal problem that may arise in the ordinary business of the client and referred to him for legal action;
  2. Special Retainer – that is a fee for a specific case or service rendered by the lawyer for a client
  • Quantum Meruit -it means “as much as he deserves”and is used as the basis for determining the lawyer’s professional fees in the absence of a contract, but recoverable by him from his client.
  • Quantum Meruit is resorted to  where:
  1. there is no express contract for payment of attorney’s fees agreed upon between the lawyer and the client;
  2. when although there is a formal contract for attorney’s fees, the stipulated fees are found unconscionable or unreasonable by the court.
  3. When the contract for attorney’s fees is void due to purely formal matters or defects of execution
  4. When the counsel, for justifiable cause, was not able to finish the case to its conclusion
  5. When lawyer and client disregard the contract for attorney’s fees.
  • Skill: length of practice is not a safe criterion of professional ability.

Rule 20.02 – A lawyer shall, in cases of referral, with the consent of the client, be entitled to a division of fees in proportion to the work performed and responsibility assumed.

Rule 20.03 – A lawyer shall not, without the full knowledge and consent of the client, accept any fee, reward, costs, commission, interest, rebate or forwarding allowance or other compensation whatsoever related to his professional employment from anyone other than the client.

Rule 20.04 – A lawyer shall avoid controversies with clients concerning his compensation and shall resort to judicial action only to prevent imposition, injustice or fraud.

  • Unauthorized counsel: Not entitled to attorney’s fees.
  • Stipulation regarding payments of attorney’s fees is not illegal/immoral and is enforceable as the law between the parties provided such stipulation does not contravene law, good morals, etc.
  • When counsel cannot recover full amount despite written contract for attorneys’ fees:
  1. When he withdraws before the case is finished
  2. justified dismissal of attorney (payment: in quantum meruitonly)
  • The reason for the award of attorney’s fees must be stated in the text of the decision; otherwise, if it is stated only in the dispositive portion of the decision, the same must be disallowed on appeal.
  • Even though the interest or property involved is of considerable value, if the legal services rendered do not call for much efforts there is no justification for the award of high fees.
  • Champertous Contracts (void)– Lawyer stipulates with his client that in the prosecution of the case, he will bear all the expenses for the recovery of things or property being claimed by the client and the latter agrees to pay the former a portion of the thing/property recovered as compensation.
  • Compensation to an attorney for merely recommending another lawyer is improper (agents)
  • Attorney’s fees for legal services shared or divided to non-lawyer is prohibited. Division of fees is only for division of service or responsibility.
  • A lawyer should try to settle amicably any differences on the subject. A lawyer has 2 options. Judicial action to recover attorney’s fees:
  1. In same case: Enforce attorney’s fees by filing an appropriate motion or petition as an incident to the main action where he rendered legal services.
  2. In a separate civil action.

CANON 21 – A lawyer shall preserve the confidences and secrets of his client even after the attorney-client relation is terminated.

  • Confidence – refers to information protected by the attorney-client privilege (RRC)
  • Secret –refers to other information gained in the professional relationship that the client has regulated to be held inviolate or the disclosure of which would be embarrassing or would likely be detrimental to the client.
  • An attorney cannot, without the consent of his client, be examined as to any communication made by the client to him, or his advice given thereon in the course of professional employment; nor can an attorney’s secretary, stenographer, or clerk be examined, without the consent of the client and his employees, concerning any fact the knowledge of which has been acquired in such capacity (Rule 130, Sec. 21 (b), RRC)
  • The mere establishment of a client-lawyer relationship does not raise a presumption of confidentiality.  There must be an intent or that the communication relayed by the client to the lawyer be treated as confidential.

Rule 21.01 – A lawyer shall not reveal the confidences or secrets of his client except:

  1. When authorized by the client after acquainting him of the consequences of the disclosure:
  2. When required by law;
  3. When necessary to collect his fees or to defend himself, his employees or associates or by judicial action.
  • When properly authorized after having been fully informed of the consequences to reveal his confidences/secrets, then there is a valid waiver.
  • 209. Betrayal of Trust by an Attorney or Solicitor. Revelation of secrets.In addition to the proper administrative action, the penalty of prision correccionalin its minimum period, or a fine ranging from P200 to P1000, or both, shall be imposed upon any attorney at law or solicitor who, by any malicious break of professional duty as inexcusable negligence or ignorance, shall prejudice his client, or reveal any of the secrets of the latter learned by him in his professional capacity.

The same penalty shall be imposed upon an attorney at law or solicitor who, having undertaken the defense of a client, or having received confidential information from said client in a case, shall undertake the defense of the opposing party in the same case, without the consent of his first client (Rule 209, RPC)

  • General Rule: Obligation to keep secrets covers only lawful purposes
  • Exceptions:
  1. announcements of intention of  a client to commit a crime
  2. client jumped bail and lawyer knows his whereabouts; or client is living somewhere under an assumed name
  3. communication involves the commission of future fraud or crime but crimes/frauds “already committed” falls within the privilege.

Rule 21.02 – A lawyer shall not, to the disadvantage of his client, use information acquired in the course of employment, nor shall he use the same to his own advantage or that of a third person, unless the client with full knowledge of the circumstances consents thereto.

Rule 21.03 – A lawyer shall not, without the written consent of his client, give information from his files to an outside agency seeking such information for auditing, statistical, bookkeeping, accounting, data processing, or any other similar purposes.

Rule 21.04 – A lawyer may disclose the affairs of a client of the firm to partners or associates thereof unless prohibited by the client.

Rule 21.05 – A lawyer shall adopt such measures as may be required to prevent those whose services are utilized by him, from disclosing or using confidences or secrets of the client.

Rule 21.06 – A lawyer shall avoid indiscreet conversation about a client’s affairs even with members of his family.

Rule 21.07 – A lawyer shall not reveal that he has been consulted about a particular case except to avoid possible conflict of interest.

  • Avoid committing calculated indiscretion – accidental revelation of secrets obtained in his professional employment.
  • Prohibition applies, even if the prospective client did not thereafter actually engage the lawyer.

CANON 22 – A lawyer shall withdraw his services only for good cause and upon notice appropriate in the circumstances.

Rule 22.01 – A lawyer may withdraw his services in any of the following cases:

  1. When the client pursues an illegal or immoral course of conduct in connection with the matter he is handling;
  2. When the client insists that the lawyer pursue conduct violative of these canons and rules;
  3. When his inability to work with co-counsel will not promote the best interest of the client;
  4. When the mental or physical condition of the lawyer renders it difficult for him to carry out the employment effectively;
  5. When the client deliberately fails to pay the fees for the services or fails to comply with the retainer agreement;
  6. When the lawyer is elected or appointed to a public office, and
  7. Other similar cases

Rule 22.02 – A lawyer who withdraws or is discharged shall subject to a retaining lien, immediately turn over all papers and property to which the client is entitled, and shall cooperate with his successor in the orderly transfer of the matter, including all information necessary for the proper handling of the matter.

 

Retaining Lien

Charging Lien

1. Nature

Passive Lien: It cannot be actively enforced.  It is a general lien

Active Lien: It can be enforced by execution.  It is a special lien.

2. Basis

Lawful possession of papers, documents, property belonging to client.

Securing of a favorable money judgment for the client.

3.  Coverage

Covers only papers, documents and property in the lawful possession of the attorney by reason of his professional employment

Covers all judgments for the payment of money and executions issued in pursuance of such judgments.

4. When Lien takes effect

As soon as the attorney gets possession of the papers documents or property

As soon as the claim for attorney’s fees had been entered into the records of the case

5.  Notice

Client need not be notified to make it effective

Client and adverse party must be notified to make it effective

6.  Applicability

May be exercised before judgment or execution or regardless thereof.

Generally, it is exercisable only when the attorney had already secured a favorable judgment for his client

  • In withdrawal as counsel for a client, an attorney may only retire from a case either by written consent of his client or by permission of the court after due notice and hearing, in which event the attorney should see to it that the name of the new attorney is recorded in the case.
  • An attorney who could not get the written consent of his client must make an application to the court, for the relation does not terminate formally until there is a withdrawal of record. Counsel has no right to presume that the court would grand his withdrawal and therefore must still appear on the date of hearing.
  • Requirements for the Substitution of Counsel in a Case:
  1. written application
  2. written consent of client
  3. written consent of attorney to be substituted
  4. if the consent of the attorney to be substituted cannot be obtained, there must be at least a proof of notice that the motion for substitution has been served upon him, in the manner prescribed by the rules.
  • A lawyer cannot recover compensation from one who did not employ or authorize his employment, however valuable the results of his services may have been to such person. In similar cases, no compensation when:
  1. client conducts himself in a manner which tends to degrade his attorney;
  2. client refuses to extend cooperation;
  3. client stops having contact with him.
  • The right of a client to terminate a lawyer is absolute.  Such termination may be with or without cause.

Legal Ethics Chapter III – The Lawyer and the Courts

Chapter III

The Lawyer and the Courts

CANON 10 – A Lawyer owes candor, fairness and good faith to the court.

Rule 10.01 – A lawyer shall not do any falsehood, nor consent to the doing of any in court; nor shall he mislead or allow the court to be mislead by any artifice.

Rule 10.02 – A lawyer shall not knowingly misquote or misrepresent the contents of the paper, the language or the argument of opposing counsel, or the text of a decision of authority, or knowingly cite as law a provision already rendered inoperative by repeal or amendment, or assert as a fact that which has not been approved.

Rule 10.03 – A lawyer shall observe the rules of procedure and shall not misuse them to defeat the ends of justice.

  • Judge-lawyer relationship:  based on independence and self-respect.
  • Lawyer’s duty to the court:
  1. respect and loyalty
  2. fairness, truth and candor
  3. no attempt to influence courts
  • Cases of falsehood:
  1. stating in the Deed of Sale that property is free from all liens and encumbrances when not so
  2. encashing check payable to a deceased cousin by signing the latter’s name on the check
  3. falsifying a power of attorney and using it in collecting the money due to the principal
  4. alleging in one pleading that the clients were mere lessees and in another pleading that the same clients were owners
  5. presenting falsified documents in court which he knows to be false
  6. filing false charges on groundless suits
  7. using in pleadings the IBP number of another lawyer
  8. unsolicited appearances
  9. use of fictitious residence certificate
  10. misquotation/misrepresentation
  11. citing a repealed or amended provision
  12. asserting a fact not proved
  13. verbatim reproductions down to the last word and punctuation mark
  14. slight typo mistake: not sufficient to place him in contempt

CANON 11 – A lawyer shall observe and maintain the respect due to the courts and to judicial officers and should insist on similar conduct by others.                                                          

Rule 11.01 – A lawyer shall appear in court properly attired.

  • A lawyer may NOT wear outlandish or colorful clothing to court.
  • As an officer of the court and in order to maintain the dignity and respectability of the legal profession, a lawyer who appears in court must be properly attired. Consequently, the court can hold a lawyer IN CONTEMPT of court if he does not appear in proper attire. Any deviation from the commonly accepted norm of dressing in court (barong or tie, not both) is enough to warrant a citing for contempt.

Rule 11.02 – A lawyer shall punctually appear at court hearings.

Rule 11.03 – A lawyer shall abstain from scandalous, offensive, or menacing language or behavior before the courts.

Rule 11.04 – A lawyer shall not attribute to a judge motives not supported by the record or having no materiality to the case.

Rule 11.05 – A lawyer shall submit grievances against a judge to the proper authorities already.

  • A lawyer is an officer of the court. He occupies a quasi-judicial office with a tripartite obligation to the courts, to the public and to his clients.
  • The public duties of the attorney take precedence over his private duties.  His first duty is to the courts. Where duties to the courts conflict with his duties to his clients, the latter must yield to the former.
  • Lawyers must be respectful not only in actions but also in the use of language whether in oral arguments or in pleadings.
  • Must exert efforts that others (including clients, witnesses) shall deal with the courts and judicial officers with respect.
  • Obedience to court orders and processes.
  • Criticisms of courts must not spill the walls of decency. There is a wide difference between fair criticism and abuse and slander of courts and judges.  Intemperate and unfair criticism is a gross violation of the duty to respect the courts.  It amounts to misconduct which subjects the lawyer to disciplinary action.
  • A mere disclaimer of any intentional disrespect by appellant is not a ground for exoneration.  His intent must be determined by a fair interpretation of the languages employed by him.  He cannot escape responsibility by claiming that his words did not mean what any reader must have understood them to mean.
  • Lawyer can demand that the misbehavior of a judge be put on record.
  • Lawyers must be courageous enough to expose arbitrariness and injustice of courts and judges.
  • A lawyer may submit grievances against judges in the Supreme Court, Ombudsman, or Congress (for impeachment of SC judges only).

CANON 12 – A lawyer shall exert every effort and consider it his duty to assist in the speedy and efficient administration of justice.

Rule 12.01 – A lawyer shall not appear for trial unless he has adequately prepared himself with the law and the facts of his case, the evidence he will adduce and the order of its preference.  He should also be ready with the original documents for comparison with the copies.

  • Newly hired counsel: must acquaint himself with all the antecedent proceedings and processes that have transpired in the record prior to his takeover.
  • If presenting documentary exhibits, he must be ready with the originals for the purpose of comparison with copies thereof.

Rule 12.02 – A lawyer shall not file multiple actions arising from the same cause.

  • Forum shopping– omission to disclose pendency of appeal or prior dismissal of his case by a court of concurrent jurisdiction.
  • Forum shopping exists when as a result of an adverse opinion in one forum:
  1. a party seeks favorable opinion (other than by appeal or certiorari) in another; or
  2. when he institutes two or more actions or proceedings grounded on the same cause, on the gamble that one or the other would make a favorable disposition (Benguet Electric Corp. vs. Flores, 287 SCRA 449, March 12, 1998).
  • The most important factor in determining the existence of forum-shopping is the VEXATION caused the courts and party-litigants by a party who asks different courts to rule on the same related causes, asking the same relief.
  • Forum shopping constitutes DIRECT CONTEMPT of court and may subject the offending lawyer to disciplinary action.

Rule 12.03 – A lawyer shall not, after obtaining extensions of time to file pleadings, memoranda or briefs, let the period lapse without submitting the same or offering an explanation for his failure to do so.

  • Asking for extension of time must be in good faith.

Rule 12.04 – A lawyer shall not unduly delay a case, impede the execution of a judgment or misuse court processes.

Rule 12.05 – A lawyer shall refrain from talking to his witness during a break or recess in the trial, while the witness is still under examination.

Rule 12.06 – A lawyer shall not knowingly assist a witness to misrepresent himself or to impersonate another.

Rule 12.07 – A lawyer shall not abuse, browbeat or harass a witness nor needlessly inconvenience him.

Rights and obligations of a witness –  a witness must answer questions, although his answer may tend to establish a claim against him.  However, it is the right of a witness:

  1. to be protected from irrelevant, improper, or insulting questions and from harsh or insulting demeanor;
  2. not to be detained longer than the interest of justice requires;
  3. not to be examined except only as to matters pertinent to the issue;
  4. not to give any answer which will tend to subject him to a penalty for an offense unless otherwise provided by law, or
  5. nor to give answer which will tend to degrade his reputation, unless it be to the very fact at issue or to a fact from which the fact in issue would be presumed.  But a witness must answer to the fact of his previous final conviction for an offense. (Rule 132, Sec. 3, RRC)

Rule 12.08 – A lawyer shall avoid testifying in behalf of his client, except:

  1. on formal matters, such as the mailing, authentication or custody of an instrument and the like:
  2. on substantial matters, in cases where his testimony is essential to the ends of justice, in which event he must, during his testimony, entrust the trial of the case to another counsel.

CANON 13 – A lawyer shall rely upon the merits of his cause and refrain from any impropriety which tends to influence, or gives the appearance of influencing the court.

Rule 13.01 – A lawyer shall not extend extraordinary attention or hospitality to, nor seek opportunity for, cultivating familiarity with judges.

Rule 13.02 – A lawyer shall not make public statements in the media regarding a pending case tending to arouse public opinion for or against a party.

Rule 13.03 – A lawyer shall not brook or invite interference by another branch or agency of the government in the normal course of judicial proceedings.

  • The judge has the corresponding duty not to convey or permit others to convey the impression that they are in a special position to influence the judge.
  • Discussing cases with the judge privately should be avoided.
  • Test when public statement is contemptuous: The character of the act done and its direct tendency to prevent and obstruct the discharge of official duty.
  • To warrant a finding of “prejudicial publicity”, there must be an allegation and proof that the judges have been unduly influenced, not simply that they might be, by the “barrage” of publicity.
  • Lawyer is equally guilty as the client if he induces the latter to cause the publicity.

Legal Ethics Chapter II – Lawyer and Society

Chapter II

The Lawyer and the Legal Profession

CANON 7 – A lawyer shall at all times uphold the integrity and dignity of the legal profession, and support the activities of the integrated bar.

Rule 7.01 – A lawyer shall be answerable for knowingly making false statements or suppressing a material fact, in connection with his application for admission to the bar.

Rule 7.02 – A lawyer shall not support application for admission to the bar by any person known to him or be unqualified in respect to character, education, or other relevant attribute.

Rule 7.03 – A lawyer shall not engage in conduct that adversely reflects on his fitness to practice law, nor should he, whether in public or private life, behave in a scandalous manner to the discredit of the legal profession.

  • Upright character; not mere absence of bad character.
  • A lawyer must at all times conduct himself properly as not to put into question his fitness to practice law.
  • Avoid scandalous conduct; not only required to refrain from adulterous relationships or the keeping of mistress but must also behave himself as to avoid scandalizing the public by creating the belief that he is flouting those moral standards.

CANON 8 – A lawyer shall conduct himself with courtesy, fairness and candor towards his professional colleagues, and shall avoid harassing tactics against opposing counsel.

Rule 8.01 – A lawyer shall not, in his professional dealings, use language which is abusive, offensive or otherwise improper.

Rule 8.02 – A lawyer shall not, directly or indirectly, encroach upon the professional employment of another lawyer; however, it is the right of any lawyer without fear or favor, to give proper advice and assistance to those seeking relief against unfaithful or neglectful counsel.

  • It is the duty of a lawyer to inform the SC or the IBP of such malpractice to the end that the malpractitioner be properly disciplined.
  • Not to use in pleadings and in practice the following: disrespectful, abusive and abrasive language, offensive personalities, unfounded accusations or intemperate words tending to obstruct, embarrass or influence the court in administering justice.
  • Want of intention: not an excuse for the disrespectful language used. It merely extenuates liability.

CANON 9 – A lawyer shall not directly or indirectly assist in the unauthorized practice of law.

Rule 9.01 – A lawyer shall not delegate to any unqualified person the performance of any task which by law may only be performed by a member of the bar in good standing.

Rule 9.02 – A lawyer shall not divide or stipulate to divide a fee for legal services with persons not licensed to practice law, except:

  1. Where there is a pre-existing agreement, with a partner or associate that , upon the latter’s death, money shall be paid over a reasonable period of time to his estate or to the persons specified in the agreement; or
  2. Where a lawyer undertakes to complete unfinished legal business of a deceased lawyer; or
  3. Where a lawyer or law firm includes non-lawyer employees in a retirement plan, even if the plan is based in whole or in part of a profit sharing arrangements.
  • Lawyer shall not negotiate with the opposite party who is represented by a counsel.  Neither should lawyer attempt to interview the opposite party and question him as to the facts of the case even if the adverse party is willing to do so.
  • Lawyer should deal only with counsel, even if there’s a fair agreement.
  • Lawyer may however interview any witness or prospective witness for the opposing side. Limitation: avoid influencing witness in recital and conduct.
  • A lawyer must not take as partner or associate one who:
  1. is not a lawyer
  2. is disbarred
  3. has been suspended from the practice of law
  4. foreign lawyer, unless licensed by the SC.
  • A lawyer cannot delegate his authority without client’s consent even to a qualified person.

Legal Ethics Chapter I – Lawyer and Society

LEGAL ETHICS – is a branch of moral science, which treats of the duties which an attorney owes to the court, to the client, to his colleagues in the profession and to the public as embodied in the Constitution, Rules of Court, the Code of Professional Responsibility, Canons of Professional Ethics, jurisprudence, moral laws and special laws.

Original Bases of Legal Ethics:

  1. Canons of Professional Ethics
  2. Supreme court Decisions
  3. Statistics
  4. Constitution
  5. Treatises and publications

Present Basis of the Philippine Legal System: Code of Professional Responsibility.

BAR  V.  BENCH

BAR – Refers to the whole body of attorneys and body of judges.

BENCH – denotes the whole body of counselors, collectively the members of

the legal profession.

Practice of Law – any activity, in or out of court which requires the application of law, legal procedure, knowledge, training and experience. To engage in the practice of law is to give notice or render any kind of service, which or devise or service requires the use in any degree of legal knowledge or skill (Cayetano v. Monsod, 201 SCRA 210).

Attorney-at-law/Counsel-at-law/Attorney/Counsel/ Abogado/Boceros: that class of persons who are licensed officers of the courts, empowered to appear prosecute and defend and upon whom peculiar duties, responsibilities, and liabilities are developed by law as a consequence (Cui v. Cui, 120 Phil. 729).

Attorney in fact – an agent whose authority is strictly limited by the instrument appointing him, though he may do things not mentioned in his appointment necessary to the performance of the duties specifically required of him by the power of attorney appointing him, such authority being necessarily implied.  He is not necessarily a lawyer.

Counsel de Oficio – a counsel, appointed or assigned by the court, from among members of the Bar in good standing who, by reason of their experience and ability, may adequately defend the accused.

Note: In localities where members of the Bar are not available, the court may appoint any person, resident of the province and good repute for probity and ability, to defend the accused. Sec. 7, Rule 116, Rules of Court.

Attorney ad hoc – a person named and appointed by the court to defend an absentee defendant in the suit in which the appointment is made (Bienvenu v. Factor’s of Traders Insurance Cp., 33 La.Ann.209)

Attorney of Record – one who has filed a notice of appearance and who hence is formally mentioned in court records as the official attorney of the party. Person whom the client has named as his agent upon whom service of papers may be made.

(Reynolds v. Reynolds, Cal.2d580).

Of Counsel – to distinguish them from attorneys of record, associate attorneys are referred to as “of counsel” (5 Am. Jur. 261).

Lead Counsel – The counsel on their side of a litigated action who is charged with the principal management and direction of a party’s case.

House Counsel – Lawyer who acts as attorney for business though carried as an employee of that business and not as an independent lawyer.

Bar Association – an association of members of the legal profession.

Advocate – The general and popular name for a lawyer who pleads on behalf of someone else.

Barrister  (England) – a person entitled to practice law as an advocate or counsel in superior court.

Proctor (England) – Formerly, an attorney in the admiralty and ecclesiastical courts whose duties and business correspond to those of an attorney at law or solicitor in Chancery.

Titulo de Abogado –  it means not mere possession of the academic degree of Bachelor of Laws but membership in the Bar after due admission thereto, qualifying one for the practice of law.

Admission to the Practice of Law

The Supreme Court has the power to control and regulate the practice of law. Thus, the Constitution, under  Article  VIII, Sec. 5 (5) provides:

                        Sec. 5. The Supreme Court shall have the following powers:

(5) Promulgate rules concerning the protection and enforcement of constitutional rights, pleading, practice and procedure in all courts, the admission to the practice of law, the Integrated Bar, and legal assistance to the under privileged.

The Supreme Court acts through a Bar Examination Committee in the Exercise of his judicial function to admit candidates to the legal profession.

The Bar Examination Committee:

  • Composed of (1) member of the Supreme Court who acts as Chairman and eight (8) members of the bar.
  • The 8 members act as examiners for the 8 bar subjects with one subject assigned to each.
  • The Bar Confidant acts as a sort of liason officer between the court and the Bar Chairman on the other hand, and the individual members of the committee on the other.  He is at the same time a deputy clerk of court.
  • Admission of examinees is always subject to the final approval of the court.

Practice of Law

The practice of law is a privilege granted only to those who possess the STRICT INTELLECTUAL AND MORAL QUALIFICATIONS required of lawyers who are instruments in the effective and efficient administration of justice. (In Re: Argosino, 1997).

Requirements  for admission to the Bar:

  1. citizen of the Philippines
  2. at least 21 years old
  3. of good moral character
  4. Philippine resident
  5. Production before the supreme court satisfactory evidence of:
    1. good moral character
    2. no charges against him, involving moral turpitude, have been filed or are pending in any court in the Philippines.

Requirement of Good Moral Character: a continuing requirement; good moral character is not only a condition precedent for admission to the legal profession, but it must also remain intact in order to maintain one’s good standing in that exclusive and honored fraternity. (Tapucar vs. Tapucar, 1998)

Academic Requirements for Candidates:

  1. a bachelor’s degree in arts and sciences (pre-law course)
  2. a completed course in:
    1. civil law
    2. commercial law
    3. remedial law
    4. public international law
    5. private international law
    6. political law
    7. labor and social legislation
    8. medial jurisprudence
    9. taxation
    10. legal ethics

Non-lawyers who may be authorized to appear in court:

  1. Cases before the MTC:  Party to the litigation,  in person OR through an agent or friend or appointed by him for that purpose ( 34, Rule 138, RRC)
  2. Before any other court: Party to the litigation, in person ()
  3. Criminal case before the MTC in a locality where a duly licensed member of the Bar is not available: the judge may appoint a non-lawyer who is:
    1. resident of the province
    2. of good repute for probity and ability to aid the accused in his defense (Rule 116, Sec. 7, RRC).
  4. Legal Aid Program – A senior law student, who is enrolled in a recognized law school’s clinical education program approved by the supreme Court may appear before any court without compensation, to represent indigent clients, accepted by the Legal Clinic of the law school.  The student shall be under the direct supervision and control of an IBP member duly accredited by the law school.
  5. Under the Labor code, non-lawyers may appear before the NLRC or any Labor Arbiter, if
    1. they represent themselves, or if
    2. they  represent their organization or members thereof (Art 222, PO 442, as amended).
  6. Under the Cadastral Act, a non-lawyer can represent a claimant before the Cadastral Court(Act no. 2259, Sec. 9).

Public Officials who cannot engage in the private practice of Law in the Philippines:

  1. Judges and other officials as employees of the Supreme Court (Rule 148, Sec. 35, RRC).
  2. Officials and employees of the OSG (Ibid.)
  3. Government prosecutors (People v. Villanueva, 14 SCRA 109).
  4. President, Vice-President, members of the cabinet, their deputies and assistants (Art. VIII Sec. 15, 1987 Constitution).
  5. Members of the Constitutional Commission (Art IX-A, Sec. 2, 1987 Constitution)
  6. Ombudsman and his deputies (Art. IX, Sec. 8 (2ndpar), 1987 Constitution)
  7. All governors, city and municipal mayors (R.A. No. 7160, Sec. 90).
  8. Those prohibited by special law

Public Officials with Restrictions in the Practice of Law:

  1. No Senator as member of the House of Representative may personally appear as counsel before any court of justice as before the Electoral Tribunals, as quasi-judicial and other administration bodies (Art. VI, Sec. 14, 1987 Constitution).
  2. Under the Local Government Code (RA 7160, Sec. 91)Sanggunian members may practice their professions provided that if they are members of the Bar, they shall not:
    1. appear as counsel before any court in any civil case wherein a local government unit or any office, agency, or instrumentality of the government is the adverse party;
    2. appear as counsel in any criminal case wherein an officer or employee of the national or local government is accused of an offense committed in relation to his office;
    3. collect any fee for their appearance in administrative proceedings involving the local government unit of which he is an official;
    4. use property and personnel of the government except when the Sanggunian member concerned is defending the interest of the government.
  3. Under RA 910, Sec. 1, as amended, a retired justice or judge receiving pension from the government, cannot act as counsel in any civil case in which the Government, or any of its subdivision or agencies is the adverse party or in a criminal case wherein an officer or employee of the Government is accused of an offense in relation to his office.

Attorney’s Oath:

            “I, __________________, do solemnly swear that I will maintain allegiance to the Republic of the Philippines; I will support its constitution and obey the laws as well as the legal orders of the duly constituted authorities therein; I will do no falsehood, nor consent to the doing of any in court; I will not willingly nor wittingly promote or sue any groundless, false or unlawful suit, or give aid nor consent to the same; I will delay no man for money or malice, and will conduct myself as a lawyer according to the best of my knowledge and discretion, with all good fidelity as well to the court as to my clients; and I impose upon myself this voluntary obligations without any mental reservation or purpose of evasion. So help me God.” (Form 28, RRC)

Nature of Lawyer’s Oath

  • The lawyer’s oath is not mere facile words, drift and hollow, but a sacred trust that must be upheld and kept inviolable. (Sebastian vs. Calis, 1999)
  • It is NOT a mere ceremony or formality for practicing law. Every lawyer should at all times weigh his actions according to the sworn promises he made when taking the lawyer’s oath. (In Re: Argosino, 1997, In Re: Arthur M. Cuevas, 1998).

Code of Professional Responsibility

Chapter 1:

Lawyer and Society

CANON 1 – A lawyer shall uphold the constitution, obey the laws of the land and promote respect for law and for legal processes

  • Duties of Attorneys:
  1. to maintain allegiance to the Republic of the Philippines and to support the Constitution and obey the laws of the Philippines;
  2. to observe and maintain the respect due to the courts of justice and judicial officers;
  3. to counsel or maintain such actions or proceedings only as appear to him as just, and such defenses only as he believes to be honestly debatable under the laws;
  4. to employ, for the purpose of maintaining the causes confided to him, such means only as are consistent with truth and honor, and never seek to mislead the judge or  any judicial officer by an artifice or false statement of fact or law;
  5. to maintain inviolate the confidence, and at every peril to himself, to preserve the secrets of his client, and to accept no compensation in connection with his client’s business except from him or with his knowledge and approval;
  6. to abstain from all offensive personality and to advance no fact prejudicial to the honor or reputation of a party or witness, unless required by the justice of the cause with which he is charged;
  7. not to encourage either the commencement or the continuance of an action or proceeding, or delay any man’s cause for any corrupt motive or interest;
  8. never to reject, for any consideration personal to himself, the cause of the defenseless or oppressed;
  9. in the defense of a person accused of a crime, by all fair and honorable means, regardless of his personal opinion as to the guilt of the accused, to present every defense that the law permits, to the end that no person may be deprived of life or liberty, but by due process of law.

Rule 1.01 – A lawyer shall not engage in unlawful, dishonest, immoral or deceitful conduct.

  • Conviction for crimes involving moral turpitude – a number of lawyers have been suspended or disbarred for conviction of crimes involving moral turpitude such as:
  1. estafa
  2. bribery
  3. murder
  4. seduction
  5. abduction
  6. smuggling
  7. falsification of public documents
  • Morality as understood in law -This is a human standard based on natural moral law which is embodied in man’s conscience and which guides him to do good and avoid evil.
  • Moral Turpitude:any thing that  is done contrary to justice, honesty, modesty or good morals.
  • Immoral Conduct:that conduct which is willful, flagrant, or shameless and which shows a moral indifference to the opinion of the good and respectable members of the community(Arciga vs. Maniwag, 106 SCRA 591).
  • Grossly Immoral Conduct:One that is so corrupt and false as to constitute a criminal act or so unprincipled or disgraceful as to be reprehensible to a high degree; it is a WILLFUL, FLAGRANT or SHAMELESS ACT which shows a MORAL INDIFFERENCE to the opinion of respectable members of the community. (Narag vs. Narag, 1998)

Rule 1.02 – A lawyer shall not counsel or abet activities aimed at defiance of the law or at lessening confidence in the legal system.

Rule 1.03 – A lawyer shall not, for any corrupt motive or interest, encourage any suit or proceeding or delay any man’s cause.

Rule 1.04 – A lawyer shall encourage his clients to avoid, end or settle the controversy if it will admit of a fair settlement.

  • If a lawyer finds that his client’s cause is defenseless, it is his burden/duty to advise the latter to acquiesce and submit, rather than traverse the incontrovertible.
  • It is unprofessional for a lawyer to volunteer advice to bring a lawsuit, except in rare cases where the blood, relationship or trust makes it his duty to do so.
  • Temper client’s propensity to litigate.
  • Should not be an instigator of controversy but a mediator for concord and conciliator for compromise.
  • The law violated need not be a penal law. “Moral Turpitude” – everything which is done contrary to justice, honesty, modesty or good morals.
  • Give advice tending to impress upon the client and his undertaking exact compliance with the strictest principles of moral law.
  • Until a statute shall have been construed and interpreted by competent adjudication, he is free and is entitled to advise as to its validity and as to what he conscientiously believes to be its just meaning and extent.
  • A lawyer has the obligation not to encourage suits. This is so as to prevent barratry and ambulance chasing.
  • Barratry –offense of frequently exciting and stirring up quarrels and suits, either at law or otherwise; Lawyer’s act of fomenting suits among individuals and offering his legal services to one of them.
  • Ambulance Chasing –Act of chasing victims of accidents for the purpose of talking to the said victims (or relatives) and offering his legal services for the filing of a case against the person(s) who caused the accident(s).

CANON 2 – A lawyer shall make his legal services available in an efficient and convenient manner compatible with the independence, integrity and effectiveness of the profession.

Rule 2.01 – A lawyer shall not reject, except for valid reasons, the cause of the defenseless or oppressed.

Rule 2.02 – In such a case, even if a lawyer does not accept a case, he shall not refuse to render legal advise to the person concerned if only to the extent necessary to safeguard latter’s rights.

Rule 2.03 – a lawyer shall not do or permit to be done any act designed primarily to solicit legal business.

  • Primary  characteristics which distinguish the legal profession from business;
  1. duty of service, of which the emolument is a by product, and in which one may attain the highest eminence without making such money;
  2. a relation as an ‘officer of court’ to the administration of justice involving thorough sincerity, integrity and reliability;
  3. a relation to clients in the highest degree of fiduciary;
  4. a relation to colleagues at the bar characterized by candor, fairness and unwillingness to resort to current business methods of advertising and encroachment on their practice or dealing with their clients.
  • Defenseless– not in the position to defend themselves due to poverty, weakness, ignorance or other similar reasons.
  • Oppressed victims of acts of cruelty, unlawful exaction, domination or excessive use of authority.

Rule on Advertisements

  • General Rule: No advertisements allowed. The most worthy and effective advertisement possible is the establishment of a well-merited reputation for professional capacity and fidelity to trust.

Lawyers may not advertise their services or expertise nor should not resort to indirect advertisements for professional employment, such as furnishing or inspiring newspaper comments, or procuring his photograph to be published in connection with causes in which the lawyer has been engaged or concerning the manner of their conduct, the magnitude of the interest involved, the importance of the lawyer’s position, and all other self-laudation.

  • Exceptions/ Permissible advertisements: 
  1. Reputable law lists, in a manner consistent with the standards of conduct imposed by the canons, of brief biographical and informative data, are allowed.
  2. Ordinary simple professional Card. It may contain only a statement of his name, the name of the law firm which he is connected with, address, telephone number and the special branch of law practiced.
  3. A simple announcement of the opening of a law firm or of changes in the partnership, associates, firm name or office address, being for the convenience of the profession, is not objectionable.
  4. Advertisements or simple announcement of the existence of a lawyer or his law firm posted anywhere it is proper such as his place of business or residence except courtrooms and government buildings.
  5. Advertisements or announcement in any legal publication, including books, journals, and legal magazines.

Rule 2.04 – A lawyer shall not charge rates lower than those customarily or prescribed, unless circumstances so warrant.

  • A lawyer cannot delay the approval of a compromise agreement entered into between parties, just because his attorney’s fees were not provided for in the agreement.
  • Rule:  A lawyer cannot compromise the case without client’s consent (special authority). Exception:  Lawyer has exclusive management of the procedural aspect of the litigation (e.g. Submission for decision on the evidence so far presented. But in case where lawyer is confronted with an emergency and prompt/urgent action is necessary to protect clients interest and there’s no opportunity for consultation, the lawyer may compromise.
  • Rule:  Refrain from charging rates lower than the customary rates.

Valid Justification:  relatives, co-lawyers, too poor

CANON 3 – A lawyer in making known is legal services shall use only true, honest, fair dignified and objective information or statement of facts.

Rule 3.01 – A lawyer shall not use or permit the use of any false, fraudulent, misleading, deceptive, undignified, self-auditory or unfair statement or claim regarding his qualifications or legal services.

  • Violation of Rule 3.01 is unethical, whether done by him personally or through another with his permission.

Rule 3.02 – In the choice of a firm name, no false, misleading, or assumed name shall be used.  The continued use of the name of a deceased partner is permissible provided that the firm indicates in all its communication that said partner is deceased.

Rule 3.03 – Where a partner accepts public office, he shall withdraw from the firm and his name shall be dropped from the firm name unless the law allows him to practice law concurrently.

Rule 3.04 – A lawyer shall not pay or give anything of value to representatives of the mass media in anticipation of, or in return for, publicity to attract legal business.

  • It is unethical to use the name of a foreign firm.
  • Death of a partner does not extinguish attorney-client relationship with the law firm.
  • Negligence of a member in the law firm is negligence of the firm.

CANON 4 – A lawyer shall participate in the improvement of the legal system by initiating or supporting efforts in law reform and in the administration of justice.

  • Examples: Presenting position papers or resolutions for the introduction of pertinent bills in congress; Petitions with the Supreme Court for the amendment of the Rules of Court.

CANON 5 – A lawyer shall keep abreast of legal developments, participate in continuing legal education programs, support efforts to achieve high standards in law schools as well as in the practical training of students and assist in disseminating information regarding the law and jurisprudence.

Objectives of integration of  the Bar

  • To elevate the standards of the legal profession
  • To improve the administration of justice
  • To enable the Bar to discharge its responsibility more effectively.

The three-fold obligation of a lawyer

  • First, he owes it to himself to continue improving his knowledge of the laws;
  • Second, he owes it to his profession to take an active interest in the maintenance of high standards of legal education;
  • Third, he owes it to the lay public to make the law a part of their social consciousness.

CANON 6 – These canons shall apply to lawyers in government service in the discharge of their official tasks.

  • Public Officials– include elective and appointive officials and employees, permanent or temporary, whether in the career or non-career service, including military and police personnel, whether or not they receive compensation, regardless of amount. (Sec. 3 (b), RA 6713).
  • The law requires the observance of the following norms of conduct by every public official in the discharge and execution of their official duties:
  1. commitment to public interest
  2. professionalism
  3. justness and sincerity
  4. political neutrality
  5. responsiveness to the public
  6. nationalism and patriotism
  7. commitment to democracy
  8. simple living ( 4, RA 6713)

Rule 6.01 – The primary duty of a lawyer engaged in public prosecution is not to convict but to see that justice is done. The suppression of facts or the concealment of witnesses capable of establishing the innocence of the accused is highly reprehensible and is cause of disciplinary action.

Rule 6.02 – A lawyer in the government service shall not use his public position to promote or advance his private interest, nor allow the latter to interfere with his public duties.

Rule 6.03 – A lawyer shall not, after leaving government service, accept engagements or employment in connection with any matter in which he had intervened while in said service.

  • Various ways a government lawyer leaves government service:
  1. retirement
  2. resignation
  3. expiration of the term of office
  4. dismissal
  5. abandonment
  • Q:  What are the pertinent statutory provisions regarding this Rule?

A:   Sec. 3 (d) RA 3019 as amended and Sec. 7 (b), RA 6713

Sec 3.  Corrupt practice of Public Officers.  In addition to acts or omission of public officers already penalized by existing law, the following shall constitute corrupt practice of any public officer and are hereby declared to be unlawful:

(d) accepting or having any member of his family accept employment in a private enterprise which has pending official business with him during the pendency thereof or within one year after termination.

Section 7 (b) of RA 6713 prohibits officials from doing any of the following acts:

  1. own, control, manage or accept employment as officer, employee, consultant, counsel, broker, agent, trustee or nominee in any private enterprise regulated, supervised or licensed by their office unless expressly allowed by law.

These prohibitions shall continue to apply for a period of one (1) year after resignation, retirement, or separation from public office, except in the case of subparagraph (b) (2) above, but the professional concerned cannot practice his profession in connection with any matter before the office he used to be with, in which case the one year prohibition shall likewise apply.

  • Lawyers in the government service are prohibited to engage in the private practice of their profession unless authorized by the constitution or law, provided that such practice will not conflict or tend to conflict with their official functions.
  • Misconduct in office as a public official may be a ground for disciplinary action (if of such character as to affect his qualification as lawyer or to show moral delinquency).
  • Should recommend the acquittal of the accused whose conviction is on appeal, IF he finds no legal basis to sustain the conviction.
  • Includes restriction is representing conflicting interest (e.g. Accepting engagements vs. former employer, PNB)
  • The OSG is not authorized to represent a public official at any state of a criminal case.

Reference: Legal Ethics Reviewer

Estoppel  (Article 1431)

Star InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar Inactive

Estoppel  (Article 1431)

  1. An admission;
  2. Is rendered conclusive
  3. Upon the person making it; and
  4. Cannot be denied or disproved against the person relying thereon

 Concept of Estoppel

Estoppel is a bar which precludes a person from denying or asserting anything to the contrary of that which has, in contemplation of law, been established as the truth, either by the acts of judicial or legislative officers or by his own deed or representation, either expressed or implied.

It concludes the truth in order to prevent fraud and falsehood, and imposes silence on a party only when in conscience and honesty he should not be allowed to speak.

Distinguished from Waiver

A waiver is a voluntary and intentional abandonment or relinquishment of a known right. It carries no implication of fraud. It involves the act or conduct of only one of the parties.

An equitable estoppel may arise, however, even where there is no intention on the part of the person estopped to relinquish any existing right and frequently carries the implication of fraud. It involves the conduct of both parties.

In Lopez v. Ochoa (L- 7955, May 30, 1958), the Supreme Court held that waiver and estoppel are frequently used as convertible terms. The doctrine of waiver belongs to the family of, is of the nature of, is based on, estoppel. The essence of waiver is estoppel and where there is no estoppel, there is no waiver. This is especially true where the waiver relied upon is constructive or implied from the conduct of a party.

 Distinguished from Ratification

In ratification, the party is bound because he intended to be bound; in estoppel, the party is bound notwithstanding the fact that there was no such intention because the other party will be prejudiced and defrauded by his conduct unless the law treats him as legally bound.

 Distinguished from  Fraud

Estoppel exists with or without a contract; fraud presupposes an attempt to enter into a valid agreement or contract.

While estoppel may raised as a defense, fraud may properly be a cause of action on account of the vitiated consent that it produces.

Admissions

A party may be estopped to insist upon a claim, assert an objection, or take a position which is inconsistent with an admission which he had previously made and in reliance upon which the other party has changed his position.

Silence or Inaction

This is sometimes referred to as estoppel by “standing by” or “laches.” Mere innocent silence will not work an estoppel. There must also be some element of turpitude or negligence connected with the silence by which another is misled to his injury. But one who invokes this doctrine of estoppel must show not only unjustified inaction but also some unfair injury would result to him unless the action is held barred.

Estoppel by acquiescence is closely related to estoppel by silence. In the former, a person is prevented from maintaining a position inconsistent with one in which he has acquiesced.

Nature of Laches

Laches is failure or neglect, for an unreasonable and unexplained length of time, to do that which, by exercising due diligence, could or should have been done earlier; it is negligence or omission to assert a right within a reasonable time, warranting a presumption that the party entitled to assert it either has abandoned or declined to assert it.

 Elements of Laches

  1. Conduct on the part of the defendant or of one under whom he claims, giving rise to the situation complained of;
  2. Delay in asserting complainant’s rights after he had knowledge of the defendant’s conduct and after he has had an opportunity to sue;
  3. Lack of knowledge or notice on the part of the defendant that the complainant would assert the right on which he bases his suit;
  4. Injury or prejudice to the defendant in the event relief is accorded to the complainant.

Laches and Prescription Distinguished

PRESCRIPTION

LACHES

Concerned with the fact of delay

Concerned with the fact of delay

A matter of time

Principally a question of inequity founded on some change in the condition of the property or the relation of the parties

Statutory

Not statutory

Applies to law

Applies to equity

Based on a fixed time

Not based on a fixed time

Kinds of Estoppel

1.    Technical Estoppels

  1. Estoppel by record – the preclusion to deny the truth of matters set forth in a record, whether judicial or legislative, and also to deny the facts adjudicated by a court of competent jurisdiction

Example:  the conclusiveness of a judgment on the parties to a case

  1. Estoppel by deed – a bar which precludes one party to a deed and his privies from asserting as against the other party and his privies any right or title in derogation of the deed, or from denying the truth of any material facts asserted in it; a written instrument is necessary for there to be estoppel by deed

Æ    Some doctrines:

  1. If the deed or instrument is null and void because of the contract, there is no estoppel
  2. Ordinarily, the person estopped must be capacitated; but a minor is clever enough to deceive others, estoppel may result
  3. If a person, who is not a party to the instrument, notarizes the same, he is not in estoppel

2.   Equitable Estoppel or Estoppel in Pais

It arises when one by his acts, representations or admissions, or by his silence when he ought to speak out, intentionally or through culpable negligence, induces another to believe certain facts to exist, and such other rightfully relies and acts on such belief, so that he will be prejudiced if the former is permitted to deny the existence of such facts.  It takes place in a situation where because if a party’s action or omission, he is denied the right to plead or prove an otherwise important fact.

This may be estoppel:

  1. by conduct or by acceptance of benefits
  2. by representation or concealment
  3. by silence
  4. by omission
  5. by laches

Æ   Some doctrines:

  1. Conduct because of ignorance or mistake does not result in estoppel
  2. Estoppel by laches bars an action to create a vested right (executory interest) but does not bar an action to protect a vested right (executed interest)
  3. Just because a person is silent does not necessarily mean that he will be in estoppel; there should have been a duty or obligation to speak
  4. A mere promise to perform or to omit at some future time does not necessarily result in estoppel (promissory estoppel); for this to exist, the promise must have been relied upon and prejudice would result unless estoppel is applied

Elements of Estoppel in Pais

In relation to the party sought to be estopped:

  1. Conduct amounting to false representation or concealment of material facts or at least calculated to convey the impression that the facts are otherwise than and consistent with those which the party subsequently attempts to assert;
  2. Intent or at least expectation that this conduct shall be acted upon by at least influence the other party;
  3. Knowledge, actual or constructive, of the real facts

In relation to the party claiming the estoppel:

  1. Lack of knowledge or of the means of knowing the truth as to the facts in question;
  2. Reliance, in good faith, upon the conduct or statement as to the facts in question;
  3. Action or inaction based thereon of such character as to change the position or status of the party claiming the estoppel to his injury, detriment, or prejudice

Estoppel against Owner

When in a contract between third persons concerning immovable property, one of them is misled by a person with respect to the ownership of real right over the real estate, the latter is precluded from asserting his legal title or interest therein, provided all these requisites are present:

  1. There must be fraudulent representation or wrongful concealment of facts known to the party estopped;
  2. The party precluded must intend that the other should act upon the facts as misrepresented;
  3. The party misled must have been unaware of the true facts; and
  4. The party defrauded must have acted in accordance with the misrepresentation.

Æ   An estoppel operates on the parties to the transaction out of which it arises and their privies.

Æ   The government is not estopped by mistake or error on the part of its officials or agents; the erroneous application and enforcement of the law by public officers does not prevent a subsequent correct application of the statute.

Natural Law

  1. Immutable and independent of all human regulations
  2. Includes those rules which are neither written nor promulgated, but are derived from reason and nature

Types of Obligations:

  1. Moral obligations – duties of conscience completely outside the field of law
  2. Natural obligations – not sanctioned by any action but have a relative juridical effect
  3. Civil obligations – juridical obligations which apparently are in conformity with positive law but are contrary to juridical principles and susceptible of being annulled
  4. Mixed obligations – have full juridical effect

Conditions Necessary for Natural Obligation to Arise:

  1. Juridical tie which is not prohibited by law
  2. This tie is not given effect by law

Æ   When a debtor offers a guarantor for his natural obligation, he impliedly accepts the coercive remedies to enforce the guaranty, and therefore, the transformation of the natural obligation into a civil obligation.

 

CRIMINAL PROCEDURE

Star InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar Inactive

CRIMINAL PROCEDURE

Rule 110 PROSECUTION of Offenses

1.  General Rule:  MTC and RTC courts gain jurisdiction over the offense upon the filing of complaint by a complainant or an information by the prosecuting officer

*  Court gains jurisdiction over the person of the accused upon arrest or surrender; such jurisdiction once gained cannot be lost even if accused escapes (Gimenez vs. Nazareno)

*  Jurisdiction of the court over the offense is determined at the time of the institution of the action and is retained even if the penalty for the offense is later lowered or raised (People vs. Lagon)

2.  Complaint – sworn written statement charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the offended party, any peace officer or other public official charged with the enforcement of the law violated

Information – accusation in writing charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the fiscal and filed with the court

3.    Complaint and Information distinguished:

Complaint

Information

A sworn statement

Need not be sworn to

Subscribed by the offended party, any peace officer or other officer charged with the enforcement of the law violated

Subscribed to by the fiscal

May be filed either with the court or in the fiscal’s office generally to commence the preliminary investigation of the charges made

Filed with the court

4.    Cases where civil courts of equal rank are vested with concurrent jurisdiction:

  1. Features stated in Art. 2, RPC

*  Cognizable by proper court in which charge is first filed

  1. Continuing crimes committed in different judicial regions
  2. Offenses wherein any of the essential elements were committed in different territorial jurisdictions
  3. Offenses committed aboard a train, vehicle, aircraft or vessel  (see R110, §15)

i.    Railroad, train, aircraft

(1)  Territory or municipality where vehicle passed

(2)  Place of departure

(3)  Place of arrival

ii.    Vessel

(1) First port of entry

(2) Thru which it passed during voyage

e.  Libel and written defamation

5.   Remedies of offended party when fiscal unreasonably refuses to file an information or include a person therein as an accused

  1. In case of grave abuse of discretion, action formandamus
  2. Lodge a new complaint against the offenders
  3. Take up matter with the Secretary of Justice
  4. Institute administrative charges against the erring fiscal
  5. File criminal charges under Art. 208, RPC (prosecution of offenses)
  6. File civil action under Art. 27, NCC for damages (PO refuses or neglects to perform official duty)
  7. Secure appointment of another fiscal
  8. Institute another criminal action if no double jeopardy is involved

6.  Writs of injunction or prohibition to restrain a criminal prosecution are not available, EXCEPT

  1. To afford adequate protection to constitutional rights of accused
  2. Necessary for the orderly administration of justice or to avoid oppression or multiplicity of actions
  3. Pre-judicial question which is sub judice
  4. Acts of the officer are without or in excess of authority
  5. Prosecution is under an invalid law, ordinance or regulation
  6. Double jeopardy is clearly apparent
  7. Court has no jurisdiction over the case
  8. Case of persecution rather than prosecution
  9. Charges are manifestly false and motivated by lust for vengeance
  10. Clearly no prima faciecase against the accused and MTQ on that ground had been denied

7.    Institution of Criminal Actions:

a.    In RTC:

*  By filing a complaint with the appropriate officer for the purpose of conducting requisite preliminary investigation therein.

b.   In Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts:

*   By filing the complaint or information directly with said courts, or a complaint with the fiscal’s office

c.   In Metropolitan Trial Courts

*  By filing the complaint ONLY with the office of the fiscal

* In all 3 above cases, such institution shall interrupt the period of prescription of the offense charged (Rule 110, §1)

d. Offenses subject to summary procedure

[i.e. (1) violation of traffic laws; (2) violation of rental laws; (3) violation of municipal or city ordinances; and (4) criminal cases where the penalty does not exceed 6 months or fine of P1000 or both, irrespective of other imposable penalties and civil liabilities]

*  The complaint or information shall be filed directly in court without need of a prior preliminary examination or preliminary investigation.

Zaldivia vs. Reyes – since a criminal case covered by the Rules of Summary Procedure shall be deemed commenced only when it is filed in court, then the running of the prescriptive period shall be halted on the date the case is actually filed in court and not on any date before that.

Reodica vs. CA – [clarifies Zaldivia above] Under Art. 91 of the RPC, the period of prescription shall be interrupted by the filing of the complaint or information.  It does not distinguish whether the complaint is filed for preliminary examination or investigation only, or for an action on the merits.   Thus, the filing of the complaint even with the fiscal’s office should suspend the running of the Statute of Limitations. The ruling in Zaldivia is not applicable to all cases subject to the Rules on Summary Procedure, since that particular case involved a violation of an ordinance.  Therefore, the applicable law therein was not Art. 91 of the RPC, but Act No. 3326 (“An Act to Establish Periods of Prescription for Violations Penalized by Special Acts and Municipal Ordinances and to Provide when Prescription Shall Begin to Run”),  §2 of which provides that period of prescription is suspended only when judicial proceedings are instituted against the guilty party.

8.  Contents of information

a.  Name of the accused

*  Information may be amended as to the name of the accused, but such amendment cannot be questioned for the first time on appeal (People vs. Guevarra)

*  Error of name of the offended party: if material to the case, it necessarily affects the identification of the act charged.  Conviction for robbery cannot be sustained if there is a variance between the allegation and the proof as to the ownership of the property stolen.

b.  Designation of offense by statute (or of section/subsection of statute violated)

*  Only one offense charged, EXCEPT where law prescribes a single punishment for various offenses.

*  If facts do not completely allege all the elements of the crime charged, the info may be quashed; however, the prosecution is allowed to amend the info to include the necessary facts (People vs. Purisima)

c.   Acts or omissions complained of constituting the offense

*  Information need only allege facts, not include all the evidence which may be used to prove such facts (Balitaan vs. CFI)

d.   Name of offended party

e.  Approximate time of commission

*  Approximation of time is sufficient; amendment as to time is only a formal amendment; no need to dismiss case (People vs. Molero)

* A significant discrepancy in the time alleged cannot be sustained since such would allow the prosecution to prove an offense distantly removed from the alleged date, thus substantially impairing the rights of the accused to be informed of the charges against him (People vs. Reyes)

f.    Place of commission

* Conviction may be had even if it appears that the crime was committed not at the place alleged, provided that the place of actual commission was within the court’s jurisdiction and accused was not surprised by the variance between the proof and the information

*  Qualifying and inherent aggravating circumstances need to be alleged as they are integral parts of the crime.  If proved, but not alleged, become only generic aggravating circumstances.

9.  Amendment of information and Substitution of information, distinguished

Amendment

Substitution

Involves either formal or substantial changes

Necessarily involves a substantial change

Without leave of court if before plea

Needs leave of court as original information has to be dismissed

Where only as to form, there is no need for another preliminary investigation and retaking of plea of accused

Another preliminary investigation is entailed and accused has to plead anew

Refers to the same offense charged or which necessarily includes or is necessarily included in original charges, hence, substantial amendments to info after plea taken cannot be made over objections of accused for if original info is withdrawn, accused could invoke double jeopardy

Requires or presupposes that new info involves a different offense which does not include or is not included in the original charge, hence, accused cannot claim double jeopardy

10. After plea, amendment only as to matters of form, provided

  1. Leave of court is obtained; and
  2. Amendment is not prejudicial to rights of accused

11. When amendment is only as to form

  1. Neither affects or alters nature of offense charged
  2. Charge does not deprive accused of a fair opportunity to present his defense
  3. Does not involve a change in basic theory of prosecution

12. Exceptions to rule on venue

  1. Felonies in Art. 2, RPC (cognizable by proper court in which charge is first filed)
  2. Continuing offenses
  3. Piracy which is triable anywhere
  4. Libel (residence; or where first published)
  5. In exceptional cases, to ensure fair trial and impartial inquiry

13.  Special cases (who may prosecute)

a.  Adultery and concubinage

*  Only offended spouse can be complainant

*  Both guilty parties must be included in complaint

b.   Crimes against chastity

*  With consent of the offended party, offended spouse, grandparents, guardian, or state as parens patriae, in that order

*  Offended party, even if minor, has right to initiate the prosecution of the case independently of parents, grandparents or guardian, unless she is incompetent/incapable on grounds other than minority.

*  If offended party who is a minor fails to file the complaint, her parents, grandparents or guardian may do so.

*  In crimes against chastity, the consent of the victim is a jurisdictional requirement–retraction renders the information void (People vs. Ocapan)

*  If complexed with a public crime, the provincial fiscal may sign the complaint on his own

c.   Defamation (consisting of imputation of offenses in [a] or [b])

*  Complainant must be offended party

*  The offended party may intervene in the prosecution of the criminal case because of her interest in it (Banal vs. Tadeo)

14. Procedure

  1. Complaint filed in MTC or info filed in RTC where an essential ingredient of the crime took place (territorial jurisdiction)
    1. Amendment as a matter of right before plea
    2. Amendment upon discretion of the court after plea

*  Inclusion of other accused is only a formal amendment which would not be prejudicial to the accused and should be allowed (People vs. CA)

d.   After plea and before judgment, if it appears there was a mistake in charging proper offense, court shall dismiss original info upon the filing of a corrected one, provided that the accused will not be placed in double jeopardy (substitution)

*  Fiscal determines direction of prosecution; complainant must ask fiscal if he wants to dismiss the case; the motion to dismiss must be addressed to the court which has discretion over the disposition of the case (Republic vs. Sunga)

* Objection to the amendment of an information or complaint must be raised at the time the amendment is made; otherwise, deemed to have consented thereto.

15. Remedies

a.   Motion to quash

*  May be filed after arraignment but before plea on the grounds provided by the rules (generally, a flaw in the info)

*  If duplicity of offense charged is not raised in trial through a motion to quash info, the right to question it is waived (People vs. Ocapan)

b.   Motion to dismiss

*  May be filed after plea but before judgment on most of  grounds for motion to quash

16.  Duplicity of Offense (in information or complaint)

*  Defined as the joinder of separate and distinct offenses in one and the same information/complaint

*  Remedy:  file a motion to quash; failure is equivalent to a waiver

*  Exception: when existing laws prescribe a single punishment (complex crimes)

Rule 111  Prosecution of Civil Action

1.   General Rule: The injured party may file a civil action independent of the criminal proceeding to recover damages from the offender.

*  Article 32 is a valid cause of a civil action for damages against public officers who impair the Constitutional rights of citizens (Aberca vs. Ver)

*  Even if the private prosecutor participates in the prosecution, if he is not given the chance to prove damages, the offended party is not barred from filing a separate civil action

2.   Civil action for recovery of civil liability impliedly instituted, EXCEPT

  1. Waiver
  2. Reservation of right to institute separate action
  3. Institution of civil action prior to criminal action

*  NOTE: Under SC Circular 57-97, all criminal actions for violations of BP Blg. 22 shall be deemed to necessarily include the corresponding civil action, and no reservation to file such civil action separately shall be allowed or recognized.

San Ildefonso Lines vs. CA – past pronouncements of the SC that the requirement in Rule 111 that a reservation be made prior to the institution of an independent civil action is an “unauthorized amendment” to substantive law is now no longer controlling.  Far from altering substantive rights, the primary purpose of the reservation requirement is to avoid multiplicity of suits, to prevent delays, to clear congested dockets, to simplify the work of the trial court, and in short, the attainment of justice with the least expense and vexation to parties-litigants.

3.   Civil action suspended when criminal action filed, EXCEPT

  1. Independent civil action (Arts. 32, 33, 34 and 2176 of NCC)
  2. Prejudicial civil action
  3. Civil case consolidated with criminal action
  4. Civil action not one intended to enforce civil liability arising from the offense (g., action for legal separation against a spouse who committed concubinage)

4.  Prejudicial question arises when

  1. The civil action involves an issue similar or intimately related to the issue raised in the criminal action
  2. The resolution of such issue will determine whether the criminal action will proceed or not

*  Requisites for a prejudicial question:

  1. The civil action involves an issue similar or intimately related to the issue raised in the criminal action: and
  2. The resolution of such issue determines whether or not the criminal action may proceed

* Petition for suspension of criminal action is to be filed at any time before prosecution rests.

5.  Remedies

a.   Reservation of right to institute separate civil proceedings to recover civil liability arising from crime

*  Must be made before prosecution presents evidence

*  Action instituted only after final judgment in criminal action

b.   Petition to suspend the criminal action

*  May be filed upon existence of a prejudicial question in a pending civil action

*  Filed at any time before the prosecution rests

6.   Extinction of penal action does not carry with it extinction of the civil unless the extinction proceeds from a declaration in a final judgment that the fact from which the civil might arise did not exist.

*  Final judgment in civil absolving defendant from civil liability not a bar to criminal action

7.    Filing fees:

  1. Actual or compensatory damages – filing fees not required
  2. Moral, temperate and exemplary – filing fees required
  3. If alleged, fees must be paid by offended party upon filing of complaint or information
    1. If not alleged, filing fees considered a first lien on the judgment

Rule 112  Preliminary Investigation

1.   Preliminary investigation – inquiry or proceeding to determine if there is sufficient ground to engender a well-founded belief that a crime cognizable by the RTC has been committed, and that the respondent is probably guilty thereof, and should be held for trial

*  A preliminary investigation is only necessary for an information to be filed with the RTC; complaints may be filed with the MTC without need of an information, which is merely recommendatory (Tandoc vs. Resultan)

*  Absence of a preliminary investigation is NOT a ground for a motion to quash the information; an information filed without a preliminary investigation is defective but not fatal; in its absence, the accused may ask for one; it is the fiscal’s refusal to conduct a preliminary investigation when the accused demands one which is a violation of the rights of the accused (Doromal vs. Sandiganbayan).  Court should not dismiss the info, but hold the case in abeyance and either: (1) conduct its own investigation; or (2) require the fiscal to hold a reinvestigation.

2.   GENERAL RULE:  The fiscal conducts the preliminary investigation before filing an information with the RTC, EXCEPT where the accused is lawfully arrested without a warrant and an inquest is conducted.

3.  Right to Preliminary Investigation

*  A personal right and may be waived

*  Waived by failure to invoke the right prior to or at least at the time of the plea

4.    Who conducts Preliminary Investigation

  1. Provincial or city fiscals and their assistants
  2. Judges of MTC and MCTC
  3. National and regional state prosecutors
  4. Such other officers as may be authorized by law
  5. Duly authorized legal officers of COMELEC
    1. The Ombudsman
    2. The PCGG, in cases of ill-gotten wealth

5.  Procedure

a.   If conducted prior to arrest

i.    Complainant files complaint with

(a)  Provincial or city fiscal

(b)  Regional or state prosecutor

(c)  MTC or MCTC judge, excluding MTC judge of Metro Manila or chartered cities

(d)  Other offices authorized by law

  1. Investigating officer either dismisses complaint or asks by subpoena complainant and respondent to submit affidavits and counter-affidavits
    1. If the investigating officer finds prima facieevidence, he prepares an information and a resolution

*  i.e., if fiscal finds reasonable ground to believe that a crime has been committed and accused is probably guilty thereof

*  Prima facie evidence is that evidence which, standing alone, unexplained and uncontradicted, would be enough to merit a conviction of the accused

iv.  Otherwise, he recommends the dismissal of the complaint

*  If the investigating officer is an MTC judge, and he finds that probable cause exists and that there is a need to place the accused under custody, then he may issue a warrant of arrest

*  Flores vs. Sumaling – What differentiates the present rule from the previous one is that while before, it was mandatory for the investigating judge to issue a warrant for the arrest of the accused if he found probable cause, the rule now is that the investigating judge’s power to order the arrest of the accused is limited to instances in which there is a necessity for placing him in custody “in order not to frustrate the ends of justice.”  It is therefore error for the investigating judge to order the issuance of a warrant of arrest solely on his finding of probable cause, without making any finding of a necessity to place the accused in immediate custody to prevent a frustration of justice.

  1. Investigating officer forwards records to the city fiscal or chief state prosecutor
    1. City fiscal or state prosecutor either dismisses the complaint or files the information in court

*  Decision prevails over decision of the MTC judge

vii. Records will not form records of the case proper

*  Court on its own or on motion may order production of record

b.   If conducted after warrantless arrest

  1. If accused waives Art. 125, RPC and asks for a preliminary investigation, with the assistance of counsel, then the procedure for one prior to arrest is followed
    1. Inquest conducted as follows

(a)  Fiscal determines the validity of the arrest

(b)  Fiscal determines existence of prima facie evidence based on the statements of the complainant, arresting officer and witnesses

(c)  Fiscal either dismisses the complaint and orders the immediate release of the accused, OR prepares and files an information

*  While fiscal has quasi-judicial discretion whether or not to file an information, once it is filed with the court, the court acquires jurisdiction giving it discretion over the disposition of the case and the Sec. of Justice should refrain from entertaining petitions for review or appeals from the decision of fiscal (Crespo vs. Mogul; Velasquez vs. Undersecretary of Justice)

NOTE: Information may be filed by offended party, peace officer or fiscal without preliminary investigation.

6.  Remedies

a.   Motion for preliminary investigation

*  Filed when accused is arrested without warrant

*  Must be with assistance of counsel and after waiving Art. 125, RPC

b.   Motion for preliminary investigation

*  Filed within 5 days after accused learns an information against him has been filed without a preliminary investigation

c.   Motion for re-investigation

d.  Appeal to DOJ

*  Filed upon denial of his motion for a preliminary investigation, on the ground that his rights to due process of law were violated, ousting the court of jurisdiction

e.  Petition for prohibition

*  Filed with appellate court to stop the criminal proceedings

*  Ordinarily, injunction will not lie but may be granted in certain cases

*  When prohibition proper to restrain criminal proceedings:

  1. When strong-arm tactics are used for vindictive purposes (Salonga vs. Cruz-Pano)
  2. When the accused is deprived of his rights
  3. When the statute on which the charge is based is null and void
  4. When it will aid the administration of justice (Tatad vs. Sandiganbayan)
  5. When multiplicity of suits will be avoided (Guingona vs. City Fiscal)

Rule 113  Arrest

1.  Arrest – taking a person into custody in order that he may be bound to answer for the commission of some offense, made by an actual restraint of the person or by his submission to custody

2.    General Rule: No person may be arrested without a warrant.

*  Not all persons detained are arrested; only those detained to answer for an offense.

*  “Invitations” are not arrests and are usually not unconstitutional, but in some cases may be taken as commands (Babst vs. NBI); however, the practice of issuing an “invitation” to a person who is investigated in connection with an offense he is suspected to have committed is considered as placing him under “custodial investigation.”  (RA 7438)

* Warrants of arrest remain valid until arrest is effected, or the warrant is lifted

* Arrest may be made at any time of the day or night

3.  Warrantless arrests by a peace officer or a private person

a.   When person to be arrested is committing, attempting or has committed an offense

b.  When an offense has just been committed and the person making the arrest has personal knowledge that the person to be arrested committed it

*  Warrantless arrest anytime for a continuing offense like rebellion, subversion (Umil vs. Ramos)

* The continuing crime, not the crime finally charged, needs only be the cause of the arrest (Umil vs. Ramos)

c.   When person to be arrested is an escaped detainee (either serving sentence or with case pending)

  1. When a person lawfully arrested escapes
  2. Bondsman, for purpose of surrendering the accused
  3. Accused attempts to leave country without court permission

4.  Procedure

a.   With warrant

  1. Complainant files application with affidavits attached
  2. Judge conducts ex partepreliminary examination to determine probable cause

*  In determining probable cause, judge must:

(1)  Personally examine witness

(2)  Witness must be under oath

(3)  Examination must be reduced to writing (Luna vs. Plaza)

*  In determining probable cause, the judge may rely on findings by responsible officer (Lim vs. Felix)

iii.   Judge issues warrant of arrest

*  If without preliminary examination, considered irregular (Bagcal vs. Villaraza)

iv. If peace officer is unable to serve warrant 10 days after issuance, he must file a report and explanation with judge within 10 days

v.  If warrant served

(1)  Person informed that he is being arrested

(2)  Informed of cause of his arrest

(3)  Officer may break door or window if admission to building is refused

(4) Person physically restrained

*  For private citizens making an arrest

*  May not do so except to do some service to humanity or justice

(5)  No violence or unnecessary force may be used

(6)  Officer may summon assistance

(7)  Person who escapes after arrest may be immediately pursued

vi.        Person arrested is brought to nearest police station or jail

b.   Without warrant:

  1. Person is arrested
    1. Person arrested may waive right to Art. 125, RPC and ask for preliminary investigation or inquest

*  Fiscal is not judicial authority contemplated under Art. 125 (Sayo vs. Chief of Police)

  1. Fiscal files info

5.    Requisites for a warrant of arrest:

  1. Probable cause
  2. Signed by judge
  3. Specifically naming or particularly and sufficiently describing person to be arrested

*  John Doe warrants are void for being general warrants (Pangandaman vs. Cesar)

6.  Remedies

a.   Petition for writ of habeas corpus

*  Filed with any court, to effect immediate release of the person detained

*  Filed when a person is being illegally detained (without judicial process), or was illegally arrested (void warrant or unlawful warrantless arrest, or warrantless arrest beyond period with no information filed)

*  Habeas corpus is not allowed when:

  1. The person is in custody of an officer under process of law, and
  2. The court had jurisdiction to issue the process (Luna vs. Plaza)

*  If an arrest is improper, the remedy is a motion for quashal of the warrant of arrest and/or a motion to quash the information, not habeas corpus (Ilagan vs. Enrile)

*  Habeas corpus is no longer available after an information has been filed, the information being the judicial process required by law (Ilagan vs. Enrile)

*  Habeas corpus is proper when a person is being restrained illegally, e.g., imprisoned past maximum penalty allowed by law (Gumabon vs. Director of Prisons)

b.   Quashal of warrant of arrest

*  Filed with court which issued the warrant of arrest when the warrant of arrest is fatally flawed

c.  Motion to quash information

*  Filed with court when information against the person arrested has been filed

*  Must be made in a “special appearance” before the court questioning only its lack of jurisdiction over the person of the accused

*  Otherwise, the voluntary appearance of the person arrested by filing a motion before the court would be deemed a submission to the authority of the court, thus granting it whatever jurisdiction it lacked over the person

*  Any irregularity in the arrest is cured when the petitioner submits himself to the jurisdiction of the court, e.g., by filing for bail (Bagcal vs. Villaraza)

7.   V.V. Mendoza, “Rights to Counsel in Custodial Investigation”

*  Evolution of rights of the accused under custodial investigation

  1. All involuntary confession were inadmissible; accused had to prove involuntariness
    1. Involuntary confessions were inadmissible only if they were false
    2. Revert to exclusionary rule:  any involuntary confession is inadmissible
      1. Miranda rule:  the accused must be informed of his rights
        1. To remain silent
        2. Against self-incrimination
        3. To counsel
        4. Definition of custodial investigation questioned
          1. It begins only after arrest
          2. Police investigations prior to arrest are not covered
          3. The rights may be waived, but the rights to be informed of these rights, e., to warning, may not be waived
          4. Warning must not only be said, officer must make sure the person arrested understands them specifically
          5. Present rules
            1. Voluntary confessions are admissible
            2. Test of voluntariness determined on a case-to-case basis
            3. Waiver of rights must not only be with counsel but must be in writing

*  Confessions made without assistance of counsel are inadmissible as evidence to incriminate the accused, but they may be used to impeach the credibility of the accused, or they may be treated as verbal admission of the accused through the testimony of the witnesses (People vs. Molas)

Rule 114  Bail

1.  Bail – security given for the release of a person in custody of law, furnished by him or a bondsman, conditioned upon his appearance before any court as required under the following conditions:

  1. Undertaking effective upon approval and remains in force at all stages until promulgation of judgment, unless sooner cancelled
  2. Accused shall appear before court when required
  3. Failure to appear despite notice to him or the bondsman will waive his right to be present and trial shall proceed in absentia
  4. Bondsman shall surrender accused for execution of judgment

*  Bail applies to all persons detained, not just to those charged with the offense (Herras vs. Teehankee)

*  Court has power to prohibit person out on bail from leaving the country (Manotoc, Jr. vs. CA)

*  Bail implies delivery of the accused to the sureties who, though not holding him prisoner, may seize him and imprison him until they can deliver him to court (US vs. Bonoan)

2.  General Rule: All persons are entitled to bail as a matter of right, except those charged with capital offenses.

*  Right to bail traditionally unavailable to military personnel facing court martial, who are not in the same class as civilians (Comendador vs. de Villa)

*  Bail should be available regardless of other circumstances or the merits of the case, if the health or the life of the detainee is in danger (Dela Rama vs. People’s Court)

*  Excessive bail is tantamount to denial of bail, which is unconstitutional (Dela Camara vs. Enage)

3.  When bail is a matter of right

*  Before or after conviction by MTC, MCTC, MJC

*  Before conviction by the RTC of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetuaor life imprisonment

4.    When bail is discretionary (application filed with court where case is pending)

  1. Upon conviction by RTC of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetuaor life imprisonment
  2. Provisional liberty under same circs. but during period to appeal subject to consent of bondsman
  3. In case he has applied for probation after final judgment, he may be allowed temporary liberty under his bail or recognizance

5.  Procedure

a.    Offense charged is not capital:

i.    Accused applies for bail

(1)  Where information against him was filed or where case is pending

(2)  Absent (1), in another branch of the same court within the province or city where he is held

(3)  If arrested in another province, city or municipality, file with the RTC

(4)  Absent (3), with the MTC

  1. Judge sets bail
    1. Accused may move to reduce bail, and hearing will be set
    2. Accused posts bail and deposits the same with the Municipal/City/Provincial Treasurer or, if cash, with the Collector of Internal Revenue
    3. Accused is released

b.   Offense charged is capital:

  1. Accused petitions for bail
  2. Judge sets hearing to determine whether evidence of guilt is strong

*  Ex-parte hearing on bail is arbitrary and unacceptable (Herras vs. Teehankee)

  1. Prosecution presents evidence
    1. Court may not force fiscal to produce evidence (Herras vs. Teehankee)
    2. If evidence is strong, bail is denied
      1. Otherwise, judge sets bail and procedure for non-capital offense is followed

*  In capital crimes, judge’s discretion is limited to determining strength of evidence and does not cover determining whether bail should be allowed (Herras vs. Teehankee)

* Evidence must be strong that the accused is guilty of the capital offense charged, not just of any offense (Bernardez vs. Valera)

6.    Bail bond –   an obligation under seal given by accused with one or more sureties and made payable to proper officer with the condition to be void upon performance by the accused of such acts as he may legally be required to perform

7.  Recognizance

  1. Obligation of record entered into before some court of magistrate duly authorized to take it, with the condition to do some particular act, the most usual condition in criminal cases being the appearance of the accused for trial
  2. Does not require signature of accused for trial
  3. Does not require signature of accused to be valid

8.  Prosecution witnesses may be required to post bail to ensure their appearance at the trial, except:

  1. Substitution of info (see R110, §14)
  2. Court believes that material witness may not appear at the trial

9.  When bail required under RA 6036  (violation of ordinance, light felony, criminal offense – not higher that 6 month imprisonment and/or P2000 fine, or both)

  1. Caught in flagrante
  2. Confessed to commission of offense unless repudiated (force and intimidation)
  3. Previously escaped, evaded sentence or jumped bail
  4. Violation of Sec. 2 (fails to report to clerk of court periodically under his recognizance)
  5. Recidivist, habitual delinquent previously convicted for an offense to which the law or ordinance attaches an equal or greater penalty or for 2 or more offenses to which it attaches a lighter penalty
  6. Committed offense while on parole or under conditional pardon
  7. Previously pardoned by municipal or city mayor for violation of ordinance for at least 2 times

10.  Instances when accused may be released on recognizance:

  1. Offense charged is a violation of an ordinance, a light felony or criminal offense the imposable penalty to which does not exceed 6 months and or P2000 fine
  2. Person has been in custody for a period equal to or more than the minimum of the imposable principal penalty, without application of the Indeterminate Sentence Law or any modifying circumstance
  3. Accused has applied for probation and before the same has been resolved, but NO BAIL was filed or accused is incapable of filing one
  4. Youthful offender held for physical and mental examination, trial or appeal, if unable to furnish bail

11. Cancellation of bail

a.   Upon application with the court and due notice to the fiscal

  1. Accused surrenders back to custody
    1. Accused dies

b.   Automatic cancellation

  1. Case is dismissed
    1. Accused is acquitted
    2. Accused is convicted and surrenders for execution of judgment

12. When bail cancelled or denied: after RTC imposes imprisonment exceeding 6 years, but not more than 20 years, and:

  1. Accused is a recidivist, quasi-recidivist, habitual delinquent or guilty of the aggravating circumstance of reiteration;
  2. Provisionally escaped, evaded sentence, violated provisions of bail;
  3. Committed offense while on probation, parole, or conditional pardon;
  4. Probability of flight; or
  5. Undue risk that during appeal, he may commit another crime

13. When bail is forfeited

a.   Accused fails to appear before court when required

*  30 days for bondsman to show cause why judgment should not be rendered against him

b.  Bondsman fails to produce him within 30 days

c.  Bondsman fails to satisfactorily explain to the court why accused did not appear when first required to do so

*  Sureties guarantee only appearance of the accused, not his conduct (US vs. Bonoan)

*  Sureties exonerated if appearance made impossible by an act of God, the obligee or the law (US vs. Bonoan)

14. Provisional forfeiture

  1. Within 30 days, produce the body or give reason for non-production AND
  2. Explain satisfactorily the absence of the accused when first required to appear

15. Remedies

  1. Application for bail, when bail can be availed of as a matter of right
  2. Petition for bail, when the offense charged is a capital offense

*  For judge to set hearing for the determination of strength of evidence of guilt

16.  Circumstances to be considered in fixing amount of bail:

  1. Financial ability of accused to give bail;
  2. Nature and circumstances of offense;
  3. Penalty of offense charged;
  4. Character and reputation of accused;
  5. Age and health of accused
  6. Weight of evidence against accused
  7. Probability of accused appearing for trial;
  8. Forfeiture of other bonds;
  9. Fact that accused was a fugitive from justice when arrested; and
  10. Pendency of other cases in which the accused is under bond

17.  Notes:

  1. Posting bail waives the right to question any irregularity attending the arrest of a person (Callanta vs. Villanueva).  However, this does not result in waiver of the inadmissibility of the articles seized incidentally to such illegal arrest.
  2. Accused waived the right to question any irregularity in the conduct of the preliminary investigation when he failed to do so before entering his plea (People vs. Dela Cerna)
  3. Accused out on bail may be re-arrested if he attempts to depart from the Philippines without prior court permission (warrantless arrest allowed).

Rule 115  Rights of Accused

1.  Right of the accused under the Rules

a.  To be presumed innocent until proven guilty beyond reasonable doubt

*  In an appeal from a conviction, the accused shall again be presumed innocent until and unless his conviction is affirmed (Castillo vs. Felix)

b.   To be informed of the nature and cause of charges

*  The right must be substantially complied with; arraignment and later proceedings must be in a language the accused understands (People vs. Crisologo)

c.   To be present at every stage of proceedings, subject to waiver by bail

*  If an accused escapes, he waives this right and merits a trial in absentia;  the accused forfeits his rights to be notified of proceedings in the future and to adduce evidence in his behalf (People vs. Salas)

  1. To testify as witness on his own behalf, subject to cross-examination on matters covered by direct examination; not to be prejudiced by his silence
  2. Not to be compelled to be a witness against himself
  3. To confront and examine the witnesses against him, including the right to use in evidence testimony of a witness
  4. Who is deceased, out of or cannot with due diligence be found in the RP
    1. Given in another proceeding
    2. With the same parties
    3. Same subject matter
    4. Opportunity to cross-examine

*  Prosecution has no privilege to withhold the identity of informers when such informer was crucial in the operation itself; failure to present the informer is a denial of the right to confront the witness which merits the reversal of the conviction (People vs. Bagano)

g.   To have compulsory process to secure witnesses and evidence in his behalf

h.   To have a speedy, impartial and public trial

*  Unreasonable postponements of trial amounts to a denial of the right to a speedy trial, entitling the accused to mandamus to compel dismissal of the case, or to habeas corpus if he is detained

i.    To have the right of appeal

2.  Rights of the accused under the Constitution

a.   To due process

b.   Against self-incrimination

*  Right is limited to testimonies; ocular inspection of the body may be allowed (Villaflor vs. Summers)

*  Being informed of rights means a meaningful transmission of information, without which confession made by the accused is inadmissible (People vs. Nicandro)

*  Confessions obtained through coercion are inadmissible (People vs. Opida)

*  Right against self-incrimination and to counsel do not apply during custodial investigation (People vs. Ayson)

*  During trial, the right against self-incrimination takes the following form:

  1. Accused may refuse to testify
  2. If he testifies, he may refuse to answer those questions which may incriminate him in ANOTHER offense

c.  Against double jeopardy

d.  To be heard by himself and counsel

3.  Double jeopardy

  1. First jeopardy must have attached prior to the first
  2. First jeopardy attached and terminated
  3. Valid complaint or information
    1. Competent court with jurisdiction
    2. Accused had pleaded
    3. Action ended in conviction, acquittal or termination without the consent of the accused

c.       Offense charged in later case is:

  1. Same as that in previous case
    1. Necessarily includes or is included in the previous case
    2. An attempt or frustration of the offense in previous case
      1. An offense lesser than that charged to which the accused pleaded guilty with the consent of the fiscal and the offended party

4.  Exceptions to double jeopardy

  1. The offense was made graver by supervening events
  2. The facts constituting the graver offense were only discovered after the filing of the earlier information

*  No double jeopardy if the new fact which justified the new charge arose only after arraignment and conviction (People vs. City Court)

*  No double jeopardy where the trial was a sham since there was no competent court (Galman vs. Sandiganbayan)

*  No double jeopardy if first case was dismissed with consent of the accused (Caes vs. IAC)

*  There is double jeopardy if a person is charged twice under different penal statutes for the same acts (People vs. Relova)

c.   Plea of guilty to a lesser offense without the consent of the fiscal and the offended party

5.  Remedies

  1. Motion to quash
  2. Motion to dismiss

*  Both filed on the ground of violation of accused’s rights, thereby ousting the court of jurisdiction

6.   NOTES:

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 1

No person shall be deprived of life, liberty or property without due process of law, nor shall any person be denied the equal protection of the laws.

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 14

  1. No person shall be held to answer for a criminal offense without due process of law.
  2. In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall be presumed innocent until the contrary is proved, and shall enjoy the right to be informed of the nature and cause of the accusations against him, to have a speedy, impartial and public trial, to meet the witnesses face to face, and to have compulsory process to secure the attendance of witnesses and the production of evidence in his behalf.

However, after arraignment, trial may proceed notwithstanding the absence of the accused provided that he has been duly notified and that his failure to appear is unjustifiable.

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 16

All persons shall have the right to a speedy disposition of their cases before all judicial, quasi-judicial, or administrative bodies.

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 17

No person shall be compelled to be a witness against himself.

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 21

No person shall be twice put in jeopardy of punishment for the same offense.

If an act is punished by a law or ordinance, conviction or acquittal under either shall constitute a bar to another prosecution for the same act.

Rule 116  Arraignment and Plea

1.  Procedure

  1. Court informs accused of his right to counsel and asks him if he wants one
  2. Court appoints counsel de oficioif accused has none

*  If no such member of the available, any person who is a resident of the province, of good repute for probity and ability to defend accused

c.   Court gives counsel time to confer with accused at least an hour before arraignment

*  Period allowed for counsel de oficio to confer with accused must be substantially complied with; if not, case may be remanded for re-arraignment (People vs. Gonzaga)

  1. Accused given a copy of the information, which is read to him in a language he understands
  2. Accused is asked whether he pleads guilty or not guilty
  3. Accused files a motion to quash or makes plea
  4. Accused personally makes his plea
  5. Plea is entered into record
  6. If accused makes plea of not guilty, counsel has at least 2 days to prepare for trial

People vs. Agbayani – the right for 2 days to prepare must be expressly demanded.  Only when so demanded does denial thereof constitute reversible error and ground for new trial.  Further, such right may be waived, expressly or impliedly.

* NOTE, HOWEVER, under SC Circular 38-98 (implementing “Speedy Trial Act of 1997”), accused must be given at least 15 days to prepare for trial, which shall commence within 30 days from receipt of Pre-Trial Order.

j.    Case proceeds to pre-trial, trial or hearing, depending on the plea

*  Statement in the judgment that the accused was arraigned and pleaded is sufficient; the manner of statement of such fact is immaterial (People vs. Cariaga)

2.  Kinds of plea

  1. No plea – a plea of not guilty shall be entered
  2. Conditional plea of guilt – a plea of not guilty shall be entered
  3. Not guilty – case proceeds to trial or pre-trial
  4. Guilty to a lesser offense – if fiscal and offended party consents, conviction under offense charged for purposes of double jeopardy
  5. Info may be amended
    1. Case goes to trial
    2. Even if info is not amended, and even if lesser offense is not included in offense charged, court may still find the accused guilty of that lesser offense

e.   Guilty to a capital offense

*  Court conducts searching inquiry to determine if accused was aware of the charges, of his plea, and its consequences

*  Court requires prosecution to present evidence to prove guilt of accused and determine his degree of culpability, and accused may still establish presence of mitigating circumstances in his favor

f.    Guilty to a non-capital offense

*  Court receives evidence from the parties to determine penalty to impose

* Plea of guilty not necessarily followed by conviction.  Upon receipt of exculpatory evidence (if accused pleaded guilty), trial court should consider the plea withdrawn and in its place, order the plea of not guilty

* Plea of guilty waives only defects which may be taken advantage of by motion to quash or by plea in abatement; cannot cure jurisdictional defects.

3.  Effects

a.   Entry of plea will waive

  1. Right to question illegality of the arrest
  2. Right to question any irregularity in the preliminary investigation
  3. Right to file a motion to quash

b.   Improvident plea of guilty may be changed to not guilty any time before judgment is rendered

c.   A plea of not guilty may not be changed to guilty, as doing so would only spare the prosecution of presenting evidence and still result in the conviction of the accused.

4.  Remedies

a.   Motion for specification

*  May be filed any time before plea, even after a MTQ

*  Filed when the information is insufficient in form or is generally worded, that a Bill of Particulars is necessary to clarify the acts for which the accused is being charged

b.  Motion to quash

*  May be filed at anytime before plea is entered

*  Based on grounds provided by the rules

c.   Motion to suspend arraignment

*  Filed when the accused seems mentally unsound or if there is a prejudicial question in a pending civil case

d.   Motion to withdraw an improvident plea of guilt

*  May be filed at any time before judgment of conviction becomes final, when it can be shown that the accused was not aware of the significance of pleading guilty to the charges

Rule 117  Motion to Quash

1.     Motion to quash –   a hypothetical admission that even if all the facts alleged were true, the accused still cannot be convicted due to other reasons

2.  When to file Motion to Quash

General Rule:  Before entering plea; all grounds not raised deemed waived

Exception:  The following grounds may be used in MTQ even after plea

  1. No offense charged
  2. Lack of jurisdiction over the offense charged
  3. Extinction of the offense or of the penalty
  4. Double jeopardy

3.  Grounds

a.   Information does not conform to prescribed form

*  For the info to charge a complex crime, it is not necessary that it be defined by law, only that it alleges that one offense was necessary to commit the other (People vs. Alagao)

b.   Court has no jurisdiction

  1. No territorial jurisdiction
  2. No jurisdiction  over  offense  charged  may  be  raised  at  any  time; no waiver considered even upon failure to move to quash on such ground
  3. No jurisdiction over person of the accused

*  The court gained jurisdiction over the person of the accused when he voluntarily appeared for the pre-suspension hearing (Layosa vs. Rodriguez)

c.   Accused would be put in double jeopardy

*  Bars another prosecution

*  No waiver

*  No double jeopardy if first case was dismissed with the consent of the accused (Que vs. Cosico), unless ground for dismissal is: (a) denial of right to speedy trial; or (b) insufficiency of evidence.

*  If the first case was dismissed due to a deficient information, then there was no valid information and there could be no double jeopardy (Caniza vs. People)

*  Cudia vs CA – it should be the Provincial Prosecutor of Pampanga, not the City Prosecutor, who should prepare informations for offenses committed within Pampanga but outside Angeles City.  An information must be prepared and presented by the prosecuting attorney or someone authorized by law.  If not, the court does not acquire jurisdiction.  Although failure to file a motion to quash the information is a waiver of all objections to it insofar as formal objections to pleadings are concerned, questions relating to want of jurisdiction may be raised at any stage of the proceedings.  Moreover, since the complaint or information was insufficient because it was so defective in form or substance that conviction upon it could not have been sustained, its dismissal without the consent of the accused cannot be pleaded as prior jeopardy, and will not be a bar to a second prosecution.

d.   More than one offense was charged, EXCEPT where law prescribes single punishment for various offenses

e.   Facts alleged do not constitute an offense

*  May be raised at any time

*  No waiver

*  For charge to be complete, it is necessary to state that it was exempted from any amnesty existing at the time

f.    Criminal action or liability has been extinguished

g.   Information contains allegations which, if true, would be a legal excuse or justification

h.   Officer who filed the information had no authority

*  Presentation of evidence cannot cure an invalid information (People vs. Asuncion)

NOTE:  Court will consider no other grounds other than those raised, EXCEPT lack of jurisdiction over offense charged.

4.  Requisites of Double jeopardy

a.  Valid information or complaint, sufficient in form and substance

b.   Before court of competent jurisdiction

*  Doctrine of “Jurisdiction by Estoppel”: depends upon whether the lower court actually had jurisdiction or not. If it had no jurisdiction, but the case was tried and decided upon the theory that it had jurisdiction, the parties are not barred on appeal, from assailing such jurisdiction, for the same ‘must exist as a matter of law, and may not be conferred by consent of the parties or by estoppel’.  However, if the lower court had jurisdiction, and the case was heard and decided upon a given theory, such, for instance, as that the court had no jurisdiction, the party who induced it to adopt such theory will not be permitted, on appeal, to assume an inconsistent position — that the lower court had jurisdiction. Here, the principle of estoppel applies. The rule that jurisdiction is conferred by law, and does not depend upon the will of the parties, has no bearing thereon.

c.   Accused had pleaded

d.   Conviction, acquittal, or dismissal or termination of case without consent of accused

e.   Bar to offense charged, attempt to commit the same or necessarily includes or is necessarily included

* Conviction for physical injuries through reckless imprudence constitutes double jeopardy to the charge of damage to property through reckless imprudence.

5.  Procedure

  1. MTQ filed
  2. If based on defect in info which can be cured, court shall order its amendment
  3. Quashing the info shall NOT be a bar to subsequent prosecution (accused has not pleaded yet), EXCEPT when the ground is:
    1. Double jeopardy OR
    2. Extinction of criminal liability

6.  Remedies

  1. Motion to dismiss – if certain grounds were not raised or denied in a MTQ
  2. Trial

*  If there was really no basis for the info, then such could be proved in the trial

*  Upon denial of a MTQ, the proper remedy is to go on trial and later to appeal, if necessary; mandamus or certiorari will only be granted if there is not other plain, simple and adequate remedy

7.  Failure to move to quash or to allege any ground therefor deemed a waiver of such grounds, except:

  1. Failure to charge an offense
  2. Lack of jurisdiction over the offense charged
  3. Extinction of the offense or of the penalty
  4. Double jeopardy

Rule 118  Pre-Trial

1.  Plea bargaining –   process whereby the accused and the prosecution in a criminal case work out a mutually satisfactory disposition of the case subject to court approval.  It usually involves the defendant’s pleading guilty to a lesser offense or to only some of the counts of a multi-count indictment in return for a lighter sentence than that for the greater charge.

*  Under “Speedy Trial Act of 1997”, in all criminal cases cognizable by the MTC, MCTC, MeTC, RTC and Sandiganbayan, pretrial is mandatory.

*  Under SC Circular 38-98, implementing the “Speedy Trial Act of 1997”, an accused may plea guilty to a lesser offense only if said offense is necessarily included in the offense charged.

2.  Stipulation of facts

*  Facts which both parties and respective counsels agree on as evidenced by their signatures; these facts need not be proved by evidence in trial

*  Stipulation is inadmissible if unsigned by either accused or counsel; a later memo of confirmation, signed only by counsel, cannot cure defect (Fule vs. CA)

3.  Pre-trial order – binds the parties, limits the trial to matters not yet disposed of, and controls the course of action during the trial

4.  Procedure

  1. Judge must calendar pre-trial
  2. Either party may waive the pre-trial
  3. If court appoints counsel de oficio, counsel has at least 2 days to prepare
  4. In the pre-trial conference
  5. Plea bargaining
  6. Stipulation of facts
  7. Marking of evidence (does not imply conceding to its admissibility or credibility)
  8. Waiver of objections to admissibility of evidence
  9. Other matters which will promote a fair and expeditious trial

e.   Judge issues pre-trial order

Rule 119  Trial

1.  In trial, the defense tries

  1. To assail the admissibility of evidence which prove the elements of the offense charged
  2. To assail the credibility of such evidence
  3. To prove another version, possibly admitting certain evidence of the prosecution and adding other evidence to cast reasonable doubt

*  Even in summary procedure, the judge cannot base his decision simply on affidavits; he must give the defendant the chance to cross-examine (Combate vs. San Jose)

2.  Procedure

a.   Parties notified of date of trial 2 days before trial date (R119, §1)

* HOWEVER, under SC Circular 38-98, accused must be given at least 15 days to prepare for trial, which shall commence within 30 days from receipt of Pre-Trial Order.

  1. Accused may move that his witnesses be examined
  2. Defense witnesses examined by any judge or lawyer
  3. Prosecution witnesses, if they would be unable to attend trial, may be examined by the judge handling the case
  4. Trial continues from day to day, unless postponed for a just cause
  5. Prosecution presents evidence

*  Presentation

*  Testimonies: direct examination

*  Cross-examination

*  Re-cross

*  Offer

  1. Accused may move for discharge
  2. Prosecution rests
  3. Defense may, with or without leave of court, file a demurrer to evidence
  4. Defense presents evidence
  5. Defense rests
  6. Prosecution presents rebuttal evidence
  7. Defense presents rebuttal evidence
  8. Trial is closed; case is submitted for judgment

3.  When mistake made in charging proper offense

  1. If Accused cannot be convicted of offense charged or offense necessarily included therein
  2. Accused detained, not discharged
  3. Original case dismissed upon filing of proper information

*  Example: Charged with theft.  At trial, appears that offense is estafa.  The prosecution can ask for the dismissal of the info in order to file a new one for estafa.  No Double Jeopardy because no valid info in the first case.

4.  Application for examination of witnesses for accused before trial

  1. Sick or infirm; unable to attend trial
  2. Resides more than 100 km. from means of trial; no means to attend

5.    Application (prosecution)

  1. Sick or infirm
  2. Has to leave the RP with indefinite date of returning

6.  Requisites for postponement due to absence of a witness

  1. Witness is really material and appears to the court to be so
  2. Party who applies for postponement has not been guilty of neglect
  3. Witness can be had at the time to which the trial has been deferred
  4. No similar evidence could be obtained

7.  Requisites to discharge of an accused as State Witness

  1. Testimony of accused absolutely needed
  2. No other direct evidence available EXCEPT his testimony
  3. Testimony can be corroborated on material points
  4. Accused does not appear to be most guilty
  5. Accused has never been convicted of offense involving moral turpitude

*  Discharge of accused, when not all the requisites were met, cannot be revoked as long as he testified according to what was expected of him (People vs. Aninon)

8.  Remedies

a.   Motion for separate trials

*  Filed by the fiscal to try several accused separately

*  Granted at the court’s discretion

*  May also be ordered by the court motu proprio

b.   Motion to consolidate

*  Upon the court’s discretion, separate charges may be tried in one single case if the offenses charged arise form the same facts or form part of a series of similar offenses

*  Court allowed consolidation of rape cases substantially committed in the same manner (People vs. David)

c.   Motion for continuance – filed to postpone trial for just cause

d.   Motion to exclude public

*  Excluding parties, counsels and court personnel

*  May also be ordered by court motu proprio

e.  Motion for discharge

*  Filed before the prosecution rests

*  Hearing to determine existence of requisites for discharge

*  Prosecution will present evidence and the sworn statement of the proposed state witness

*  Evidence adduced in this said hearing automatically form part of trial; however, if court denies motion for discharge, his sworn statement shall be inadmissible in evidence.

*  Discharge of the accused has the effect of acquittal, unless accused fails or refuses to testify against his co-accused in accordance with his statement (which formed the basis for his discharge)

f.    Demurrer to evidence

*  May be made after the prosecution rests its case

*  If the court finds the prosecution’s evidence insufficient, the case will be dismissed

*  Otherwise, if demurrer denied

  1. If the demurrer was made with leave of court, defense gets to present evidence
  2. If the demurrer was made without leave of court, defense is deemed to have waived the right to present evidence and the case is submitted for judgment

*  Case may also be dismissed motu proprio

g.   Motion to reopen

*  Filed after the case is submitted for judgment but before judgment is actually rendered

*  To allow either side to present additional evidence, if such could not be found before

*  Granted on discretion of the judge

*  The accused cannot move to reopen the case to allow him to adduce evidence in his behalf when his failure to adduce them during the trial was his own fault (People vs. Cruz)

Rule 120  Judgment

1.  Judgment – adjudication by the court that the accused is guilty or not guilty of the offense charged, and the imposition of the proper penalty and civil liability provided by law on the accused

2.  General Rule:  If the accused is found not guilty, he will be acquitted and the acquittal immediately becomes final and executory.  If the accused is found guilty, penalty and civil liability will be imposed on him.

3.  Accused may be convicted of

  1. The offense charged
  2. A lesser offense necessarily included in the offense charged

*  Accused cannot be convicted for an offense graver than that charged (People vs. Guevarra)

4.  Contents

  1. Written in official language
  2. Personally prepared and signed by the judge
  3. Contains facts proved
  4. Contains law upon which judgment is based

*  In case of conviction, judgment must state:

  1. Legal qualification of offense and aggravating and mitigating circumstances
  2. Level of participation
  3. Penalty imposed
  4. Civil liability for damages, unless right to separate civil action has been reserved

*  In case of acquittal, judgment must state:

  1. Civil liability for damages, unless acts alleged clearly did not exist
  2. Basis of liability

5.  Procedure

  1. Judge reads judgment in presence of accused
  2. If judgment is of acquittal
  3. It becomes final and executory
  4. It bars subsequent prosecution for the same offense

c.   If judgment is of conviction, remedy is to file:

  1. Motion for reconsideration
  2. Motion for new trial
  3. Notice of appeal

*  Or else, judgment becomes final and is entered in the book of Judgments

6.    When judgment in a criminal case becomes final:

  1. After lapse of period for perfecting an appeal; or
  2. When sentence partially or totally satisfied or served; or
  3. Accused has expressly waived in writing his right to appeal, EXCEPT in cases of automatic review where death penalty is imposed
  4. Accused has applied for probation

7.   Only a judgment in conviction can be modified or set aside

  1. Before judgment had been final (otherwise double jeopardy);
  2. Before appeal had been perfected; or
  3. To correct clerical errors in the judgment

8.  Remedies

a.   Appeal

*  Filed within 15 days of promulgation of judgment

*  Period is interrupted by filing of a motion for new trial or reconsideration

*  On motion of accused or at its own instance with consent of the accused

b.   Motion for reconsideration

*  Filed when there are errors of law or fact in the judgment

*  Shall require no further proceedings

*  Notice should be given to the fiscal

c.  Motion for new trial

*  Notice should be given to the fiscal

*  Filed on the following grounds:

  1. Error of law or irregularities have been made during trial which are prejudicial to the substantial rights of the accused

ii. New evidence has been found which could not have been found before and which could change the judgment

9.  Procedure for new trial

  1. Hearing shall be set and held
  2. All evidence not alleged to be in error shall stand
  3. New evidence will be introduced
  4. Old judgment may be set aside and a new one rendered

10. Notes:

Suspension of sentence for youthful offenders – after conviction, minor is committed to custody and care of DSWD or any training institution until reaches 21 years of age, or a shorter period

Probation –   disposition under which a defendant after conviction and sentences, is released subject to conditions imposed by the court and to the supervision of a probation officer

Parole – the conditional release of an offender from a penal or correctional institution after he has served the minimum period of his prison sentence under the continued custody of the state and under conditions that permit his reincarceration if he violated the conditions of his release

Rule 121  New Trial or Reconsideration

1.  Reopening of the case

  1. Made by the court before judgment is rendered in the exercise of sound discretion
  2. Does not require consent of accused
  3. May be made at the instance of either party who can thereafter present additional evidence

2.  Motion for new trial

  1. Filed after judgment is rendered but before the finality thereof
  2. At the instance or with the consent of the accused
  3. The prosecution can move only for the reconsideration of the judgment but cannot present additional evidence

3.    Motion for New Trial is denied if:

  1. Only impeaching evidence is sought to be introduced as the court had already passed upon issue of credibility
  2. Only corroborative evidence is offered
  3. Prisoner admits commission of crime with which accused is charged (facility with which such confession can be obtained and fabricated)
  4. Alleged new evidence is inherently improbable and could easily be concocted
  5. Alleged new evidence consists of recantations of prosecution witness, due to unreliability of such recantations, EXCEPT if no other evidence to sustain conviction aside from recanted testimony

4.  New Trial vs. Reconsideration

*  Motion for recon is based on the grounds of errors of law in the judgment is court is not asked to reopen the case for further proceedings, but to reconsider its findings or conclusions of law and make them conformable to the law applicable to the case on the judgment the court has to render anew.

5.   New Trial vs. Modification of Judgment

*  In New Trial, irregularities are expunged from the record and/or new evidence is introduced.  In modification of judgment, no new hearings or proceedings of any kind or change in the record or evidence.  A simple modification is made on the basis of what is on the record.

6.   New Trial vs. Reopening of the Case

*  New trial presupposes that existence of a judgment to be set aside upon the granting of a new trial

*  In reopening, no judgment has yet been rendered, although the hearing may have already been closed

7.  Motion for Reconsideration

*  Grounds are errors of law or fact in judgment, which require no further proceedings.

8.  Effects of Granting Motion for New Trial or Reconsideration

a.   Based on error of law or irregularities during trial:

*  Proceedings and evidence not affected by irregularities stand, and those affected are set aside.  Court may allow introduction of new evidence

b.   Based on newly discovered evidence:

* Evidence already taken shall stand; new evidence taken with the old

Rule 122  Appeal

1.  Procedure

a.   Filed with RTC, if original case was with MTC

*  Notice served to lower court and to adverse party

b.   Filed with the CA or SC, if original case was with RTC

i.    With CA: notice of appeal with court, and with copy on adverse party

*  If CA is of opinion that penalty should be reclusion perpetua or higher, it shall render judgment imposing said penalty, but refrain from entering judgment and then certify the case and the entire record thereof to the SC for review (R124, §13)

*  CA may reverse, affirm, or modify judgment of RTC, or remand case for new trial or re-trial, or dismiss the case

*  If RTC decided case in appellate jurisdiction:  Petition for Review

ii.    With SC: notice of appeal where penalty imposed is life imprisonment, or lesser penalty involving offenses committed on the same occasion, or arising out of same occurrence where graver penalty of death is available but life imprisonment is imposed; all other cases, by petition for review on certiorari

*  If death penalty, automatic review

iii.   Withdrawal of appeal

*  May be made at any time before judgment on the appeal is rendered

*  Lower court judgment becomes final

*  Case remanded for execution of judgment

* Once notice of appeal is filed, cannot be validly withdrawn to give way for a Motion for Recon or a Motion for New Trial, since the filing of the notice perfected the appeal, and the trial court loses its power to modify or set aside the judgment.  The only valid withdrawal of an appeal is where the accused decides to serve his sentence.

2.  Effect of appeal by any of several accused

  1. Shall not affect those who did not appeal, EXCEPT if favorable and applicable to them
  2. Civil appeal by offended party shall not affect criminal aspect of judgment
  3. Execution of judgment on appellant will be stayed upon perfection of appeal

3.  When appeal by prosecution from order of dismissal of criminal case will not result in double jeopardy

  1. Dismissal made upon motion or with express consent of the accused
  2. Dismissal  is  not  an  acquittal nor based upon consideration of the evidence or merits of the case
  3. Question to be passed upon by the appellate court is purely legal so that if the dismissal is found incorrect, the case has to be remanded to the court of origin to determine the guilt or innocence of the accused

4.  When serving sentence, remedy is to petition for habeas corpus

  1. Filed when the law under which the accused was convicted is repealed or declared unconstitutional
  2. When a later judgment is rendered acquitting others for similar circumstances

*  Otherwise, equal protection is violated

  1. When penalty is lowered and convict has already served more than the maximum period of the new penalty

*  Habeas corpus is available when a person is imprisoned beyond the maximum penalty imposed by law (Gumabon vs. Dir. of Prisons)

NOTE: When dismissal is capricious, certiorari lies and no double jeopardy since validity and not correctness of dismissal is being challenged.

Rule 126  Search and Seizure

1.   Search warrant – an order in writing issued in the name of the People of the Philippines, signed by a judge and directed to a peace officer, commanding him to search for personal property described therein and bring it before the court

*  Cannot be issued to look for evidence (Uy Khetin vs. Villareal)

*  Seizing objects to be used as evidence is equivalent to forcing one to be a witness against himself (Uy Khetin vs. Villareal)

*  For a warrant to be valid, it must meet the requirements set by law (Burgos vs. Chief of Staff)

*  Tapping conversations is equivalent to a search and seizure (US vs. Katz)

2. General Rule: No search or seizure can be conducted unless it is authorized by a search warrant. Evidence gathered from an illegal search and seizure is inadmissible.

*  Warrantless searches are illegal, unreasonable and unconstitutional (Alvarez vs. CFI)

*  It is not the police action which is impermissible, but the procedure and unreasonable character by which it is exercised (Guazon vs. de Villa)

*  Court gains jurisdiction over items seized by a valid search warrant and returned to it, and such is not an unconstitutional deprivation of property (Villanueva vs. Querubin)

*  Evidence from an illegal search may be used as evidence, if no objection is raised (Stonehill vs. Diokno)

*  Right against unreasonable search and seizure may be waived, but for the waiver to be effective:

  1. The right must exist
  2. Person must be aware of the right
  3. Person clearly shows the intent to relinquish such right

*  No waiver against unreasonable search and seizure when one compromises the criminal proceedings (Alvarez vs. CFI)

*  There is no waiver of right when evidence of coercion is present (Roan vs. Gonzales)

3.  Requisites of a valid search warrant

a.   Issued upon probable cause

*  Probable cause – such facts and circumstances which would lead a reasonably prudent man to believe that a crime has been committed and the thing to be searched for and seized is in the place to be searched

b.   Probable cause is personally determined by the issuing judge

*  Hence, signed by him

*  By any RTC, to be served anywhere in the country, for an offense which occurred anywhere in the country (Malaloan vs. CA)

c.   Issuing judge personally examined, in the form of searching questions, the appellant and his witness and took down their written depositions

d.   Search warrant particularly describes or identifies the property to be seized

*  Property which men may lawfully possess may not be the object of a search warrant (Uy Khetin vs. Villareal)

*  Nature of goods may allow description to be general or not too technical (Alvarez vs. CFI)

e.   Particularly describes the place to be searched

f.    It shall issue only for one specific offense

*  Otherwise, cannot be said to have issued upon probable cause (Asian Surety vs. Herrera)

*  Absence of specific offense makes impossible determination of probable cause (Stonehill vs. Diokno)

g.   Was not issued for more than 10 days prior to a search made pursuant thereto (search warrant becomes void after 10 days)

h.   Indicates time, if to be served at night

4.  When a search warrant may be said to particularly describe the thing to be seized

  1. Description is as specific as circumstances allow
  2. Expresses a conclusion of fact by which the warrant officer may be guided
  3. Things described are limited to those which bear a direct relation to the offense for which the warrant is issued

5.  Procedure

a.   Complainant files application, attaches affidavits

*  Oath requires that the person taking it personally knows the facts of the case (People vs. Sy Juco)

*  Affidavits submitted must state that the premises is occupied by the person against whom the warrant is issued, that the objects to be seized are fruits or means of committing a crime, and that they belong to the same person, thus, not affecting third persons (People vs. Sy Juco)

*  When complainant’s knowledge is hearsay, affidavits of witnesses are necessary (Alvarez vs. CFI)

b.   Judge conducts ex parte preliminary examination of complainant and witnesses under oath to determine probable cause

*  Judge must ask probing questions, not just repeat facts in the affidavit (Roan vs. Gonzales)

c.   Judge issues search warrant good for 10 days

d.   Peace officer in presence of occupant, members of the family OR 2 witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality

*  Search may last for more than a day as long as it is part of the same search for the same purpose and of the same place (Uy Khetin vs. Villareal)

e.   Peace officer leaves receipt with occupant at place searched

f.    Peace officer files return of search warrant and inventory, and surrenders items seized to receiving court (not necessarily court which issued the warrant)

*  Items seized illegally must remain in custodia legis pending resolution of the case (Roan vs. Gonzales)

6.  Remedies from an unlawful search

  1. MTQ the warrant
  2. Motion to suppress as evidence the objects illegally taken
  3. Return of property illegally seized

7.  When a search may be validly conducted without a warrant

  1. Without consent of person searched
  2. When the search is incident to a lawful arrest
  3. Personal knowledge of the arresting person (Posadas vs. CA)
  4. Limited to:

(1)  Immediate time of arrest

(2)  Immediate vicinity of the arrest

(3)  Weapons and things which may be used as proof of offense charged (Nolasco vs. Pano)

iii.   Subject in an offense which is mala prohibita cannot be summarily seized (Roan vs. Gonzales)

iv.  May extend beyond arrestee to include premises and surrounding under his immediate control

  1. Border searches (customs, mail and airport)
  2. Vessels and aircrafts for violation of Tariff and Customs Code, EXCEPT dwelling houses
  3. Plain view
  4. Moving vehicle
  5. Hot pursuit
  6. Stop-and-frisk, reasonable check-points
  7. Private searches with no state action (People vs. Marti)
  8. Inspection of building and premises for enforcement of fire, sanitary and building regulations

8.  Person making the arrest may take from the arrestee

  1. Properties used in the commission of the crime
  2. Fruits or proceeds thereof
  3. Property which may furnish the arrestee with a weapon against the arresting person
  4. Property which may be used as evidence at the trial

9.   NOTES:

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 2

The right of the people to be secure in their persons, papers, houses and effects against unreasonable searches and seizures of whatever nature and for any purpose shall be inviolable, and no search warrant or warrant of arrest shall issue except upon probable cause to be determined personally by the judge after examination under oath or affirmation of the complainant and the witnesses he may produce, and particularly describing the place to be searched and the persons or things to be seized.

*   Constitution, Art. III, Sec. 3

  1. The privacy of communication and correspondence shall be inviolable except upon lawful order of the court, or when public safety or order requires otherwise as prescribed by law.
  2. Any evidence obtained in violation of this or the preceding section shall be inadmissible for any purpose in the proceeding.

Rule 127  Provisional Remedies in Criminal Cases

1.   Attachment as provisional remedy in criminal cases

  1. Accused is about to abscond from RP
  2. Criminal action is based on a claim for money or property embezzled or fraudulently misapplied or converted to the use of the accused who is a public officer, or any officer of a corporation, or an attorney, factor, broker, agent or clerk in a fiduciary capacity, in willful violation of duty
  3. Accused has concealed, removed or disposed of his property, or is about to do so
  4. Accused resides outside the RP

Reference:

Remedial Law (Criminal Procedure) Memory Aid

Ateneo Central Bar Operations 2001

 

 

Criminal Procedure Memory Aid – Annex A

 

Salient changes in the Revised Rules on Criminal Procedure

Rule 110   Prosecution of Offenses

  1. The institution of all criminal actions, including cases governed by the Rule on Summary Procedure, shall now be the same.
    1. Preliminary investigation is now required for an offense punishable by imprisonment of at least 4 years, 2 months and 1 day.

* Except lawful warrantless arrests provided for under Section 7.

* Thus, preliminary investigation is required for all offenses cognizable by the RTC and for some cases cognizable by the MTC.

3.   The institution of the criminal action shall interrupt the running of the prescriptive period of the offense except for offenses punishable by special laws.

*  This is in accordance with the ruling in Zaldivia vs. Reyes, which stated that the Rules of Court cannot amend special laws, and under Act no. 3326**, the prescriptive period for violation of special laws and municipal ordinances was interrupted only upon the filing of the complaint or information in court.

  1. Qualifying and aggravating circumstances is now required to be alleged in the complaint or information.

*  The failure to specifically allege either circumstance, even if proved, cannot be taken into account.

  1. Rape is removed from the list of private offenses since it is now classified as a crime against persons under R.A. 8353.
  2. Any amendment before plea, which
    1. Downgrades the nature of the offense charged in the complaint or information OR
    2. Excludes any accused from the complaint or information

*  can only be made upon motion by the prosecutor, with

  1. Notice to the offended party AND

ii.   With leave of court

*  The court shall state its reasons in resolving the motion and copies of its order shall be furnished all parties, especially the offended party.

*  This amendment is intended to prevent the prosecution from abusing the process of amendment before plea by dropping any of the accused from the information or reducing the offense charged, whether the accused had been arraigned or not and whether it was due to a reinvestigation of the fiscal or a review by the Secretary of Justice (Crespo vs. Mogul).

Rule 111  Prosecution of Civil Action

1.   Only the civil liability arising from the offense charged is deemed instituted (not merely“impliedly”) with the criminal unless the offended party:

  1. Waives the civil action
  2. Reserves his right to institute it separately OR
  3. Institutes the civil action prior to the criminal action.

2.   The independent civil actions under Articles 32, 33, 34 and 2176 are no longer deemed or impliedly instituted with the criminal action or considered as waived

*        Even if there is no reservation.

*        They may proceed independently of the criminal action and shall require only a preponderance of evidence.

3.   The reservation applies only to the civil liability arising from the offense charged.

*        The employer may not longer be held civilly liable for quasi-delict in the criminal action as ruled in Maniago vs. Court of Appeals since quasi-delict is not deemed instituted with the criminal.

*        If at all, the only civil liability of the employer in the criminal action would be hissubsidiary liability under the Revised Penal Code.

4.   The present rule has also done away with third-party complaints and counterclaims in criminal actions.  These claims must have to be ventilated in a separate civil action.

*        Thus, even if a counterclaim or cross-claim of the accused arises out of or is connected with the transaction or occurrence which is the subject matter of the offended party’s claim, it is NOT compulsory.

5.   The extinction of the civil liability refers exclusively to civil liability arising from crime;

*        Whereas, the civil liability for the same act considered as quasi-delict only and not as a crime is not extinguished even by a declaration in the criminal case that the criminal act charged has not happened or has not been committed by the accused.

*        Both actions may proceed separately, the only limitation is the prohibition to recover damages twice based on the same act or omission.

6.   Except for civil actions provided for in Articles 32, 33, 34 and 2176 of the Civil Code, the civil action which has been reserved cannot be instituted until final judgment has been rendered in the criminal action.

*        The action contemplated herein is a civil action arising from a crime if reserved or filed separately and if a criminal case is filed, it has to be suspended.

*        During the pendency of the criminal action, the period of prescription of the civil action which cannot be instituted separately or whose proceeding has been suspended shall not run.

7.   The death of the accused after arraignment and during the pendency of the criminal action shall extinguish the civil liability arising from the delict.

*        This rule would only apply if any of the civil actions under section 3 is consolidated with the criminal action, otherwise, since the actions under section 3 are purely civil actions, the effects of death of a party are to be governed by the Rules on Civil Procedure.

8.   A prejudicial question is limited to a “previously instituted civil action” in order to minimize possible abuses by the subsequent filing of a civil action as an after thought for the purpose of suspending the criminal action.

Rule 112  Preliminary Investigation

  1. Preliminary investigation now includes offenses punishable by at least 4 years, 2 months and 1 day, even if the same is cognizable by the Municipal Trial Court.
  2. The complaint should be accompanied by affidavits of the complainant and his witnesses as well as other supporting papers relied upon by the complainant to establish probable cause.
  3. A motion to dismiss is now a prohibited pleading during preliminary investigation.
  4. The respondent is now required to submit counter-affidavits and other supporting documents relied upon by him for his defense.
  5. The respondent now has the right to examine the evidence submitted by the complainant of which he may not have been furnished and to obtain copies thereof at his expense.

*        If the records are voluminous, the complainant may be required to identify those which he intends to present to support his charge and these shall be made available for examination, copying or photographing by respondent at his expense.

  1. The prosecutor is required to resolve the complaint based on the evidence presented by the complainant, in the event that:
    1. The respondent cannot be subpoenaed OR
    2. The respondent, if subpoenaed, does not submit a counter-affidavit within the 10-day period.
    3. The clarificatory hearing shall only to limited to facts and issues which the investigating officer believes need to be clarified.

*        The clarificatory hearing shall be held within 10 days from:

  1. The submission of the counter-affidavit and other documents, OR
  2. The expiration of the period for their submission.

*        The clarificatory hearing shall be terminated within 5 days.

  1. After the clarificatory hearing:

*        The investigation shall be deemed concluded AND

*        The hearing officer shall determine whether there is sufficient ground to hold the respondent for trial upon the evidence adduced, within 10 days.

  1. Whether the recommendation of the investigating officer is to file or dismiss the case, he shall, within 5 days from his resolution, forward the records to:
    1. The provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor
    2. The ombudsman or his deputy, for offenses cognizable by the Sandiganbayan in the exercise of its original jurisdiction

*        Who shall taken appropriate action within 10 days from receipt and immediately inform the parties of said action.

  1. A party has the right to appeal to the Secretary of Justice and require that the parties be notified of the recommendation of the action to be taken therefrom.
  2. The judge must determine the existence of probable cause within 10 days from the filing of the information.

* If the accused has already been arrested, the judge must determine within 10 days the existence of probable cause and issue an order of commitment.

* The judge may disregard the prosecutor’s report and require the submission of additional evidence to determine the existence of provable case.  If he still finds no probable cause, he shall dismiss the case.

  1. Two types of offenses may be filed in the Municipal Trial Court for preliminary investigation:
    1. A case is cognizable by the RTC may be filed with the MTC for preliminary investigation.
    2. Even if it is cognizable by the MTC because it is an offense where the penalty prescribed by law is at least 4 years, 2 months and 1 day without regard to the fine.

*        The MTC is authorized in either case to issue a warrant of arrest if there is necessity of placing the respondent under immediate custody, in order not to frustrate the ends of justice.

  1. Outline on Issuance of Warrants of Arrest by Municipal Trial Judge
    1. During preliminary investigation

*  Searching questions and answers is mandatory.

  1. In exercise of its original jurisdiction, distinguish:
    1. Cases which require Preliminary Investigation even if it falls within its original jurisdiction

* After searching questions and answers, determine probable cause and necessity of placing accused in custody in order not to frustrate the ends of justice.

  1. Cases investigated by MTC but remanded by the prosecutor

*  The necessity rule inapplicable

iii.  No warrants:

(1)   If one already issued OR

(2)   The complaint or information filed under Section 7 (order of detention must be issued) OR

(3)   Offenses punishable by fine.

  1. Cases which do not require preliminary investigation
    1. Evaluate evidence OR

ii.   Conduct searching questions or answers or require additional evidence.

  1. No warrants
    1. If the judge is satisfied that there is no necessity for placing the accused under custody (issues summons instead)

ii.   Cases under the Revised Rules on Summary Procedure (no warrants except for failure to appear)

iii.  Rule on necessity

*        It is only in the issuance of warrants of arrest during preliminary investigation and in cases which do not require preliminary investigation, that the Municipal Trial Judge is called upon to apply the principle of necessity.  The principle does not apply to cases remanded by the Prosecutor.

  1. In case a person is arrested without a warrant, a complaint or information may only be filed after an inquest conducted in accordance with existing rules.

* Provided that in the absence or unavailability of an inquest prosecutor, the complaint may be filed by the offended party or a peace officer directly with the proper court on the basis of the affidavit of the offended party or arresting officer or person.

  1. Before the filing of a complaint or information, the person arrested without a warrant may ask for a preliminary investigation by a proper officer, but he must sign a waiver of the provisions of Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code.

*  The waiver may be made only in the presence of his counsel pursuant to R.A. no. 7438.

*  In case the case has been filed in court without a preliminary investigation, the accused may, within 5 days from the time he learns of its filing, ask for a preliminary investigation with the same right to adduce evidence in his defense.

*  The request for preliminary investigation must be made before plea, otherwise the right to ask for a preliminary investigation shall be deemed waived.

  1. The court must evaluate the resolution of the investigating prosecutor and the supporting evidence adduced during the preliminary investigation, and such evidence must be included in filing the information.
  2. Issuance of warrants of arrest by the MTC for actions filed in the exercise of its original jurisdiction provides for two distinct situations:  Case may be filed
    1. Directly in the MTC OR
    2. By the prosecutor in Metro Manila or other chartered cities.
    3. If complaint is filed with the prosecutor for offenses which do not require a preliminary investigation, the procedure is as follows:
      1. The complaint shall state the known address of the respondent
      2. Accompanied by:
        1. Affidavits of the complainant and his witness AND
        2. Other supporting documents relied upon by the complainant to establish probable cause
        3. Affidavits must be sworn before any prosecutor, state prosecutor or government official authorized to administer oath, or a notary public (in their absence or unavailability)
        4. The prosecutor,  al., must certify that he personally examined the affiants and that he is satisfied that they voluntarily executed and understood their affidavits.
        5. The prosecutor shall take appropriate action based on the affidavits and other supporting documents submitted by the complainant within 10 days from its filing.

*        He may either dismiss the case or file it in court

  1. If complaint is filed directly with the MTC for an offense punishable by less than 4 years, 6 months and 1 day, the procedure is similar to (18).

*        The judge should then personally examine in writing and under oath the complainant.

  1. No warrant of arrest shall issue for cases covered by the Revised Rules on Summary Procedure.

Rule 113  Arrest

  1. Instances of valid warrantless arrests:
    1. When, in his presence, the person to be arrested has committed, is actually committing, or is attempting to commit an offense;
    2. When an offense has just been committed and he has probable cause to believe based on personal knowledge of facts or circumstances that the person to be arrested has committed it; AND
    3. When the person to be arrested is a prisoner who has escaped from a penal establishment or place where he is serving final judgment or is temporarily confined while his case is pending, or has escaped while being transferred from one confinement to another.
    4. 1(b) removed the requirement that an offense must have in fact been committed and clarified that probable cause to believe based on personal knowledge of “facts and circumstances” that the person to be arrested has committed it would be sufficient to justify a warrantless arrest for an offense that has just been committed.
    5. Indubitable existence of a crime is not necessary to justify a warrantless arrest and that ‘personal knowledge of facts’ in arrests without warrant must be based uponprobable cause,which means an actual belief or reasonable grounds of suspicion.

* The grounds of suspicion are reasonable when, in the absence of actual belief of the arresting officers, the suspicion that the person to be arrested is probably guilty of committing the offense, is based on actual facts, i.e., supported by circumstances sufficiently strong in themselves to create the probable cause of guilt of the person to be arrested.

* A reasonable suspicion therefore must be founded on probable cause, coupled “with good faith on the part of the peace officers making the arrest.”

Rule 114  Bail

  1. Bail is a matter of right
    1. Before or after conviction by the MTC AND
    2. Before conviction by the RTC of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment
    3. Bail is a matter of discretion after conviction by the RTC of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment.
    4. Photos taken ‘recently’ means photos taken within the last six months.
    5. The application for bail may be filed and acted upon by the trial court despite the filing of a notice of appeal, provided it has not transmitted the original record to the appellate court.

* However, if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed with and resolved by the appellate court.

Æ   This provision modified the ruling in Obosa vs. Court of Appeals in the sense that except for decisions which changed the nature of an offense from bailable to non-bailable cases, the trial court may still act on the application of bail even if a notice of appeal have been filed.

Æ   Even if there is no notice of appeal if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed with and resolved by the appellate court.

5.   Bail may be filed with:

  1. The court where the case is pending OR
  2. Another judge of the same court within the province or city

*  In the absence or unavailability of the judge thereof.

6.   When the presence of the accused is required by the court or these Rules, his bondsmen shall be notified to produce him before the court on a given date and time.

7.   An application for bail by the accused shall NOT be considered as a waiver of his right to challenge the legality of his arrest or the absence of a preliminary investigation.

*  Provided such objections are raised before plea.

Rule 116  Arraignment and Plea

  1. When the accused pleads guilty but presents exculpatory evidence, his plea shall be deemed withdrawn and a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him.

*        This refers to a situation where an accused pleads guilty but invokes the mitigating circumstance of incomplete self-defense under Article 13, paragraph 1 of the Revised Penal Code as amended.

Æ   If the accused, after being allowed to present evidence, however adduces proof, not only to establish incomplete self-defense, but that he acted with complete legal justification, his earlier plea of guilty shall be deemed withdrawn and a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him.

  1. While R.A. No. 8493 or the Speedy Trial Act provides that the accused shall be arraigned within 30 days from the time a court acquires jurisdiction over his person, Rule 116, §1(e) provides for a shorter time within which an accused who is under preventive detention should be arraigned.

* Where an accused is detained, his case should be raffled within 3 days from the filing of the information or complaint against him, and the judge to whom his case is raffled shall have him arraigned within 10 days from receipt by the judge of the records of the case.

* The pre-trial conference shall be held within 10 days after the arraignment.

  1. The consent of boththe prosecutor and the offended party is required before an accused may be allowed by the court to plead guilty to a lesser offense.

*        The conviction for the lower offense would not give rise to double jeopardy if the plead of guilty for the lower offense was without the consent of the offended party.

  1. The presence of the offended party is now required at the arraignment and also to discuss the matter of accused’s civil liability.

*        In case the offended party fails to appear despite due notice, the trial court may allow the accused to plead guilty to a lower offense with solely the conformity of the trial prosecutor.

  1. The arraignment shall be held within 30 days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused.

* Unless a shorter period is provided by special law or Supreme Court circular.

* The time of the pendency of a motion to quash or for a bill of particulars or other causes justifying suspension of the arraignment shall be excluded in computing the period.

  1. Certain laws and SC Circulars provide for a shorter time within which the accused should be arraigned:
    1. Republic Act no. 4908

*  In criminal cases where the complainant is about to depart form the Philippines with no definite date of return, the accused should be arraigned without delay and his trial should commence within 3 days from the arraignment and that no postponement of the initial hearing should be granted except on the ground of illness on the part of the accused or other grounds beyond the control of the court.

  1. Republic Act no. 7610 or the Child Abuse Act

*  The trial of cases falling under said law shall be commenced within 3 days from arraignment.

  1. Dangerous Drugs Law
  2. Cases falling under the SC Admin Order No. 104-96, e.,heinous crimes, violations of the Intellectual Property Rights Law

*  These cases must be tried continuously until terminated within 60 days from commencement of the trial and to be decided within 30 days from the submission of the case.

  1. A plea of guilty to a lesser offense may be allowed only if the lesser offense is necessarily included in the offense charged.

*  Consent of the prosecutor and offended party must be obtained.

  1. A counsel de oficio who is appointed to defend the accused at the arraignment is given a reasonable time to consult with the accused as to his plea before proceeding with the arraignment.

Rule 117  Motion to Quash

  1. Grounds for motion to quash a complaint or information:
    1. The facts charged do not constitute an offense
    2. The court has no jurisdiction over the offense charged
    3. The court has no jurisdiction over the person of the accused
    4. The officer who filed the information had no authority to do so
    5. It does not conform substantially to the prescribed form
    6. More than one offense is charged

*  Except when a single punishment for various offenses is prescribed by law.

  1. The criminal action or liability has been extinguished
  2. It contains averments which, if true, would constitute a legal excuse or justification AND
  3. The accused has been previously convicted or acquitted of the offense charged, or the case against him was dismissed or otherwise terminated without his express consent.
  4. Conviction of an accused shall not be a bar to another prosecution for an offense which necessarily includes the offense charged in the former complaint or information under the following instances:
    1. The graver offense developed due to supervening facts arising from the same act or omission constituting the former charge
    2. The facts constituting the graver charge became known or were discovered only after a plea was entered in the former complaint or information OR
    3. The plea of guilty to the lesser offense was made without the consent of the prosecutor and of the offended party except as provided in §1(f) of Rule 116.
    4. A case may not be provisionally dismissed without:
      1. The express consent of the accused AND
      2. Notice to the offended party
      3. The provisional dismissal of offenses punishable by imprisonment not exceeding 6 years shall become final after 1 year from the issuance of the order without the case being revived.
      4. The provisional dismissal of offenses punishable by imprisonment exceeding 6 years shall become permanent 2 years from the issuance of the order without the case having been revived.

Rule 118  Pre-Trial

1.  In all criminal cases cognizable by the (1) Sandiganbayan, (2) Regional Trial Court, (3) Metropolitan Trial Courts, (4) Municipal Trial Court in Cities, (5) Municipal Trial Court and (6) Municipal Circuit Trial Court

*  The court shall order a pre-trial conference (this must be held within 30 days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused, unless a shorter period is provided for in special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court)

2.   The following shall be considered during the pre-trial conference:

  1. Plea bargaining
  2. Stipulation of facts
  3. Marking for identification of evidence of the parties
  4. Waiver of objections to admissibility of evidence
  5. Modification of the order of trial if the accused admits the charge but interposes a lawful defense; AND
  6. Such matters as will promote a fair and expeditious trial of the criminal and civil aspects of the case

3.   All agreements or admissions made or entered during the pre-trial conference shall be:

  1. Reduced to writing and
  2. Signed by the accused and counsel

* Otherwise, they cannot be used against the accused.

* The agreements covering the matters referred to in section 1 of this Rule shall be approved by the court.

4.   If the counsel for the accused or the prosecutor does not appear at the pre-trial conference and does not offer an acceptable excuse for his lack of cooperation

*  The court may impose proper sanction or penalties.

Rule 119  Trial

1.   After a plea of not guilty is entered

*  The accused shall have at least 15 days to prepare for trial

2.   The trial shall commence within 30 days from receipt of the pre-trial order.

3.   Other laws, rules and regulations prescribe speedy trial for a shorter period for other offenses:

  1. Criminal cases covered by the Rule on Summary Procedure or where the penalty prescribed by law does not exceed 6 months imprisonment, or a fine of P1,000 or both, irrespective of other imposable penalties

*  Governed by Rule 123

  1. A. No. 4908, An Act Requiring Judges of Courts to Speedily Try Criminal Cases Wherein the Offended Party is a Person About to Depart from the Philippines with No Definite Date of Return

*  Requires such cases to take precedence over all other cases before our courts except election and habeas corpus cases

*  The trial in these cases shall commence within 3 days from the date the accused is arraigned and no postponement of the initial hearing shall be granted except on the ground of illness on the part of the accused, or other grounds beyond the control of the accused

  1. Speedy Trial of Child Abuse cases

*  The trial of child abuse cases shall take precedence over all other cases before our courts except election and habeas corpus cases

*  The trial in these cases shall commence within 3 days from the date the accused is arraigned and no postponement of the initial hearing shall be granted except on account of the illness of the accused or other grounds beyond his control (Sec. 21, Rules and Regulations on the Reporting and Investigation of Child Abuse cases issued pursuant to Sec. 32 of R.A. No. 1610, The Child Abuse Act)

  1. Violations of the Dangerous Drugs Law
  2. Under Administrative Order No. 104-96

4.   Trial once commenced

*  Shall continue from day to day as far as practicable until terminated

*  May be postponed for a reasonable period of time for good cause

5.   After consultation with the prosecutor and defense counsel

*  The court shall set the case for continuous trial on a weekly or other short term trial calendar at the earliest possible time so as to ensure speedy trial

6.   In no case shall the entire trial period exceed 180 days from the first day of trial, except as otherwise authorized by the Supreme Court.

7.   The time limitations provided under this section and the preceding section shall not apply where special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court provide for a shorter period of trial.

8.   The following periods of delay shall be excluded in computing the time within which trial must commence:

a.   Any period of delay resulting from other proceedings concerning the accused, including but not limited to the following:

  1. Delay resulting from an examination of the physical and mental condition of the accused;
  2. Delay resulting from proceedings with respect to other criminal charges against the accused;
  3. Delay resulting from extraordinary remedies against interlocutory orders;
  4. Delay resulting from pre-trial proceedings; provided, that the delay does not exceed 30 days;
  5. Delay resulting from order of inhibition, or proceedings relating to change of venue of cases or transfer from other courts;
  6. Delay resulting from a finding of the existence of a prejudicial question; and
  7. Delay reasonably attributable to any period, not to exceed 30 days, during which any proceeding concerning the accused is actually under advisement.

b.   Any period of delay resulting from the absence or unavailability of an essential witness. (An essential witness shall be considered absent when his whereabouts are unknown or his whereabouts cannot be determined by due diligence. He shall be considered unavailable whenever his whereabouts are known but his presence for trial cannot be obtained by due diligence.)

  1. Any period of delay resulting from the mental incompetence or physical inability of the accused to stand trial.
  2. If the information is dismissed upon motion of the prosecution and thereafter a charge is filed against the accused for the same offense

*  Any period of delay from the date the charge was dismissed to the date the time limitation would commence to run as to the subsequent charge had there been no previous charge

  1. A reasonable period of delay when the accused is joined for trial with a co-accused over whom the court has not acquired jurisdiction; or, as to whom the time for trial has not run and no motion for separate trial has been granted.
  2. Any period of delay resulting from a continuance granted by any court motu proprio, or on motion of either the accused or his counsel, or the prosecution, if the court granted the continuance on the basis of its findings set forth in the order that the ends of justice served by taking such action outweigh the best interest of the public and the accused in a speedy trial.

9.   The following factors, among others, shall be considered by a court in determining whether to grant continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule.

  1. Whether or not the failure to grant a continuance in the proceeding would likely make a continuation of such proceeding impossible or result in a miscarriage of justice; and
  2. Whether or not the case taken as a whole is so novel, unusual and complex, due to the number of accused or the nature of the prosecution, or that it is unreasonable to expect adequate preparation within the periods of time established therein

10.       No continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule shall be granted because of

  1. Congestion of the court’s calendar or
  2. Lack of diligent preparation or
  3. Failure to obtain available witnesses on the part of the prosecutor

11. The general rule is that motions for postponement are granted only upon meritorious grounds and no party has the right to assume that his motion will be granted. The grant or denial of a motion for postponement is addressed to the sound discretion of the court. Unless grave abuse of discretion is shown, such discretion will not be interfered with either by mandamus or appeal.

12. If the accused is to be tried again pursuant to an order for a new trial

*  The trial shall commence within 30 days from notice of the order (provided that if the period becomes impractical due to unavailability of witnesses and other factors, the court may extend it but not to exceed 180 days from notice of said order for a new trial

13. Notwithstanding the provisions of section 1(g), Rule 116 and the preceding section 1, for the first twelve-calendar-month period following its effectivity on September 15, 1998

*  The time limit with respect to the period from arraignment to trial imposed by said provision shall be 180 days. For the second twelve-month period, the time limit shall be 120 days, and for the third twelve-month period, the time limit shall be 80 days.

14. If the public attorney assigned to defend a person charged with a crime knows that the latter is preventively detained, either because he

  1. Is charged with a bailable crime but has no means to post bail, or
  2. Is charged with a non-bailable crime, or
  3. Is serving a term of imprisonment in any penal institution

*  It shall be his duty to do the following:

  1. Shall promptly undertake to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial or cause a notice to be served on the person having custody of the prisoner requiring such person to so advise the prisoner of his right to demand trial.
  2. Upon receipt of that notice, the custodian of the prisoner shall promptly advise the prisoner of the charge and of his right to demand trial. If at anytime thereafter the prisoner informs his custodian that he demands such trial, the latter shall cause notice to that effect to be sent promptly to the public attorney.
  3. Upon receipt of such notice, the public attorney shall promptly seek to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial.
  4. When the custodian of the prisoner receives from the public attorney a properly supported request for the availability of the prisoner for purposes of trial, the prisoner shall be made available accordingly.

15. In any case in which private counsel for the accused, the public attorney, or the prosecutor:

  1. Knowingly allows the case to be set for trial without disclosing that a necessary witness would be unavailable for trial;
  2. Files a motion solely for delay which he knows is totally frivolous and without merit;
  3. Makes a statement for the purpose of obtaining continuance which he knows to be false and which is material tot he granting of a continuance; or
  4. Willfully fails to proceed to trial without justification consistent with the provisions hereof

*  The court may punish such counsel, attorney, or prosecutor, as follows:

  1. By imposing on a counsel privately retained in connection with the defense of an accused, a fine not exceeding P20,000.
  2. By imposing on any appointed counsel de oficio, public attorney, or prosecutor a fine not exceeding P5,000; and
  3. By denying any defense counsel or prosecutor the right to practice before the court trying the case for a period not exceeding 30 days. The punishment provided for by this section shall be without prejudice to any appropriate criminal action or other sanction authorized under these Rules.

16. If the accused is not brought to trial within the time limit required by section 1(g), Rule 116 and section 1, as extended by section 6 of this Rule

*The information may be dismissed on motion of the accused on the ground of denial of his right to speedy trial

17. The accused shall have the burden of proving the motion but the prosecution shall have the burden of going forward with the evidence to establish the exclusion of time under section 3 of this Rule.

18. The dismissal shall be subject to the rules on double jeopardy.

19. No provision of law on speedy trial and no rule implementing the same shall be interpreted as a bar to any charge of denial of the right to speedy trial guaranteed by section 14(2) , Article III, of the 1987 Constitution.

20. After the prosecution rests its case

*  The court may dismiss the action on the ground of insufficiency of evidence

  1. On its own initiative after giving the prosecution the opportunity to be heard or
  2. Upon demurrer to evidence filed by the accused with or without leave of court

21. If the court denies the demurrer to evidence filed with leave of court

*  The accused may adduce evidence in his defense

22. When the demurrer to evidence is filed without leave of court

*  The accused waive the right to present evidence and submits the case for judgment on the basis of the evidence for the prosecution

23. The motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence

*  Shall specifically state its grounds and shall be filed within a non-extendible period of 5 days after the prosecution rests its case

*  Prosecution may oppose the motion within a non-extendible period of 5 days from its receipt

24. If leave of court is granted

*  The accused shall file the demurrer to evidence within a non-extendible period of 10 days from notice

*  Prosecution may oppose the demurrer to evidence within a similar period from its receipt

25. The order denying the motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence or the demurrer itself

*  Shall not be reviewable by appeal or by certiorari before judgment

26. The present rule liberally deviates from the rigid structures of Rule 119 of the 1985 Rules on Criminal Procedure denying the accused the chance to present evidence by considering a defendant’s motion to dismiss a waiver of his right to present evidence.

27. The current rule allows the accused in a criminal case to present evidence even after a motion to dismiss provided the demurrer was made within the express consent of the court.

28. At any time before finality of the judgment of conviction

*  The judge may, motu proprio or upon motion, with hearing in either case, reopen the proceedings to avoid a miscarriage of justice

*  The proceedings shall be terminated within 30 days from the order granting it.

Rule 120  Judgment

1.   Judgment

*  Adjudication by the court that the accused is guilty or not guilty of the offense charged and the imposition on him of the proper penalty and civil liability, if any

*  Must

  1. Be written in the official language
  2. Personally and directly prepared by the judge and signed by him and
  3. Contain clearly and distinctly a statement of the facts and the law upon which it is based

2.   If the judgment is of conviction

*  It shall state

  1. The legal qualification of the offense constituted by the acts committed by the accused and the aggravating or mitigating circumstances which attended its commission
  2. The participation of the accused in the offense, whether as principal, accomplice, or accessory
  3. The penalty imposed upon the accused and
  4. The civil liability or damages caused by his wrongful act or omission to be recovered from the accused by the offended party, if there is any, unless the enforcement of the civil liability by a separate civil action has been reserved or waived

3.   In case the judgment is of acquittal

*        It shall state whether the evidence of the prosecution absolutely failed to prove the guilt of the accused or merely failed to prove his guilt beyond reasonable doubt ( in either case, the judgment shall determine if the act or omission from which the civil liability might arise did not exist)

4.   The judgment is promulgated by reading it in the presence of the accused and any judge of the court in which it was rendered.

5.   If the conviction is for a light offense

*  The judgment may be pronounced in the presence of his counsel or representative

6.   When the judge is absent or outside the province or city

*  The judgment may be promulgated by the clerk of court

7.   If the accused is confined or detained in another province or city

*  The judgment may be promulgated by the executive judge of the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction over the place of confinement or detention upon request of the court which rendered the judgment

8.   The court promulgating the judgment shall have authority to accept the notice of appeal and to approve the bail bond pending appeal; provided, that if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed and resolved by the appellate court.

9.   The proper clerk of court shall give notice to the accused personally or through his bondsman or warden and counsel, requiring him to be present at the promulgation of the decision.

10. If the accused was tried in absentia because he

  1. Jumped bail or
  2. Escaped from prison

*  The notice to him shall be served at his last known address.

11. In case the accused fails to appear at the scheduled date of promulgation of judgment despite notice

*  The promulgation shall be made by recording the judgment in the criminal docket and serving him a copy thereof at his last known address or thru his counsel

12. If the judgment is for conviction and the failure of the accused to appear was without justifiable cause, he shall

  1. Lose the remedies available in these Rules against the judgment and
  2. The court shall order his arrest

13. However, within 15 days from promulgation of judgment

*  The accused may surrender and file a motion for leave of court to avail of these remedies

*  He shall state the reasons for his absence at the scheduled promulgation and if he proves that his absence was for a justifiable cause, he shall be allowed to avail of said remedies within 15 days from notice

14. Under the former rule, even if the accused fails to appear without justifiable cause, he shall be allowed to appeal within 15 days from notice of the decision to him or his counsel.

15. Under the new rule, if the judgment is of conviction and the failure of the accused to appear was without justifiable cause, he shall lose not only his right to appeal but also other legal remedies against the judgment as well and the court shall order his arrest.

Rule 124  Procedure in the Court of Appeals

1.   The provisions of Rules 42, 44 to 46 and 48 to 56 relating to procedure in the Court of Appeals and in the Supreme Court in original and appealed cases

*  Shall be applied to criminal cases insofar as they are applicable and not inconsistent with the provisions of this Rule

2.   The provisions of Rule 47 of the Rules of Court (Annulment of Judgments of Final Judgment and Resolutions) are no longer applicable in criminal cases. The appropriate remedy for lack of jurisdiction or extrinsic fraud being either:

  1. Certiorari under Rule 65 or
  2. Habeas corpusunder Rule 102

Rule 126  Search and Seizure

1.   An application for search warrant shall be filed with the following:

  1. Any court within whose territorial jurisdiction a crime was committed.
  2. For compelling reasons stated in the application, any court within the judicial region where the crime was committed if the place of the commission of the crime is known, or any court within the judicial region where the warrant shall be enforced.

2.   If the criminal action has already been filed

*  The application shall only be made in the court where the criminal action is pending

3.   Section 2, Rule 126 is new. It fixes the venue in the filing of applications for the issuance of a search warrant.

*  Section 2 modifies the Malaloan guidelines (Malaloan vs. CA) which allow any judge to issue a search warrant prior to the filing of a criminal action, and even if one had already been filed, any judge for compelling reasons may still issue a search warrant.

4.   The officer must forthwith deliver the property seized to the judge who issued the warrant, together with a true inventory thereof duly verified under oath.

5.   10 days after issuance of the search warrant

*        The issuing judge shall ascertain if the return has been made, and if none, shall summon the person to whom the warrant was issued and require him to explain why no return was made

6.   If the return has been made

*        The judge shall

  1. Ascertain whether section 11 of this Rule has been complied with and
  2. Require that the property seized be delivered to him

7.   The return on the search warrant shall be filed and kept by the custodian of the log book on search warrants who shall enter therein the date of the return, the result, and other actions of the judge.

*  A violation of this section shall constitute contempt of court.

8.   A motion to quash a search warrant and/or to suppress evidence obtained thereby

*  May be filed in and acted upon only by the court where the action has been instituted

9.   If no criminal action has been instituted

*  The motion may be filed in and resolved by the court that issued the search warrant (if such court failed to resolve the motion and a criminal case is subsequently filed in another court, the motion shall be resolved by the latter court

10. Section 14 is intended to resolve what is perceived as conflicting decisions on where to file a motion to quash a search warrant or to suppress evidence seized by virtue thereof.

* The following pages are culled from Justice Oscar Herrera’s book on the relevant amendments in the Revised Rules of Criminal Procedure and from Justice Jose Feria’s article in the Lawyer’s Review (February, 2001) on the Notable Amendments in Revised Rules of Criminal Procedure.

** An Act To Establish Periods of Prescription for Violations Penalized By Special Laws and Municipal Ordinances and to Provide When Prescription Shall Begin To Run.

Reference:

Remedial Law (Criminal Procedure)

Memory Aid – Annex A

Ateneo Central Bar Operations

CODE OF COMMERCE

Star InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar InactiveStar Inactive

CODE OF COMMERCE

COMMERCE – branch of human activity; purpose is to bring products to the consumer through operations habitually and with intent of gain

COMMERCIAL LAW – branch of private law which regulates the juridical relations arising from commercial acts

CHARACTERISTICS OF COMMERCIAL LAW:

  1.       universal
  2.       uniform
  3.       equitable
  4.       customary
  5.       progressive

PORTIONS OF CODE OF COMMERCE STILL APPLICABLE:

  1.       merchants; book of merchants and general provision of contracts
  2.       joint account association
  3.       commercial barter
  4.       transfers of non-negotiable credits
  5.       commercial contracts of overland transportation
  6.       letters of credit
  7.       maritime commerce

OTHERS:

  1.       Commerce – bringing products from the manufacturers to the consumers
  2.       Characteristics of Commerce:
    1.       habituality
    2.       rapidity – if period is fixed, debtor in delay without need of demand; if contract does not fix period, 10 days
    3.       intent to join
  3.       Merchant:
    1.       Individuals – legal capacity, 21 years, or subject to parental authority, habitually engaged in commerce
    2.       Juridical Persons – commercial and industrial company organized in accordance with law, habitually engaged in business
  4.       General Rule:  Minors cannot engage in commerce

       Exceptions:

  1.       to continue business of deceased parents through guardian
  2.       court authorizes guardian to place minor and property in business
  3.       minor is an alien and his national law allows him to be a merchant
  4.       Which persons are not allowed to engage in commerce?
    1.       suffering accessory penalty of civil interdiction (reclusion perpetuaandreclusion temporal)
    2.       those judicially declared insolvent until they can obtain their discharge
    3.       prohibited by Constitution and special laws
  5.       Aliens
    1.       capacitated under his national law to engage in business
    2.       engaged in the business in the Philippines not reserved for the Filipinos
    3.       after securing license and BOI certificate
  6.       Family Code:  Either spouse may engage in business; when objected to by the other, court will look into valid grounds, i.e. serious and moral grounds
  7.       BOI Certificate must be obtained by:
    1.       alien
    2.       foreign firm
  8.       Meaning of Philippine National
    1.       citizen
    2.       domestic corporation wholly owned and organized by Filipinos in the Philippines
    3.       Filipino corporation where Filipino capital entitled to vote is at least 60%
  9.   Query:  If a corporation is a shareholder of another corporation, how do you determine whether the latter corporation is a Filipino national?

Answer:  The following must concur -

  1.       At least  60% of the outstanding capital stock and entitled to vote of both corporations are held by citizens of the Philippines
  2.       At least 60% of the Board of Directors of both corporations are Filipinos
  3.   Tenor of BOI Certificate
    1.       Business or activity to be engaged is consistent with the Investment Priorities Plan
    2.       Business will contribute to the sound and balanced development of the national economy in a self-sustaining basis
    3.       Business will not conflict with the Constitution and local laws
    4.       Business is not adequately exploited by Filipino nationals
    5.       No danger of monopolies/combinations in restraint of trade
  4.   Basic Principles/Conditions laid down by BOI
    1.       resident agent of foreign firm is a Filipino citizen
    2.       establishment of office in the Philippines
    3.       bringing assets tot he Philippine office as capital
    4.       complete set of accounting records
  5.   Merger and Consolidation subject to BOI requirements for the issuance of certificate:

When merger and consolidation result in ownership and control of non-Filipino nationals over more than 40% of the capital of a consolidated corporation.

  1.   SEC License issued upon compliance with the following requirements:
    1.       proof of compliance with principle of reciprocity
    2.       BOI certificate
    3.       Applicant for license gives required information

n  articles of incorporation

n  by-laws

n  names and addresses of resident agents

n  principal place of business in the Philippines

  1.       proof of solvency
  2.       deposit acceptable securities to protect future creditors

RETAIL TRADE NATIONALIZATION LAW

(Note: Material on the Retail Trade Liberalization Law will not be included in this reviewer.  Supplement to follow)

  1.       Retail Trade – any act, occupation, or calling of habitually selling direct to the general public, merchandise, commodities, or goods for consumption

Jurisprudence has held that the term “retail” should be associated with and limited to goods for personal, family or household use, consumption and utilization.  The Retail Trade Nationalization Law refers to “consumption goods” or “consumer goods” which directly satisfy human wants and desires and are needed for home and daily life.  Excluded from the law are those goods which are considered generally raw material used in the manufacture of other goods, or if not, as one of the component raw material, or at least as elements utilized in the process of production and manufacturing.

  1.       Elements of What Constitutes Retail Trade:
    1.       The seller habitually engages in selling;
    2.       The sale is direct to the general public; and
    3.       The object of the sale is limited to merchandise, commodities or goods for consumption.
  2.       General Rule: After 1964, only Filipinos or corporations whose capital is 100% Filipino may engage in retail trade.
  3.       Exceptions, that is, instances when aliens may engage in retail trade in the Philippines:
    1.       manufacturer or processor if capital does not exceed P5,000.00;
    2.       farmer or agriculturist when selling his products;
    3.       manufacturer or processor selling to industrial or commercial users or consumers who use the produce to render service to the general public or to produce or manufacture goods which are sold by them to the public;
    4.       hotel owners or keepers of restaurants included or incidental to the hotel business;
    5.       sale by a manufacturer or processor to the Government or its agencies, including government owned and controlled corporations.
  4.       Query:  How to determine citizenship of shares of the corporation when they are not held directly by individuals, but in turn held by another entity?

Answer:  apply the GRANDFATHER RULE, to wit:

Shares belonging to corporations or partnerships at least 60% of the capital of which is owned by Filipino citizens shall be considered as Philippine nationality, but if the percentage of Filipino ownership in the corporation or partnership is less than 60%, only the number of shares corresponding to such percentage shall be counted as of Philippine nationality.  Thus, if 100,000 shares are registered in the name of a corporation or partnership at least 60% of the capital stock or capital respectively, of which belong to Filipino citizens, all of the said shares shall be recorded as owned by Filipinos.  But, if let’s say, 50% of the capital stock belongs to Filipino citizens, only 50,000 shares shall be counted as owned by Filipinos and the other 50,000 shares shall be recorded as belonging to aliens.

However, while a corporation with 60% Filipino and 40% foreign equity ownership is considered a Philippine national for purposes of investment, it is not qualified to invest in or enter into a joint venture agreement with corporations or partnerships, the capital or ownership of which under the Constitution or other special laws are limited to Filipino citizens only.  Hence, for purposes of the law, whatever the percentage of Filipino  ownership in the owning corporation, the foreign ownership would always render a portion of its holding in the company as foreign equity and would disqualify the corporation to engage in retail trade.

ANTI-DUMMY ACT

  1.       The Act penalizes Filipinos who permit aliens to use them as nominees or dummies to enjoy privileges reserved for Filipinos or Filipino corporations.  Criminal sanctions are imposed on the president, manager, board member or persons in charge of the violating entity and causing the latter to forfeit its privileges, rights and franchises.
  2.       Disqualified aliens cannot intervene in the management, operation, administration or control of the business reserved to Filipinos whether as an officer, employee or laborer, with or without remuneration, except when:
    1.       alien takes part in technical aspects;
    2.       provided that no Filipino can do such technical work; and
    3.       with express authority from the President, upon the recommendation of the department head concerned.
  3.       By way of exception, the following may participate in management:
    1.       Aliens may be elected to the Board of Directors to the extent of their allowable share in the capital of the corporation (in partially nationalized industries).
    2.       A registered enterprise may employ foreign nationals in supervisory, technical, and advisory positions for a period of 5 years subject to extension.
    3.       Where majority of stocks of a pioneer enterprise is owned by foreign investors, the following positions may be held by foreign nationals:

n  president

n  treasurer

n  general manager

n  equivalent positions

  1.       A Filipino common-law wife of an alien is not barred from engaging in the retail business provided she uses capital exclusively derived from her paraphernal properties; however, allowing her common-law alien husband to take part in the management of the retail business would be a violation of the law.
  2.       What doing business means:
    1.       soliciting orders, purchases, service contracts;
    2.       opening offices whether called liaison offices or branches;
    3.       appointing representatives or distributors who are domiciled in the Philippines or who in any calendar year stay in the country for a period totaling 180 days or more;
    4.       participating in the management or supervision or control of any domestic firm, entity or corporation in the Philippines;
    5.       any other act or acts that imply continuity in commercial dealings
  3.       When commissioned merchants/investors or commercial brokers act in their own name in selling foreign products, the foreign firm manufacturing these products is not doing business in the Philippines.
  4.       When a local corporation or person acts in the name of a foreign firm, the latter is doing business in the Philippines.
  5.       The following are NOT doing business:
    1.       mere investment as a shareholder by a foreign entity in domestic corporations duly registered to do business;
    2.       exercise of rights as such investor;
    3.       having a nominee director or officer to represent interests in such corporation;
    4.       appointing a representative or distributor domiciled in the Philippines which transacts business in its own name and for its own accounts.
  6.       Purpose:
    1.       to encourage use of and to promote transactions based on trust receipts;
    2.       to regulate the use of trust receipts

TRUST RECEIPTS LAW

  1.       Definition:

A written/printed document signed by the ENTRUSTEE in favor of the ENTRUSTER whereby the latter releases the goods, documents or instruments tot he possession of the former upon the ENTRUSTEE’S promise to hold said goods in trust for the ENTRUSTER, and to sell the goods, etc. WITH THE OBLIGATION TO TURN OVER THE PROCEEDS THEREOF TO THE EXTENT OF WHAT IS OWING TO THE ENTRUSTER; or to return the goods if UNSOLD, or for other purposes.

  1.       Trust receipts are denominated in Philippine currency or acceptable and eligible foreign currency.
  2.       ENTRUSTER is not liable as principal or vendor under any sale or contract to sell made by the ENTRUSTEE.
  3.       Risk of loss is borne by the ENTRUSTEE.
  4.       Pending the duration of the trust agreement, the ENTRUSTER’S security interest cannot be prejudiced by claims of creditors of the ENTRUSTEE.
  5.       Loss of goods pending the dispossession shall not extinguish the obligation to the ENTRUSTER  for the value thereof.

 LETTERS OF CREDIT

  1.       Kinds:
    1.       Commercial Letters of Credit
    2.       Traveler’s Letters of Credit
  2.       No protest required in case of dishonor.
  3.       Issued to definite persons and not to order, thus, non-negotiable.
  4.       Limited to a fixed account.

 PRICE TAGS LAW

  1.       It requires articles of commerce sold at retail to bear prices.

JOINT ACCOUNTS

  1.       It exists when a merchant interests himself in the transaction of another merchant, contributing thereto the amount of capital they may agree upon, and participating in the favorable or unfavorable results thereof in the proportion they may determine.
  2.       Joint accounts do not adopt a firm name.
  3.       No suit may be maintained – investor and third persons dealing with the merchant conducting business.
  4.       It is not subject to any formal requirement for validity; it may be oral.

 BULK SALES LAW

  1.       Purpose: meant to protect creditors of businessmen against preferential or fraudulent transfers
  2.       The law covers all transactions, whether done in good faith or not, or whether or not the seller is in a state of insolvency, that fall within the description of what is a “bulk sale.”
  3.       Types of transactions which are treated as “bulk sales”:
    1.       Sale, transfer, mortgage or assignments of a stock of goods, wares, merchandise, provisions, or materials otherwise than in the ordinary course of trade;
    2.       Sale transfer, mortgage or assignments of all, or substantially all, of the business of the vendor, mortgagor, transferor, or assignor;
    3.       Sale, transfer, mortgage, or assignment of all, or substantially all, of the fixtures and equipment used in the business of the vendor, mortgagor, transferor, or assignor.
  4.       Only creditors at the time of the sale in violation of the law are within the protection of the laws and creditors subsequent to the sale are not covered.
  5.       Even if the transaction falls within the definition of “bulk sale”, the following are not deemed covered by the law:
    1.       If the vendor, mortgagor, transferor or assignor produces and delivers a written waiver of the provisions of the law from his creditors as shown by verified statements;
    2.       The law does not apply to executors, administrators, receivers, assignees in insolvency, or public officers, acting under process.
  6.       Obligations when transaction is a bulk sale:
    1.       The vendor must deliver to such vendee a written statement of:

n  names and addresses of all creditors to whom said vendor or mortgagor may be indebted;

n  amount of indebtedness due or owing to each of said creditors

  1.       The vendor must apply the purchase money to the pro-rata payment of bona fide claims of the creditors as shown in the verified statement.
  2.       The seller, at least 10 days before the sale, shall:

n  make a full detailed inventory of the goods, merchandise, etc., cost price of each article to be included in the sale

n  notify every creditor at least 10 days before transferring possession of the goods, of the price, terms and conditions of the sale

  1.       Consequences of Violation of Requirements under #6 above stated:
    1.       When 6(a) above is not complied with, the sale itself is void; the seller will be criminally liable.
    2.       When 6(b) above is not complied with, the sale itself is also void; seller is also criminally liable.
    3.       When 6(c) is not complied with, the sale is not void; no criminal liability on the seller.

 INSURANCE LAW

  1.       Laws applicable to insurance in the order of priority:
    1.       Insurance Code
    2.       Civil Code
    3.       General Principles prevailing on the subject in the US
  2.       Contract of Insurance – an agreement whereby one undertakes for a consideration to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising from an unknown contingent event.
  3.       Contract of Suretyship – deemed to be an insurance contract within the meaning of the Insurance Code, only if made by a surety who or which, as such, is doing an insurance business
  4.       Definition of “doing an insurance business”:
    1.       making or proposing to make, as insurer, any insurance contract;
    2.       making or proposing to make as a surety, any contract of suretyship as a vocation and not merely incidental to any other legitimate business or activity of the surety;
    3.       doing reinsurance business;
    4.       doing or proposing to do any business in the substance equivalent to any of the foregoing in a manner designed to evade the provisions of the Insurance Code.
  5.       Requisites of Insurance:
    1.       existence of an insurable interest;
    2.       risk of loss;
    3.       assumption of risk;
    4.       scheme to distribute losses; and
    5.       payment of premiums
  • Note:  If only a, b, and c are present, it is not a contract of insurance but a risk shifting device.
  1.       Characteristics of an insurance contract:
    1.       consensual
    2.       voluntary
    3.       aleatory – depends upon some contingent event; however, it is not a wagering nor a gambling contract
    4.       executed as to the insured after payment of the premium
    5.       executory as to insurer – not executed until payment for a loss
    6.         personal – each party takes into account the character, credit and the conduct of the other
    7.       conditional – liability is based on the happening of the event insured against
  2.       Parties to a contract of Insurance:
    1.       insurer – party who assumes the risk or undertakes to indemnify the insured or to pay a certain sum on the happening  of a specified contingency
    2.       insured – person in whose favor the contract is operative, and who is indemnified against, or is to receive a certain sum upon the happening of a specified contingency
    3.       beneficiary – may or may not be the same as the insured
  • What perils may be insured?

(a)    any contingent or unknown event, whether past or future, which may damnify a person having an insurable interest; or

(b)    any contingent or unknown event, whether past or future, which may create a liability against the person insured.

  1.       Every person has an insurable interest in the life and health of:
    1.       himself, his spouse and his children
    2.       any person on whom he depends wholly or in part for education or support, or in whom he has a pecuniary interest
    3.       any person under a legal obligation to him for the payment of money, or respecting property or services, of which death or illness might prevent the performance or delay it
    4.       any person upon whose life any estate or any interest vested in him depends
  2.       Insurable Interest in Property may consist of:
    1.       an existing interest
    2.       an inchoate interest, founded on an existing interest
    3.       an expectancy, coupled with an existing interest out of which the expectancy arises
  • Definition of Insurable Interest in Property: Interest in property, whether real or personal, or any relation thereto, or liability in respect thereof, of such nature that a contemplated peril might directly damnify the insured.
  1.   Instances when Insurable Interest must exist:
    1.       Interest in Property insured must exist when the insurance takes effect and when the loss occurs, but need not exist in the meantime.
    2.       Interest in the Life or Health of a Person Insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, but need not exist thereafter or when the loss occurs.
    3.       Beneficiaries of Life Insurance need not have insurable interest in the life of the insured.
    4.       Beneficiaries of Property Insurance must have insurable interest in the property insured.

Category

Insurable Interest in Life Insurance

Insurable Interest in Property

1.  basis

may be based on pecuniary interest, affinity, or consanguinity

based purely on pecuniary interest

2.  when interest must exist

at the time the policy takes effect EXCEPT:  life insurance taken by the creditor on the life of the debtor wherein interest must also exist at the time of the loss

at the time the policy takes effect and at the time of the loss

3.  amount of insurable interest

no limit EXCEPT:  if insurable interest is based on creditor-debtor relationship (only to the extent of the credit or debt)

limited to the actual value of damage/injury/loss

  1.   General Rule: A change of interest in any part of a thing insured unaccompanied by a corresponding change in interest in the insurance suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent, until the interest in the thing and the interest in the insurance are vested in the same person.

  Exceptions:  a.  In case of life, health, and accident insurance

  1.       when the change in interest results after the occurrence of an injury which results in a loss
  2.       a change of interest in one or more several distinct things, separately insured by one policy
  3.       a change in the interest by will or succession on the death of the insured (interest passes to the heirs)
  4.       a transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners in common who are jointly insured to the others (even though it has been agreed that the insurance shall seize upon the alienation of the thing insured)
  5.   Revocation of Beneficiaries
  • General Rule: Insurance contracts are revocable.
  • Exception: Any person who is forbidden to receive any donation under Article 739 of the Civil Code cannot be named beneficiary of a life insurance policy by the person who cannot make the donation to him.
  • The following donations shall be void:
  1.       those made between persons who were guilty of adultery or concubinage at the time of the donation;
  2.       those made by persons found guilty of the same criminal offense, in consideration thereof;
  3.       those made to a public officer or his wife, descendants, ascendants, by reason of his office.
  • Other Pertinent Provisions on Revocation:

(a)    The termination of a subsequent marriage shall allow the innocent spouse to revoke the designation of the other spouse who acted in bad faith as beneficiary in any insurance policy, even if such designation be stipulated as irrevocable.

(b)    After the finality of the decree of legal separation, the innocent spouse may revoke the donations as well as the designation of the latter as a beneficiary in any insurance policy, even if such designation is irrevocable.  The revocation of or change in the designation shall take effect upon written notification thereof to the insured.  The action to revoke the donation under this article must be brought within 5 years from the time the decree of legal separation has become final.

(c)     The interest of a beneficiary in a life insurance policy shall be forfeited when the beneficiary is the principal, accomplice or accessory in willfully bringing about the death of the insured, in which event, the nearest relative of the insured shall receive the proceeds of said insurance if not otherwise disqualified.

  1.   Suspension – a change of interest in any part of a thing insured unaccompanied by a corresponding change of interest in the insurance suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent until the interest in the thing and the interest in the insurance are vested in the same person.
  2.   Concealment – a neglect to communicate that which the party knows or ought to communicate
  • General Rule:  The insured is not required to communicate the nature (or kind) or the amount of his insurable interest in the life or property insured to the insurer.
  • Exception:  a.  When the insurer makes inquiry from the insured of the nature or amount of the latter’s insurable interest, whether in life or property insurance;
  1.       insurance policy must specify the interest of the insured in the property insured, if he is not the absolute owner thereof.
  • A concealment, whether intentional or not, entitles the injured party to rescind a contract of insurance.
  • Requisites:

(a)    the party concealing must have knowledge of the facts concealed;

(b)    the facts concealed must be material to the risk;

(c)     the party is duty bound to disclose such fact to the other;

(d)    the party concealing makes no warranty as to the facts concealed;

(e)    the other party has no other means of ascertaining the facts concealed.

  • Note:  An insured need not die of the very disease he failed to reveal to the insurer.  It is sufficient that the non-revelation has misled the insurer in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed policy or in making his inquiries in order to entitle the insurance company to avoid the contract.
  • Note:  The insured is under an obligation to disclose not only such material facts as are known to him, but also those known to his agent where:
  1.       it was the duty of the agent to acquire and communicate information of the facts in question;
  2.       it was possible for the agent, in the exercise of reasonable diligence, to have made the communication before the making of the insurance contract.

n  Failure on the part of the insured to disclose such facts known to his agent, or wholly due to the fault of the agent, will avoid the policy, despite the good faith of the insured.

  1.   Neither party to the insurance contract is bound to communicate information on the following matters except in answer to the inquiries of the other:
    1.       those of which the other knows;
    2.       that which, in the exercise of ordinary care, the other ought to know and of which the former has no reason to suppose his ignorance, i.e. political situation, general usages of trade;
    3.       those of which the other waives communication;
    4.       those which prove or tend to prove the existence of the risk excluded by a warranty and which are not otherwise material;
    5.       those which relate to a risk excepted from the policy and which are not otherwise material.
  • Neither party is bound to communicate his mere opinion, even upon inquiry, because such opinion would add nothing to the appraisal of the application.
  • Waiver of material facts may be:

(a)    by the terms of the insurance; or

(b)    by the neglect to make inquiry as to such facts, where they are distinctly implied in other facts which information is communicated

  • Materiality is to be determined not by the events but solely upon the probable and reasonable influence of the facts on the party to whom the communication is due in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed contract or in making his inquiries.
  • Concealment, whether intentional or not, entitles the other party to rescind the contract.
  1.   Representation

It is a factual statement made by the insured at the time of, or prior to, the issuance of the policy, to give information to the insurer and otherwise induce him to enter into the insurance contract.

  • It may be made orally or in writing.
  • It may be made at the time of, or before, the issuance of the policy.
  • It may be altered or withdrawn before the insurance is effected, but not afterwards.
  • A representation cannot qualify an express provision in a contract of insurance but it may qualify an implied warranty.
  • A representation as to the future is to be deemed a promise unless it appears that it was merely a statement of belief or an expectation.  (must be susceptible of present, actual knowledge)
  • The statement of an erroneous opinion, belief or information, or of an unfulfilled intention, will not avoid the contract of insurance, unless fraudulent.
  • Right to rescind because of false representation:
  1.       must be exercised previous to the commencement of an action on the contract (the action referred to is that to collect a claim on the contract)
  2.       misrepresentation, whether intentional or not, gives the right to rescind
  • Incontestable Clause:  After a policy of life insurancemade payable on the death of the insuredshall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of 2 years from the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, the insurer cannot prove that the policy is void ab initio or is rescindable by reason of the fraudulent concealment or misrepresentation of the insured or his agent.
  • Exceptions:  (a)  absence of insurable risk

(b)    cause of loss is an unexpected risk

(c)     fraud

(d)    non-payment of premium

(e)    violation of conditions relating to naval or military services

(f)      failure to comply with conditions subsequent to the occurrence of the loss

  1.   Warranties:
  • General Rule: Non-performance of a promissory warranty avoids a contract of insurance.
  • Exceptions:
  1.       when before the time for performance of the promissory warranty, a loss insured against occurs;
  2.       when before the time of the performance of the warranty, the act becomes unlawful;
  3.       when before the time of the performance of the warranty, said performance becomes impossible.
  • A statement or a promise set forth in the policy or by reference incorporated therein, the non-fulfillment of which in any respect and without reference to whether the insurer was in fact prejudiced by such non-fulfillment, renders the policy voidable by the insurer, wholly irrespective of the materiality of such statement or promise.

Warranty

Representation

part of the insurance contract

collateral inducement

always written on the policy

maybe oral or written

conclusively presumed material

materiality must be proved

must be strictly complied with

requires substantial truth

made by the insured

may be made by insurer or insured

  • Note:  If there is a breach of warranty, even if the cause of the loss is a different risk, the insurer is entitled to rescind the contract of insurance.
  • Breach must refer to a material warranty, whether intentional or not.
  1.   Policy
  • What is a Rider?  It is an additional provision in a policy not part of the body of the printed form.
  • Cover Note: written memorandum of the most important terms of a preliminary contract of insurance, intended to give temporary protection pending the investigation of the risk by the insurer, or until the issuance of a formal policy.
  • General Rule: Cover notes bind insurer temporarily pending the issuance of the policy.
  • Exception:  Where it is merely an acknowledgment on behalf of the company that the latter’s branch office had received from the applicant the insurance premium and accepted the application subject for processing by the insurance company and that the latter will either approve or reject the same.
  • Kinds of Policies:
  1.       Open – the value of the thing insured is not agreed upon, but is left to be ascertained at the time of the loss
  2.       Valued – expresses on its face an agreement that the thing insured shall be valued at a specific sum
  3.       Running – contemplates successive insurance which provides that the object of the policy may be from time to time defined especially as to the subject of insurance by additional statements or endorsements

n  Note:  If an amount is written on the face of an open policy, it is merely a determination of the maximum limit of recovery and not as the value of the policy.

Category

Open Policy

Valued Policy

what needs to be proven in order to be able to claim

value of property upon loss

no need for proof of value of property upon loss

determining value of loss

value of property is to be ascertained upon loss

value of property upon loss is conclusively stipulated to a specified amount

  • Period for commencing an action against the policy:  Within 1 year from the time the cause of action accrues, i.e., from the time of rejection of the claim by the insurer.  Any condition, stipulation, or agreement limiting the time to less than 1 year is void.
  • Grounds for Cancellation of a Policy by the Insurer:

For Policies Other than Life:

(1)    prior notice of the cancellation to insured

(2)    notice must be based on the ff. occurrences after effective date of the policy

(a)    non-payment of premiums

(b)    conviction of a crime arising out of acts increasing the hazard insured against

(c)     discovery of fraud or material misrepresentation

(d)    discovery of willful or reckless acts or omissions increasing the hazard insured against

(e)    physical changes in the property insured which results in the property becoming uninsurable

(f)      determination by the Commissioner that the continuation of the policy would violate or would place the insurer in violation of the Insurance Code

(3)    notice must be in writing

(4)    it must be mailed or delivered to the insured at the address shown in the policy

(5)    notice must state the ground relied upon and that upon written request of the insured, the insurer will furnish facts on which the cancellation is based

  • Renewal of the Policies Other than Life:

Insurer must mail or deliver to the insured notice of its intention not to renew the policy or to condition its renewal upon reduction of limits or elimination of coverages within 45 days before the policy ends.  Otherwise, insured entitled to renew the policy upon payment of the premium due on the effective date of the renewal.

  1.   Premium
  • General Rule: No policy is binding until the premium thereof has been paid.
  • Exceptions:  (a)  in case of life or industrial life policy, whenever the grace period applies

(b)    in case of estoppel

  • Insurer is entitled to payment of premiums as soon as the thing insured is exposed to the perils insured against.
  • When insurer entitled to Return of Premiums
  1.       when the contract is voidable on account of fraud or misrepresentation of the insurer;
  2.       when on account of facts, the existence of which the insured was ignorant without his fault
  3.       when by any default of the insured other than actual fraud, the insurer never incurred any liability under the policy
  4.       when the insured has become a public enemy and the policy automatically canceled (on the ground of equity)
  5.       in case of over-insurance by several insurers (ratable return of premiums, proportioned to the amount by which the aggregate sum insured in all policies exceed the insurable value of the thing at risk)
  6.   Loss
  • When Insurer is Liable:
  1.       where the peril insured against was the proximate cause, although a peril not contemplated by the contract may have been the remote cause or even the immediate cause of the loss
  2.       where the thing insured is rescued from the peril insured against that would otherwise have caused a loss, if, in the course of such rescue, the thing is exposed to a peril not insured against, which permanently deprives the insured of its possession in whole or in part
  3.       where loss is caused by efforts to rescue the thing insured from a peril insured against
  4.       insurer is not exonerated by a loss caused by simple negligence of the insured if the proximate cause of the loss is a peril insured against
  5.       loss, the immediate cause of which is a peril insured against except when the proximate cause is an excepted peril
  • When Insurer Not Liable:
  1.       where the peril insured against was only a remote cause
  2.       where the peril is specifically excepted, a loss which would not have occurred but for such peril is thereby excepted
  3.       loss caused by the connivance of the insured
  4.       loss caused by the willful act of insured
  5.       loss caused by insured’s negligence, if it amounts to bad faith
  • General Rule: The insurer is not liable for a loss caused by the willful act of the insured.
  • Exception:  Suicide Clause in Life Insurance: Insurer liable in case insured committed suicide after the policy has been in force for a period of 2 years from the date of its issue or last reinstatement.  If insured kills himself within a period of 2 years, insurer is not liable.
  • Exception to Exception:  If suicide is committed in a state of insanity, regardless of the time of commission, the insurer is liable.
  1.   Double Insurance – exists where the same person is insured by several insurers separately in respect to the same subject and interest
  • Requisites:  a.    person insured must be the same
  1.       existence of several insurers
  2.       subject matter insured must be the same
  3.       interest the same
  4.       risk insured against also the same

Over Insurance

Double Insurance

may be only one insurer

must be 2 or more insurers

insurance covers more than the value of insurable interest

insurance may or may not exceed the value of insurable interest

  • The Code prohibits double insurance without the consent of the insurer.
  • Liability of Insurer:

Insurance taken

from each insurer

———————————-   x      value of property received      =   liability of insurer total insurance

  1.   Reinsurance:  A process by which an insurer procures a third person to insure him against loss or liability by reason of such original insurance.

The original insured cannot recover from this insurance unless there is a specific grant, or assignment of, the reinsurance contract in favor of the insured, or a manifest intention of the contracting parties to the reinsurance contract to favor the insured.

  • General Rule:  The insurer who obtains reinsurance must communicate:
  1.       all the representations of the original insured; and
  2.       all the knowledge and information he possesses, whether previously or subsequently acquired which are material to the risk
  • Exception:  under automatic reinsurance treaties

Reinsurance

Double Insurance

1.      1.       insurer becomes the insured

2.      2.       subject matter is the insured risk or liability

3.      3.       different risks and interests of insured

4.      4.       there must be consent of original

5.      5.       one who is original insured has no interest in the contract of reinsurance which is independent of the original contract of insurance

6.      1.       insurer remains the insurer

7.      2.       subject matter is property

8.      3.       the same interest and risk are insured

9.      4.       insured has to give his consent

10.  5.       insured is the party in interest in all contracts

 
  1.   Marine Insurance:  insures against perils of the sea, not of the ship

Perils of the Sea

Perils of the Ship

covered by marine insurance

not covered by marine insurance

denote nature accidents peculiar to the sea which do not happen by intervention of man nor are to be prevented by human prudence

damage or losses resulting from:

1.      1.       natural and inevitable action of the sea

2.      2.       ordinary wear and tear of a ship, or

3.      3.       negligent failure of the ship owner to provide the vessel with proper equipment to convey the cargo under ordinary conditions

  • Owner of the Ship has Insurable Interest:
  1.       in the ship even if it has been chartered by one who promises to pay him in value in case of loss (insurer is liable for what insured cannot recover from the charterer), even when hypothecated by bottomry (only the excess of its value over the amount secured by bottomry) and
  2.       in the freightage, which according to the ordinary and probable course of things he would have earned but for the intervention of a peril insured against or other peril incident to the voyage
  • Charterer has insurable interest in the ship to the extent that he is liable to be damnified by its loss.
  • Barratry:  Any willful misconduct on the part of the masters or crew, in pursuance of some unlawful or fraudulent purpose, without the consent of the owners and to the prejudice of the owner’s interest.
  • Jettison:  Intentional casting overboard of any part of a venture exposed to a peril, whether it be of the cargo, or the ship’s furniture or tackle, in the hope of saving the rest of the venture.
  • Insurable Interest in Marine Insurance:  Determined when one will sustain loss from the destruction of the subject matter or derive benefit from its preservation.
  • Charter Party:  Contract by virtue of which the owner or the agent of a vessel binds himself to transport merchandise or persons for a fixed price.  It has also been defined as a contract by virtue of which the owner or the agent of the vessel for the transportation of goods or persons from one port to another.
  • Loan on Bottomry:  Contract in the nature of a mortgage whereby the owner of a ship borrows money for the use, equipment or repair of the vessel for a definite term, and pledges the ship as a security for repayment, with maritime or extraordinary interest on the account of the maritime risks to be borne by the lender.  It is stipulated in such a contract that if the ship be lost in the course of the specific voyage or during a specified limited time caused by any of the perils enumerated in the contract, the lender shall resolutely lose his money.
  • Loan on Respondentia:  Contract akin to that of mortgage made on the goods on board the ship, and which are to be sold or exchanged in the course of the voyage.  The goods serve as the principal security.
  • Freightage:  Signifies all the benefits derived by the owner, carriage of his own goods, or those of others.
  • Concealment:  In marine insurance, information or the belief or expectation of a 3rdperson, in reference to a material fact is material.

n  Concealment of the following merely exonerates the insurer from the resulting loss therefrom:

  1.       national character of the insured
  2.       liability of the thing insured to capture and detention
  3.       liability to seizure from breach of foreign laws of trade
  4.       want of necessary documents
  5.       use of false and simulated papers
  • Implied Warranties:
  1.       that the ship is seaworthy – complied with if the ship is seaworthy at the time of commencement of risk, except:  (a)  insurance for a specified length of time – at the commencement of every voyage it undertakes during that time; (b) cargo to be transshipped at indeterminate port – each vessel upon which cargo is shipped is seaworthy at the commencement of each particular voyage
  2.       that the vessel shall not engage in illegal venture
  3.       that the vessel shall not deviate from the course of the voyage insured
  4.       where the nationality or neutrality of a ship or cargo is expressly warranted, it is implied that the ship will carry the requisite documents to show such nationality or neutrality and that it will not carry any documents which may cast reasonable suspicion thereon
  • Seaworthiness depends on:
  1.       nature of the ship
  2.       nature of the voyage
  3.       nature of the service

n  Seaworthiness of the vessel is required only at the commencement of the risk

n  Exceptions:

  1.       in a Time Policy – commencement of every voyage that must be undertaken
  2.       in a Cargo Policy – commencement of each particular voyage
  3.       in a Voyage Policy – commencement of each portion of the voyage
  • Deviation
  1.       a departure from the course of the voyage insured
  2.       unreasonable delay in pursuing the voyage
  3.       commencement of an entirely different voyage
  • When is Deviation proper?
  1.       when caused by circumstances over which neither the master not the owner of the ship has any control
  2.       when necessary to comply with a warranty or to avoid a peril whether it is insured against or not
  3.       when made in good faith for the purpose of saving human life or relieving another vessel in distress
  4.       when made in good faith and upon reasonable grounds of belief in its necessity to avoid a peril
  • Loss
  1.       Actual Total Loss

n  a total destruction of the thing insured

n  the irretrievable loss of the thing by sinking or by being broken up

n  any damage to the thing which renders it valueless tot he owner for which he held it

n  any other event which effectively deprives the owner of possession, at the port of destination, of the thing insured

  1.       Constructive Total Loss – gives to the person insured the right to abandon
  • Average – any extraordinary or additional expense incurred during the voyage for the preservation of the vessel, cargo, or both and all damages to the vessel and cargo from the time it is loaded and the voyage commenced until it ends and the cargo unloaded
  • General Average – an expense or damage suffered deliberately in order to save the vessel, its cargo, or both from the real or known risk
  • Abandonment – act of the insured by which, after a constructive total loss, he declares the relinquishment to the insured of his interest in the thing insured (where the cause of loss is a peril insured against)

(a)    more than ¾ thereof in value is actually lost or would have been expended to recover it from the peril

(b)    it is injured to such an extent as to reduce its value by more than ¾

(c)     if the thing insured is the ship and the voyage cannot be lawfully performed without incurring an expense of more than ¾ of the whole, or a risk which a prudent man would not undertake under the circumstances

(d)    if the thing insured is cargo or freightage, and the voyage cannot be performed on another ship procured by the master within a reasonable time and with reasonable diligence to forward the cargo without incurring an expense or a risk as stated above

  • Freightage cannot be abandoned unless ship is also abandoned.
  • Requisites of a Valid Abandonment:
  1.       must be total and conditional
  2.       made within a reasonable time
  3.       explicit notice
  4.       coupled with actual abandonment
  • Requisites for Valid Valuation in the Valued Marine Policy:
  1.       insured must have interest at risk
  2.       there must be no fraud on the insured’s part
  • Notice of Abandonment:
  1.       may be oral or in writing (if oral, written notice must be submitted within 7 days from oral notice)
  2.       must be explicit
  3.       must specify the particular cause for abandonment
  4.       need not be accompanied by proof of interest or loss
  • Acceptance of Abandonment
  1.       may be express or implied (i.e. silence for unreasonable length of time)
  2.       conclusive upon the parties and admits the loss and sufficiency of abandonment
  3.       irrevocable, unless the ground on which it is made is proved to be unfounded
  • If insurer refuses to accept a valid abandonment – liable as upon actual total loss
  • Upon actual abandonment
  1.       freightage earned before loss – belongs to the insurer of freightage
  2.       freightage earned after loss – belongs to insurer of ship
  • Co-insurance:  form of insurance in which the person who insures his property for less than the entire value is understood to be his own insurer for the difference which exists between the true value of the property and the amount of insurance
  • Co-insurance applies only where the:
  1.       insurance taken is less than the actual value of the thing insured
  2.       loss is partial
  • Primage – increase in freightage
  1.   Fire Insurance

Insurer is liable for loss or damage caused by hostile fire (fire that escapes from the place where it was intended to burn and ought to be in) and not that caused by friendly fire (fire which burns in a place where it is intended to burn).

  • Scope of Fire Insurance:
  1.       fire
  2.       lightning
  3.       windstorms
  4.       tornado
  5.       earthquake
  6.         other allied risks
  • When does alteration in the use or condition entitle the insurer to rescind the contract?
  1.       such alteration violates a provision in the policy
  2.       it was made without the insurer’s consent
  3.       it is done within the insured’s control, and it increases the risk of loss or damage
  • Rules:
  1.       policy shall not protect the insured from injury consequent upon his negligent use or management of fire, so long as it is confined to the place where it ought to be
  2.       if it escapes, even though the insured was negligent, the insurer is liable
  3.       even though a fire may remain in its proper place, it may become hostile if it by accident, becomes so extensive as to be beyond control
  • Options of the Insurer
  1.       purchase the property at appraised valuation
  2.       restore the property damaged – contract of insurance is discharged and parties enter into a new contract of insurance
  3.   Casualty Insurance:  Any injury that is intended, unexpected and unusual, even though it results from an act or even which was intelligently done.
  • Insurer is Liable for death/injury to insured:
  1.       by his own hand while insane
  2.       by taking poison by mistake
  3.       by overdoes of drugs administered or taken by mistake, by ignorance or material pathological conditions
  4.       by unexpected bacterial infection consequent upon doing acts, even though such acts were intentionally done
  5.       by unprovoked violence of others
  • Compulsory Motor Vehicle Liability Insurance

Persons subject to CMVLI:

  1.       motor vehicle owner or one who is the actual legal owner of a motor vehicle in whose name such vehicle is registered with the LTO
  2.       land transport operator or one who is the owner of a motor vehicle or vehicles being used for conveying passengers for compensation (including school buses)
  • No Fault Indemnity Clause:  The insurance company shall pay any claim for death or bodily injuries sustained by a passenger or 3rdparty without the necessity of proving fault or negligence of any kind subject to certain conditions.  This does not apply to property damage.
  1.   Suretyship – an agreement whereby the surety guarantees the performance of the principal or obligor of an obligation or undertaking in favor of a 3rdparty called the obligee
  2.   Life Insurance:  an insurance in human life and insurance appertaining thereto or connected therewith may be payable:
    1.       on the death of the insured
    2.       on his surviving a specified period
    3.       otherwise, contingently on the continuance or cessation of life

(b and c refer to endowment or annuities)

  • Uses and Common Kinds of Life Insurance:
  1.       Whole Life or Ordinary Policies – here, the insured agrees to pay annual, semi-annual or quarterly premiums while he lives.  The insurer agrees to pay the face value of the policy upon the death of the insured.
  2.       Limited Payment Life Policy – premiums paid only for a specified period of years.
  3.       Term Policy – insurer’s liability arises only upon the death of the insured within the agreed term as period.  If the latter survives the period, the contract terminates and the insurer is not liable
  4.       Endowment Policy – insurer agrees to pay a certain sum to the insured if the latter outlives a designated period; if he dies before that time, the proceeds are paid to the beneficiary
  5.       Life Annuity – debtor binds himself to pay an annual pension or income during the life of one or more persons in consideration of a capital consisting of money or other property, whose ownership is transferred to him with the burden of income
  6.   The Business of Insurance
    1.       Life or Endowment Policies

Grace Period – 30 days for the payment of any premium due after the first premium has been paid

Period of Incontestability – after the lapse of 2 years from the date of issue or date of approval of last reinstatement

Reinstatement of Policy – within 3 years from the date of default of premium, upon:

  1.       production of evidence of insurability, and
  2.       payment of all overdue premiums and any indebtedness to the company upon said policy

Exceptions:

  1.       if cash surrender value has been paid
  2.       if period of extension has expired
  3.       Claims Settlement

Unfair Claims Settlement Practices:

(a)    knowingly misrepresenting to claimants pertinent facts or policy provisions relating to coverage at issue

(b)    failing to acknowledge with reasonable promptness pertinent communications with respect to claims arising under its policies

(c)     failing to adopt or implement reasonable standards for the prompt investigation of claims arising under its policies

(d)    no attempt in good faith to effectuate prompt, fair and equitable settlement of claims submitted in which liability has become reasonably clear

(e)    compelling policy holders to institute suits to recover the amount due under its policies by offering with no justifiable reason an amount substantially less than that ultimately recovered in suits brought by them

Proceeds of Life Insurance – payable within 60 days after:

(a)    presentation of claims, and

(b)    filing of proof of death (upon failure to pay interest, at the rate of 2 times the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board unless based on the ground that the rate is fraudulent)

Proceeds of Policies other than Life – payable:

(a)    upon proof of loss

(b)    upon ascertainment of loss or damage (if not made within 60 days of proof of loss, payable in 90 days)

  1.       Power of Commissioner to Suspend/Revoke License

(a)    if insurance contract is in unsound condition

(b)    if it has failed to comply with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it

(c)     its conditions or methods of business s such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or to its policy holders

(d)    that its paid up capital stock, or its available cash assets, or its security deposits, as the case may be, is impaired or deficient

(e)    that the margin of solvency required of each company is deficient

Insurance Agent – any person who for compensation solicits or obtains insurance on behalf of any insurance company or transacts for a person other than himself an application for a policy or contract of insurance to or from such company or offers or assumes to act in negotiating of such insurance.  He must be first licensed as such before doing any acts as insurance agent.

Insurance Broker – any person for any compensation, commission or any other thing of value, acts, or aids in any manner in soliciting, negotiating or procuring the making of any insurance contract or in placing risk or taking out insurance, on behalf of an insured other than himself.  A license is required.

 WAREHOUSE RECEIPTS LAW

  1.       Warehouse – a building or place where goods are deposited and stored for profit.
  2.       Warehouseman – person lawfully engaged in the business of storing goods for profit.
  • Only  a warehouseman may issue warehouse receipts.
  1.       Warehouse Receipt – written acknowledgment by a warehouseman that he has received and holds certain goods therein described in store for the person to whom it is issued.
  2.       Non-negotiable Receipt – receipt deliverable to a specified person.
  3.       Negotiable Receipt – receipt deliverable to order or to bearer.
  4.       Essential Terms which MUST be embodied in a Warehouse Receipt:
    1.       location of the warehouse
    2.       date of the issue of the receipt
    3.       consecutive number of the receipt
    4.       statement whether the goods received will be delivered to bearer, or a specified person, or his order
    5.       rate of storage charges
    6.         description of the goods or packages containing them for identification purposes
    7.       signature of the warehouseman
    8.       statement of the amount of advances made and of liabilities incurred for which the warehouseman claims as lien
  5.       Effect of omission of any of the essential terms:
    1.       The validity of the warehouse receipt is not affected.
    2.       The warehouseman shall be held liable for damages to those injured by his omission.
    3.       The negotiability of the warehouse receipt is not affected.
    4.       The issuance of a warehouse receipt in the form provided by the law is merely permissive and directory and not mandatory in the sense that if the requirements are not observed, then the goods delivered for storage become ordinary deposits.
  6.       Terms which may be inserted in a Warehouse Receipt:  Any other terms except (a) those contrary to the provisions of this Act; (b) those that would impair a warehouseman’s obligation to exercise that degree of care in the safekeeping of the goods entrusted to him
  7.       Marks to be made on a warehouse receipt:
    1.       A non-negotiable receipt must be clearly marked non-negotiable or not negotiable, otherwise, the holder of the receipt who purchased it for value and who supposed it to be negotiable, may treat it as negotiable.
    2.       Duplicate receipts must be so marked, otherwise, the warehouseman is held liable for all damages suffered by a holder believing the same to be the original.
  8.   Warranties of a warehouseman as to duplicate receipts:
    1.       The duplicate is an accurate copy of the original receipt.
    2.       Such original receipt is uncancelled at the date of the issue of the duplicate.
  9.   Effects of alteration on the liability of the warehouseman:
    1.       If the alteration is IMMATERIAL (the tenor of the receipt is not changed), whether fraudulent or not, authorized or not, the warehouseman is liable on the altered receipt according to its original tenor.
    2.       If the alteration is MATERIAL but AUTHORIZED, the warehouseman is liable according to the terms of the altered receipt.
    3.       If the alteration is MATERIAL, UNAUTHORIZED but INNOCENTLY MADE, the warehouseman is liable on the altered receipt according to its original tenor.
    4.       If the alteration is MATERIAL and FRAUDULENTLY MADE, the warehouseman is liable:

(1)    to the purchaser of the receipt for value and without notice of the alteration according to the tenor of the altered receipt

(2)    to the alterer, according to the terms of the original receipt

(3)    to subsequent purchasers with notice of the alteration, according to the terms of the original receipt

  1.   Effects of misdescription of goods:
    1.       A warehouseman is under the obligation to deliver the identical property stored with him and if he fails to do so, he is liable directly to the owner.
    2.       As against a bona fide purchaser of a warehouse receipt, the warehouseman is estopped from denying that he has received the goods described in the receipt.
    3.       If the description consists merely of marks or label upon the goods or upon the packages containing them, the warehouseman is not liable even if the goods are not of the kind as indicated in the marks or labels.
  2.   Principal Obligations of a Warehouseman:
    1.       To take care of the goods entrusted to his safekeeping
  • General Rule:  A warehouseman is required to exercise such degree of care which a reasonable careful owner would exercise over similar goods of his own.  He shall be liable for any loss or injury to the goods caused by his failure to exercise such care.
  • Exception:  He shall not be liable for any loss or injury which could not have been avoided by the exercise of such care.
  • Exception to the Exception:  He may limit his liability to an agreed value of the property received in case of loss. He cannot stipulate that he will not be responsible for any loss caused by his negligence.
  1.       To deliver the goods to the holder of the receipt or the depositor upon demand, provided demand is accompanied with:

(1)    an offer to satisfy the warehouseman’s lien;

(2)    an offer to surrender the negotiable receipt properly endorsed.  If the receipt is non-negotiable, any person lawfully entitled to the possession of the goods may be entitled to delivery without surrender of the receipt.

(3)    a readiness and willingness to sign an acknowledgment that the goods have been delivered if such is requested by the warehouseman.

  1.   Persons to whom goods must be delivered:
    1.      Persons lawfully entitled to the possession of the goods or his agent:

a.  persons to whom a competent court has ordered the delivery of the goods

(1)    where a negotiable instrument has been lost or destroyed, the court may order delivery to a person upon satisfactory proof of such loss or destruction and upon proper posting of a bond to protect the warehouseman from any liability or expense which he may incur by reason of the original receipt remaining outstanding.

(2)    where more than one person claims title or possession of the goods the warehouseman may require all claimants to interplead.  The court will then order delivery to the person having a better right.

  1.       an attaching creditor – Goods, while in the possession of the warehouseman and covered by a negotiable receipt, cannot be attached or levied upon under an execution unless:

(I)      the negotiable receipt is first surrendered to the warehouseman, or

(ii)     its negotiation is enjoined, or

(iii)   the receipt is impounded by the court

c.  to the purchaser in case of sale of the goods by the warehouseman to enforce his lien

  1.       to the purchaser where perishable or hazardous goods are sold at private or public sale
  2.      If goods are covered by a non-negotiable receipt:
    1.       a person entitled to the delivery by the terms of the receipt, or
    2.       one who has written authority from letter a
  3.      If goods are covered by a negotiable receipt, a person in possession of the receipt, the terms of which the goods are deliverable:
    1.       to him or order
    2.       to bearer
    3.       indorsed to him
    4.       indorsed in blank by the person whom delivery was promised
  4.   When is there Misdelivery?

When the warehouseman delivers the goods to a person who is not in fact lawfully entitled to the possession of the goods because:

  1.       the person does not fall under letter B or C above; or
  2.       the person falls under letter B or C but prior to delivery, the warehouseman had either:

(1)    been requested by the person lawfully entitled to the delivery not to make such delivery, or

(2)    had information that the delivery about to be made was to one not lawfully entitled to the possession of the goods

  1.   Effects of Misdelivery:

The warehouseman shall be liable for conversion to all having a right to property or possession of the goods.

  1.   What happens if there is proper delivery or partial delivery but the warehouseman fails to cancel the receipt or record on the receipt of such partial delivery?
    1.       If goods covered by a negotiable warehouse receipt are delivered by a warehouseman but he fails to take the receipt and cancel it, then he is still liable to one who purchases for value and in good faith such receipt.
    2.       If he makes partial delivery of the goods but fails to record the partial delivery on the receipt then he may still be held liable for the entire receipt to one who purchases for value and in good faith such receipt.
  2.   Lawful excuses for refusal to deliver goods:
    1.       The warehouseman can refuse to deliver the goods if he has acquired title or right to the possession of the goods:

(1)    directly or indirectly from a transfer made by the depositor at the time of the deposit for storage or subsequent thereto; or

(2)    from the warehouseman’s lien

  1.       If someone other than the depositor or person claiming under the depositor has a claim to the title or possession of the goods and the warehouseman has information of such claim, the warehouseman shall be excused from liability for refusing to deliver the goods either to the depositor or person claiming under him until he has had a reasonable time to ascertain the validity of the adverse claim or to bring legal proceedings to compel all claimants to interplead.
  2.       The warehouseman will not be required to deliver the goods if such had been lost.  But this is without prejudice to liabilities which may be incurred by him due to such loss.
  3.       The warehouseman having a valid lien against the person demanding the goods may refuse to deliver the goods to him until the lien is satisfied.
  4.       If goods have been lawfully sold or disposed of because of their perishable or hazardous nature, the warehouseman shall not be liable for failure to deliver the goods.
  5.   A warehouseman cannot refuse to deliver goods to the depositor or to a person claiming under him on the ground that adverse title to the goods belongs to a third person.
  6.   Rules as regards Co-mingling of Deposited Goods:
  • General Rule:  A warehouseman may not co-mingle goods belonging to different depositors or belonging to the same depositor for which separate receipts had been issued.
  • Exception:  A warehouseman may co-mingle fungible goods of the same kind and grade provided he is authorized by agreement or by custom.
  1.   Effect of Co-mingling of Goods:
    1.       The different owners become co-owners of the whole mass.
    2.       The warehouseman shall be severally liable to each depositor for the care and redelivery of his share of such mass to the same extent and under the same circumstances as if the goods had been kept separate.
  2.   Remedies of a Creditor:  (the debtor being the owner of the negotiable receipt)

Creditors of the depositors, before negotiation, may protect themselves by obtaining a writ of preliminary injunction and serve the same on the depositor before he has a chance to negotiate the receipt.  Once enjoined, there will be no longer a danger that a 3rd person will be prejudiced so the goods may now be attached, levied upon, or that the vendor’s lien or the right of stoppage in transit be exercised.

  1.   Warehouseman’s Lien
  • Extent of Warehouseman’s Lien:

A warehouseman shall have a lien on goods deposited or on the proceeds thereof in his hands for:

  1.       all lawful charges for storage and preservation of the goods
  2.       all lawful claims for money advances, interest, insurance, transportation, labor, weighing, cooperating and other charges and expenses in relation to such goods
  3.       all reasonable charges and expenses for notice and advertisements of sale and for sale of the goods where default has been made in satisfying the warehouse lien
  • Goods Subject to lien:
  1.       goods belonging to the depositor who is liable to the warehouseman as debtor whenever such goods are deposited and
  2.       goods belonging to other persons stored by the depositor who is liable to the warehouseman as debtor with authority to make a valid pledge
  • How is a lien enforced?
  1.       by refusing to deliver the goods until the lien is satisfied
  2.       by causing the extrajudicial sale of the property and applying the proceeds to the value of the lien
  3.       by filing a civil action for unpaid charges or by way of counterclaim in an action to recover the property from him
  • How is a lien lost?
  1.       when the warehouseman voluntarily surrenders possession of the goods without requiring payment of his lien; or
  2.       when the warehouseman wrongfully refuses to deliver the goods when a demand is made with which he is bound to comply
  3.   Negotiation and Transfer of Receipts
  • How do we negotiate a receipt deliverable to order?
  1.       by indorsing it in blank thereby making it deliverable to bearer or
  2.       by special indorsement – which would require further indorsements for further negotiations.

In both cases, the indorsements must be coupled with delivery.

  • How do we negotiate a receipt deliverable to bearer?

There is no need to indorse for negotiation.  Physical delivery of the instrument will suffice.  But if the instrument is indorsed specially, the bearer character of the receipt is destroyed and for further negotiation, there will be a need for indorsement.

  • Who may negotiate warehouse receipts?
  1.       the owner of the receipt, or
  2.       the person to whom possession of the receipt was entrusted to by the owner
  • Rights acquired by a person to whom the receipt has been negotiated:
  1.       the title of the person negotiating the receipt over the goods covered by the receipt
  2.       the title of the person (depositor or owner) to whose order by the terms of the receipt the goods were to be delivered
  3.       the direct obligation of the warehouseman to hold possession of the goods for him, as if the warehouseman directly contracted with him
  • May non negotiable receipts be negotiated?

No, even if the receipt is indorsed, the transferee acquires no additional right.  That is why they are called non negotiable receipts.  But they may be transferred or assigned by delivery.

  • Rights of a person to whom a non negotiable receipt has been transferred:
  1.       the title to the goods as against the transferor
  2.       the right to notify the warehouseman of the transfer thereof and
  3.       the right thereafter to acquire the obligation of the warehouseman to hold the goods for him
  • Distinction between a non negotiable receipt from a negotiable receipt with regard to attachment or execution upon goods:

Non-negotiable Receipt

Negotiable Receipt

Prior to notification of the warehouseman by the transferor or transferee, the warehouseman is not bound to the transferee whose right may be defeated by a levy of an attachment or execution upon the goods by the creditor of the transferor or by a notification to such warehouseman of the subsequent sale of the goods.

The goods cannot be attached or levied under an execution unless the receipt be first surrendered to the warehouseman or its negotiation enjoined.

  • Rights of a person to whom a negotiable receipt has been transferred, not indorsed:
  1.       the right to the goods as against the transferor
  2.       the right to compel the transferor to indorse the receipt.  But if the intention of the parties is that the receipt should merely be transferred, the transferee has no right to require the transferor to indorse the receipt.

Note:  Negotiation takes effect as of the time when the indorsement is actually made.

  • Warranties of a person negotiating or transferring a receipt:
  1.       the receipt is genuine
  2.       he has a legal right to negotiate or transfer it
  3.       he has knowledge that would impair the validity or worth of the receipt and
  4.       he has a right to transfer the title to the goods and that the goods are merchantable
  • A holder for security of a receipt (mortgagee or pledgee) who in good faith accepts payment of the debt from a person does not warrant the genuineness of the receipt not the quality or quantity of the goods therein described.
  • It is the duty of the purchaser, mortgagee or pledgee of goods for which a negotiable receipt has been issued to require the negotiation of the receipt to him, otherwise his failure will have the same effect as an express authorization on his part to the seller, mortgagor, or pledgor in possession of such receipt to make any subsequent negotiation.  The subsequent purchaser must have taken the receipt in good faith and for value.
  • A bona fide purchaser of a negotiable warehouse receipt acquires title to the goods where he purchases from the owner’s agent within the actual or apparent scope of his authority.  In sum, negotiation is valid despite having been made in breach of trust.
  • Distinctions between a negotiable instrument and a negotiable warehouse receipt:

Negotiable Instrument

Negotiable Warehouse Receipt

When a negotiable instrument is altered deliberately, it becomes null and void.

When a warehouse receipt is altered, it is still valid but it may be enforced only in accordance with its original tenor.

If a negotiable instrument is originally payable to bearer, it will always remain so payable regardless of the way it is indorsed, whether specially or in blank.

If a warehouse receipt, payable to bearer, is indorsed specially, it will be converted into a receipt deliverable to order and can only be negotiated further by indorsement and delivery.

A holder in due course may be able to obtain a title better than that which the party who negotiated the instrument to him had.

An indorsee even if a holder in due course obtains only such title as the person negotiating has over the goods.

The indorsement of a negotiable instrument has a double effect.  It is at the same time a conveyance of the instrument and a contract the indorser has with the indorsee that on certain conditions, the indorser will pay the instrument if the party primarily liable fails to do so.

The indorsement of a warehouse receipt amounts merely to a conveyance by the indorser.  Accordingly, an indorser of a receipt shall not be liable to the holder if, for example, the warehouseman fails to deliver the goods because they were lost due to his fault or negligence.

 GENERAL BONDED WAREHOUSE LAW

  • Any warehouseman receiving commodities for (a)  storage; (b) milling; (c) co-mingling must:
  1.       obtain prior license from the Bureau of Commerce
  2.       file a bond in an amount equivalent to 33 1/3 % of the capacity of the warehouse against which bond depositors may sue directly
  3.       open to the public, no discrimination allowed
  4.       liable for double market value should he accept goods in excess of the capacity of warehouse if goods are damaged or destroyed
  • Note:  for palay and corn license, a bond with the National Grains Authority is required; also an insurance cover is required.

 Uniform Currency Law

  1.       Obligations Null and Void
    1.       obligations payable in gold/foreign currency
    2.       obligations payable in Philippine currency but measured in gold/foreign currency
  2.       Exempt Transactions
    1.       government to government transactions or with international banking institutions
    2.       transactions affecting high priority economic projects
    3.       forward exchange transactions between banks
    4.       import and export and other international banking, financial, investment and industrial transactions
  3.       Merchants and Commercial Transactions
  • Classes of Investments:
  1.       Permitted – one allowed without need of prior authority from the Philippine Government.  If registered status, invest up to extent as not to affect its registered status.  If enterprise not registered, investment not to exceed 40%.
  2.       Permissible – invest in excess of 40% in unregistered enterprise but with prior approval of BOI
  3.       Pioneer Area – (a)  involves manufacturing, processing, production of product not produced at all/produced in non-commercial scale; (b)  uses a design, scheme, formula that is new and untried in the Phils.; (c) agricultural activities/services essential to the attainment of food sufficiency; (d) produces non-conventional fuels/utilizes non-conventional sources of energy (all others are non-pioneer)
  4.       Absolutely Disqualified to become Merchants
    1.       serving penalty of civil interdiction
    2.       insolvent
    3.       absolutely disqualified by special laws
  5.       Relatively Disqualified
    1.       judicial and prosecuting officials in active service
    2.       administrative, economic, military chiefs
    3.       government collection agents and custodian of funds
    4.       stock and commercial brokers
    5.       by special laws cannot trade in specified territories
  6.       Books a Merchant must keep
    1.       book of inventories and balances, statement of assets, liabilities and capital
    2.       journal of day to day operations
    3.       ledger for classifying accounts
    4.       copying book for letters and telegrams; if juridical person, include book of minutes and stock and transfer book
  7.       Probative Value of Merchant’s Book
    1.       evidence against merchants themselves
    2.       in case of conflicts between 2 books – that which s properly kept prevails
    3.       if one keeps books and the other does not and cannot explain why, the former prevails
    4.       if both books are properly kept and there is a conflict, other proofs can be resorted to
  8.       Commercial Contracts by Correspondence are perfected from the moment the offeree accepts the offer, even before knowledge of said acceptance by the offeror.  This does not apply to deposit, guaranty, sales, loan, agency, partnership.
  9.       Joint Account Partnership – business arrangement whereby 2 or more persons interest themselves in the business of another by making contributions thereto and participating in the results thereof
    1.       only one member is ostensible, others are silent
    2.       no common name
    3.       only ostensible partners can sue/be sued
    4.       no juridical personality

Transportation Law

  1.       Contract of Transportation – contract whereby a certain person or association of persons obligate themselves to transport persons, things, news, from one place to another for a fixed price
  2.       Parties to the Contract of Transportation:
    1.       Shipper – one who gives rise to the contract of transportation by agreeing to deliver the things or news to be transported, or to present his own person or those of other or others in the case of transportation of passengers
    2.       Carrier/Conductor – one who binds himself to transport persons, things, or news, as the case may be, or one employed in or engaged in the business of carrying goods for others for hire
  3.       Common Carrier – person, corporation, firm, association engaged in the business of carrying or transporting passengers, goods or both, by land, water, air, for compensation, offering services to the public; must exercise extraordinary diligence

Private Carrier – not engaged in the business of carrying; no public employment; undertakes to deliver goods/passengers for compensation; requires only ordinary diligence

4.  Requisites of Caso Fortuito

  1.       event independent of human will
  2.       occurrence makes it impossible for debtor to perform in normal manner
  3.       debtor free from aggravation/participation
  4.       impossible to foresee or avoid
  5.       Contributory negligence does not entitle passengers to recover moral/exemplary damages.
  6.       Bill of Lading – written acknowledgment of receipt of goods and agreement to transport them to a specific place to a person named or his carrier

It is not indispensable to the creation of a contract of carriage.  The contract itself arises from the moment goods are delivered by shipper to carrier and the carrier agrees to carry them.

The function of the Bill of Lading:  the legal basis of the contract between the shipper and carrier shall be the bills of lading, by the contents of which all disputes which may arise with regard to their execution and fulfillment shall be decided, no exceptions being admissible other than forgery or material errors in the drafting thereof.

Carrier’s responsibility starts from the moment he receives unconditionally the merchandise personally or through an agent and lasts until he delivers them actually or constructively to the consignee or his agent.

Mere delay in the delivery of goods to consignee does not give right to refuse goods – only breach of contract, ergo damages.  If delay is unreasonable, then he may refuse to accept and make carrier liable for conversion.

  1.       Vessels – those engaged in navigation, whether coastwise or on the high seas, including floating docks, pontoons, dredges, scows and any other floating apparatus destined for the services of the industry or maritime commerce
  2.       Persons Participating in Maritime Commerce:
    1.       ship owner and/or ship agent
    2.       captain or master
    3.       other officers of the vessel
    4.       supercargo
  3.       Liability of Ship owners and Ship agents:
    1.       civil liability for the acts of the captain
    2.       civil liability for contracts entered into by the captain to repair, equip and provision the vessel, provided that the amount claimed was invested for the benefit of the vessel
    3.       civil liability for indemnities in favor of 3rdpersons which may arise from the conduct of the captain in the care of the goods which the vessel carried, as well as for the safety of the passengers transported
  • Ship owner/ship agent not liable for the obligations contracted by the captain if the latter exceeds his powers and privileges inherent in his position of those which may have been conferred upon him by the former.  However, if the amount claimed were made use of for the benefit of the vessel, the ship owner or ship agent is liable.
  1.   Doctrine of Limited Liability – liability of shipowners is limited to amount of interest in said vessel because of the real and hypothecary nature of maritime law such that where the vessel is entirely lost, the obligation is extinguished.

Exceptions:  (1)  vessel is not abandoned

(2)    claims under workmen’s compensation

(3)    injury/damage due to shipowner’s fault

(4)    vessel is insured

  • The doctrine also applies for claims due to death or injuries to passengers, aside from claims for goods.
  • In abandoning the vessel, there is no procedure to be followed.  There is neither a prescriptive period within which the ship owner can make the abandonment.  He may do so for so long as he is not estopped from invoking the same or do acts inconsistent with abandonment.
  1.   Roles of the Captain:
    1.       general agent of the ship owner
    2.       technical director of the vessels
    3.       represents the government of the country under whose flag he navigates
  2.   Loan on Bottomry – made by shipowner/ship agent guaranteed by vessel itself, repayable upon arrival at destination
  3.   Loan In Respondentia – taken on security of the cargo repayable upon the safe arrival at cargo destination
  4.   Accidents and Damages in Maritime Commerce:
    1.       Averages
    2.       Arrivals Under Stress
    3.       Collisions
    4.       Shipwrecks
  5.   Average:
    1.       all extraordinary or accidental expenses which may be incurred during the voyage for the preservation of the vessel or cargo or both
    2.       all damages or deterioration which the vessel may suffer from the time it puts to sea at the port of departure until it casts anchor at the port of destination, and those suffered by the merchandise from the time they are loaded in the port of shipment until they are unloaded in the port of their consignment
  6.   Simple Average – expenses/damages caused to the vessel/cargo not inured to common benefit and profit of all the persons interested in the vessel and her cargo; borne by respective owners
  7.   General Average – expenses/damages deliberately caused in order to save the vessel, its cargo or both from a real and known risk

Requisites:

  1.       deliberately incurred
  2.       intended to save vessel and cargo or both
  3.       from real and known risk
  4.       there is success
  5.   Formalities for Incurring Gross Average:
    1.       there must be an assembly of the sailing mate and other officers with the captain including those with interests in the cargo
    2.       there must be a resolution of the captain
    3.       the resolution shall be entered in the log book, with the reasons and motives and the votes for and against the resolution
    4.       the minutes shall be signed by the parties
    5.       within 24 hours upon arrival at the first port the captain makes, he shall deliver one copy of these minutes to the maritime judicial authority thereat
  6.   Arrivals under Stress – arrival of the vessel at a port not of destination on account of (a) lack of provisions; (b) well-founded fear of seizure; (c) by reason of accident of the sea disabling it to navigate

When Not Lawful:

  1.       lack of provisions due to negligence to carry according to usage and customs
  2.       risk of enemy not well known or manifest
  3.       defect of vessel due to improper repair
  4.       malice, negligence, lack of foresight or skill of captain
  5.   Collision – impact of 2 vessels both of which are moving
  6.   Allision – striking of a moving vessel against one that is stationary
  7.   Cases of Collision:
    1.       due to the fault, negligence or lack of skill of the captain, sailing mate or the complement of the vessel – ship owner liable for the losses and damages (Culpable Fault)
    2.       due to fortuitous event or force majeure – each vessel and its cargo shall bear its own damages (Fortuitous)
    3.       it cannot be determined which of the 2 vessels caused the collision – each vessel shall suffer its own damages, and both shall be solidarily responsible for the losses and damages occasioned to their cargoes (Inscrutable Fault)
  8.   Error in Extremis – sudden movement made by a faultless vessel during the 3rdzone of collision with another vessel which is at fault, even if the said movement is wrong, no responsibility will fall on said vessel
  9.   Shipwreck – denotes all types of loss/ wreck of a vessel at sea either by being swallowed up by the waves, by running against another vessel or thing at sea or on coast where the vessel is rendered incapable of navigation
  10.   Salvage – the compensation allowed to persons by whose voluntary assistance a ship at sea or her cargo or both have been saved in whole or in part from an impending peril, or such property recovered from actual peril or loss, in cases of shipwrecks, derelict or recapture; a service which one person renders to the owner of a ship or goods by his own labor, preserving the goods or ship which the owner or those entrusted with the care of them either abandoned in distress at sea or are unable to protect and secure; a permit is required to engage in the salvage business
  11.   Derelict – a ship or cargo which is abandoned and deserted at sea by those who are in charge of it, without any hope of recovering it, or without any intention of returning it
  12.   Elements of a Valid Salvage:
    1.       a marine peril
    2.       service voluntarily rendered when not required as an existing duty or from special contract
    3.       success, in whole or in part, or that the services rendered contributed to such success
  13.   Contract of Towage – contract whereby a vessel usually motorized pulls another from one place to another for compensation.  It is a contract of services.
  14.   Difference between Towage and Salvage:

Salvage

Towage

crew of salvaging ship is entitled to salvage, and can look to the salvaged vessel for its share

crew of the towing ship does not have any interest or rights with the remuneration pursuant to the contract

salvor takes possession and may retain possession until he is paid

tower has no possessory lien; only an action for recovery of sum of money

court has power to reduce the amount of remuneration if unconscionable

court has no power to change amount in towage even if unconscionable

 Carriage of Goods by Sea Act

  1.       When Applicable:
    1.       contracts for the carriage of goods
    2.       by sea
    3.       to and from Philippine ports
    4.       in foreign trade
  2.       Notice of Loss or damage must be given in writing to the carrier or his agent at the port of discharge or at the time of the removal of the goods into the custody of the person entitled to delivery.  If the loss or damage is not apparent, the notice must be given within 3 days of delivery.  However, the carrier shall be discharged from all liability in respect of loss or damage of goods unless suit is brought within 1 year after delivery of the goods or the date when the goods should have been delivered.  Notice of loss, if not given, that fact shall not affect or prejudice the right of the shipper to bring suit within the 1 year prescriptive period.

 Warsaw Convention

  1.       When Applicable:
    1.       international transport by air
    2.       transport of persons, baggage, or goods
  2.       Liabilities under the Convention:
    1.       damage sustained in the event of the death or wounding of a passenger taking place on board the aircraft or in the course of any of the operations of embarking or disembarking
    2.       loss or damage to any check baggage or goods sustained during the transport by air
    3.       delay in the transport by air of passengers, baggage, or goods
  • Enumeration of causes of action as above stated is not an exclusive list. (Northwest Airlines vs. Cancer)
  1.       Meaning of Transport by Air – period during which the baggage or goods are in charge of the carrier, whether in an airport or on board an aircraft, or in the case of landing outside an airport, in any place whatsoever
  2.       Action for damages must be brought at the option of the plaintiff, either:
    1.       before the court of the domicile of the carrier;
    2.       court of principal place of business of carrier;
    3.       court where he has a place of business through which the contract has been made;
    4.       before the court at the place of destination
  3.       Convention provides for a limitation of liability:
    1.       for each passenger – limited to 125,000 francs
    2.       for goods and checked in baggage – limited to 250 francs per kilogram
    3.       for hand carry – limited to 5,000 francs per passenger
  • When can you not avail of this limitation?

(1)    willful misconduct

(2)    default amounting to willful misconduct

(3)    accepting passengers without ticket

(4)    accepting goods without airway bill or baggage without baggage chec

  1.       The right to damages shall be extinguished if an action is not brought within 2 years from the date of arrival at the destination, or from the date on which the aircraft ought to have arrived, or from the date on which the transportation stopped.
  2.       Notice requirement:  damage to baggage :  within 3 days from receipt

damage to goods:  within 7 days from receipt

delay:  within 21 days from receipt

  • Failure to file written notice, no action shall lie against the carrier, save in the case of fraud on his part.
  1.       Notice Requirements:

 

COGSA

Code of Commerce

Warsaw Convention

loss/damage apparent

protest at time of receipt of goods

protest at time of receipt of goods

 

loss/damage not apparent

protest within 3 days from delivery

protest within 24 hours after receipt

 

damage of baggage

   

protest within 3 days from receipt

damage of goods

   

within 7 days from receipt

delay

   

within 21 days from receipt

 Public Service Act

  1.       Every person that may own, operate, manage, control in the Philippines, for hire/compensation with general/limited clientele whether permanent, occasional, accidental, and done for a general business purpose any common carrier, shipyard, electric light, heat and power and public utility.
  2.       Public Utility – business or service engaged in regularly supplying the public with some commodity or service of public consequence such as electricity, gas, water, transportation, telephone or telegraph service.
  3.       Prior Operator Rule – before permitting a new operator to invade the territory of another already established, the prior operator must be given an opportunity to extend its service to meet the public needs in the matter of transportation.
  4.       Prior Applicant Rule – presupposes a situation where two interested persons apply for a CPC in the same community over which no person has yet been granted a CPC to operate.  If both applicants equal, then the applicant who applied first will be given the CPC.
  5.      Distinctions between CPCs and CPCNs

Certificate of Public Convenience

Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity

any authorization to operate a public service issued by the appropriate government agency

issued by the appropriate government agency to a  public service to which any political subdivision has granted a franchise

an authorization issued by the proper government agency for the operation of public services for which no franchise, either municipal or legislative is required by law

an authorization issued by the proper government agency for the operation of public services for which a franchise is required by law

  1.       Requirements of CPC and franchise:
    1.       Filipino citizenship
    2.       financial capacity
    3.       public convenience

 Corporation Law

  1.       Doctrine of Corporate Opportunity – a director is made to account to his corporation, gains and profits from transactions entered into by him/another competing corporation in which he has substantial interest, which should have been a transaction undertaken by the corporation.  This s a breach of fiduciary relationship.
  2.       Doctrine of Piercing the Veil of Corporate Entity – it is to disregard for justifiable reasons by the state the fiction of juridical personality of the corporation separate and distinct from the persons composing it
  3.       De Jure Corporation – corporation formed with all the requirements of law
  4.       De Facto Corporation – corporation defectively formed from a bona fide attempt to incorporate under the existing law and exercises corporate powers
  5.       Corporation by Estoppel – a group of persons which holds itself out as a corporation and enters into a contract with 3rdpersons on the strength of such appearance cannot be permitted to deny its existence in an action under said contract
  6.       Corporation by Prescription – body not lawfully organized as a corporation but has been recognized by immemorial usage as a corporation with rights and duties maintainable by law (ex. Roman Catholic)
  7.       Trust Fund Doctrine – the subscribed capital stock of the corporation is a trust fund for the payment of debts of the corporation which the creditors have the right to look up to satisfy their credits.  Corporations may not dissipate this and the creditors may sue the stockholders directly for their unpaid subscriptions
  8.       Voting Shares
    1.       Founders Shares – given rights and privileges not enjoyed by owners of other stocks; right to vote/be voted in the election of directors shall not exceed 5 years

Non-Voting Shares

  1.       Preferred Shares – issued only with par value; given preference in distribution of assets in liquidation and in payment of dividends and other preferences stated in the articles of incorporation
  2.       Redeemable Shares – expressly provided in articles; have to be purchased/taken up upon expiration of period of said shares purchased whether or not there is unrestricted retained earnings
  3.       Treasury Stocks – stocks previously issued and fully paid for and reacquired by the corporation through lawful means (purchase, donation, etc.)
  4.       Exceptions where holders of non-voting shares may vote:
    1.       amendments of articles of incorporation
    2.       adoption/amendment of by-laws
    3.       increase/decrease of bonded indebtedness
    4.       increase/decrease of capital stock
    5.       sale/disposition of all/substantially all corporate property
    6.         merger/consolidation of corporation
    7.       investment of funds in another corporation/another business purpose
    8.       corporate dissolution
  5.   Preferred Cumulative Participating Share of Stock – share entitling its holder to preference in the payment of dividends ahead of common stockholders and to be paid the dividends ahead of common stockholders and to be paid the dividends due for prior years and to participate further with common stockholders in dividend declarations
  6.   Promotion Stock for Services Rendered Prior to Incorporation Escrow Stock – stock deposited with a 3rdperson to be delivered to stockholder/assignor after complying with certain conditions – usually payment of full subscription price
  7.   Over-issued Stock – stock issued in excess of authorized capital stock; null and void
  8.   Watered Stock – stock issued gratuitously, money/property less than par value, services less than par value, dividends where no surplus profits exist
  9.   Certificate of Stock – written acknowledgment by the corporation of the stockholder’s interest in the corporation.  It is the personal property and may be mortgaged/pledged.  Transfer binds the corporation when it is recorded in the corporate books.  A stockholder who does not pay his subscription is not entitled to the issue of a stock certificate.  The total par value of the stocks subscribed by him should first be paid.
  10.   Chattel mortgage of shares registered with the Registrar of Deeds need not be registered in corporate books to bind third parties because corporate books only cover absolute transfers.  But the pledgee/mortgagee may not have voting rights unless stated in the contract and registered in the corporate name.
  11.   Methods of Collection of Unpaid Subscription
    1.       call, delinquency and sale at public auction of delinquent shares
    2.       ordinary civil action
    3.       collection from cash dividends and other amounts due to stockholders if allowed by by-laws/agreed to by him
  12.   A corporation can reacquire stocks in the following cases:
    1.       eliminate fractional shares
    2.       corporate indebtedness arising from unpaid subscriptions
    3.       purchase delinquent shares
    4.       exercise of appraisal right
  13.   Right of Appraisal
    1.       amending articles, changing, restricting, enlarging stockholder’s rights/extending, shortening corporate life
    2.       sale/disposition of all/substantially all of corporate assets
    3.       merger and consolidation
    4.       investment of funds in another corporation/for a different purpose
  14.   Grounds for Rejection of Registration
    1.       not in prescribed form
    2.       purpose illegal, inimical
    3.       treasurer’s affidavit false
    4.       non-compliance with required Filipino stock ownership
  15.   Corporation must organize within 2 years from issuance of certificate of incorporation.

     How to organize?

  1.       adoption of by-laws
  2.       election of Board of Directors
  3.       election of officers

But from issuance of certificate, it acquires juridical personality

  1.   Merger – one corporation absorbs the other and remains in existence while the other is dissolved
  2.   Consolidation – a new corporation is created and the consolidating corporations are extinguished
  3.   Theory of General Capacity – a corporation is said to hold such powers as are not prohibited/withheld from it by general law
  4.   Theory of Special Capacity – the corporation cannot exercise powers except those expressly/impliedly given
  5.   Concession Theory – a group of persons wanting to create a corporation will have to execute documents and comply with requirements set by the state before being given corporate personality; merely a privilege; state may provide causes for which the privilege may be withdrawn
  6.   Acts requiring majority vote of stockholder:
    1.       filing of issue value of no par value share
    2.       adoption, amendment, repeal of by-laws
    3.       compensation and other per diems for directors
  7.   Where similar acts have been approved by the directors as a matter of general practice, custom and policy, the general manager may bind the company even without formal authorization of the board of directors
  8.   Powers of stockholders:
    1.       a direct participation in management – where his vote is needed to approve certain corporate actions
    2.       indirect participation in management to vote or remove directors
    3.       proprietary rights
    4.       remedial rights
  9.   Voting Trust Agreement – an agreement between a group of stockholders and trustee for a term not exceeding 5 years in which control over the stocks is lodged in the trustee.  The purpose is for controlling the voting.
    1.       in writing, notarized and filed with the SEC and the corporation
    2.       period not exceeding 5 years
    3.       cannot be entered into to circumvent the laws against monopolies, illegal combinations in restraint of trade in fraud
  10.   Cumulative Voting – the number of votes that a shareholder’s number of shares multiplied by the number of directors may give all said votes to one candidate or he may distribute them as he may deem fit.  Cumulative voting is a matter of right in a stock corporation.  In a non-stock corporation, it cannot be utilized unless allowed by the by-laws/articles
  11.   The power of removal of directors that may be exercised with or without cause cannot apply to the director representing the minority shareholders.  He may only be removed with cause.
  12.   General Rule:  If surplus profits exceed the requirements the corporation shall declare dividends.  This is compulsory if the surplus is equal/or more than the paid-up capital.

Exceptions:

  1.       justified by approved expansion projects
  2.       prohibited by creditor to declare dividends
  3.       retention is necessary under existing circumstances
  4.   Business Judgment Rule – decisions made by a corporation’s management body shall not be interfered with even by the courts unless such acts are oppressive/unconscionable as to violate the rights of the minority
  5.   Individual Suit – one brought to assert a right of a stockholder peculiar to himself
  6.   Representative Suit – brought by the stockholder in his own behalf and in behalf of other stockholders similarly situated, having common cause against the corporation
  7.   Derivative Suit – brought by a stockholder for and in behalf of the corporation to protect/vindicate corporate rights after he has exhausted intra-corporate remedies

Requisites:

  1.       cause of action in favor of the corporation
  2.       refusal of corporation to sue
  3.       injury to the corporation
  • Although corporations dissolved have 3 years to wind up, they can convey their properties to a trustee who can continue the suit beyond the 3 year period.  The lawyer who handled the case in the trial court may be considered as trustee for the dissolved corporation with respect to the matter in litigation only even if no appointment was extended to him. (Selano vs. CA)
  • In a case filed before dissolution, it may continue even beyond the 3 year period until final determination of litigation.  Otherwise, the corporation in liquidation would lose what justly belongs to them/be exempt from payment of obligations because of a technicality.
  1.   Foreign Corporations
    1.       Doing Business – continuity of commercial dealings incident to prosecution of purpose and object of the organization. Isolated, occasional or casual transactions do not amount to engaging in business.  But where the isolated act is not incidental/casual but indicates the foreign corporation’s intention to do other business, said single act constitutes engaging in business in the Philippines
    2.       Instances when unlicensed foreign corporations can sue:

(1)    isolated transactions

(2)    action to protect good name, goodwill, and reputation of a foreign corporation

(3)    contracts provide that Phil. Courts will be venue to controversies

(4)    license subsequently granted enables foreign corporation to sue on contracts executed before the grant of the license

(5)    recovery of misdelivered property

(6)    where the unlicensed foreign corporation has a domestic corporation

  1.   Religious Corporations
    1.       Corporation Sole – special form of corporation; associated with the clergy and consists of 1 person only and his successors; incorporated by law giving them legal capacity and advantage
    2.       Close Corporations – one whose articles provide that its shares shall not be held by more than 20 persons; its issued stock shall be subject to one or more restrictions on transfer and shall not be listed in any stock exchange/make public offering
    3.       Non-stock Corporation – one where no part of its income is distributable to its members and shall be used in furtherance of the purpose of which it was organized
  2.   SEC Jurisdiction
    1.       original and exclusive jurisdiction

(1)    fraudulent devices and schemes employed by directors detrimental to public interest

(2)    intra-corporate disputes and with the state in relation to their franchise and right to exist as such

(3)    controversies in the election, appointment of directors, trustees, etc.

(4)    petition to be declared in a state of suspension of payments

  1.       Grounds for Suspension/Revocation of Certificate of Registration

(1)    fraud in procuring registration

(2)    serious misrepresentation as to objectives of corporation

(3)    refusal to comply with lawful order of SEC

(4)    continuous inoperation for at least 5 years

(5)    failure to file by-laws within the required period

(6)    failure to file reports

(7)    other similar grounds

Revised Securities Act

(Material on the Securities Regulation Code of 2000 to follow)

  1.       General Rule:  All securities before being offered for sale/actual sale to the public must first be registered and have the proper permit.

Exception:

  1.       exempt securities
  2.       securities emanating from exempt transactions
  3.       Exempt Securities
    1.       issued by the government subdivisions/instrumentalities
    2.       issued by foreign government which the Philippines has diplomatic relations
    3.       issued by receiver/trustee of an insolvent approved by the court
    4.       issued by building and loan association
    5.       issued by receiver/trustee of an insolvent approved by the court
    6.         policy of insurance issued by insurance corporation supervised by the insurance commission
    7.       security/right/interest in real property including subdivision lot/condominium supervised by the Ministry of Human Settlements
    8.       pension plans regulated by BIR/Insurance Commission
  4.       Exempt Transactions
    1.       judicial sale by execution, etc. in insolvency
    2.       sale of pledged property/foreclosed property to liquidate an obligation
    3.       isolated transactions on securities done by owner/agent
    4.       stock transfers emanating from mergers and consolidations
    5.       pre-incorporation subscription
    6.         securities issued by public service operator to broaden equity base
  5.       Grounds for Rejection of Registration
    1.       application incomplete/untruthful/omits to state a material fact
    2.       issuer/registrant insolvent, violated code/ SEC rules, engages in fraudulent transactions
    3.       issuer’s business not sound
    4.       officer, director, stockholders of issuers is disqualified
    5.       issue would prejudice the public
  6.       Grounds for Revocation
    1.       issuer insolvent
    2.       violated of Code/SEC rules
    3.       fraudulent transaction
    4.       dishonesty by issuer/misrepresented prospectus
    5.       does not conduct business in accordance with law
  7.       Acts Prohibited
    1.       manipulation of security prices
    2.       manipulation of deceptive devices
    3.       artificial measures of price control
    4.       fraudulent transactions
    5.       insider trading
    6.         false prospectus, communications, reports

 Secrecy if Back Deposits

  1.       Deposits in banks, including government banks, may not be inquired into by any person, except:
    1.       if depositor agrees in writing
    2.       impeachment cases
    3.       by court order in cases of bribery and dereliction of duty against public officials
    4.       deposit is subject of litigation
    5.       anti-graft cases
    6.         general and special examination of bank order of the Monetary Board of bank fraud or serious irregularity
    7.       re-examination made by an independent auditor hired by a bank to conduct its regular trust

Laws on Intellectual Creation

Copyright

  1.       What Works are not Protected:
    1.       any idea, procedure, system, method or operation, concept, principle, discovery, or mere data as such, even if they are expressed, explained, illustrated or embodied in a work; news of the day or other miscellaneous facts, having the character of mere items of press information, or any official text of a legislative, administrative or legal nature as well as any official translation thereof
    2.       works of the government
    3.       statutes, rules, and regulations of government agencies and offices
    4.       speeches, lectures, sermons, addresses and dissertations, pronounced or rendered in courts of justices or nay administrative agencies in deliberative assemblies and meetings of public character
  2.       Fair Use of a Copyrighted Work is not Infringement
    1.       for criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, research, scholarship, and similar purposes
    2.       decompilation:  the reproduction of the code and translation of the forms of the computer program with other programs
  3.       Factors to Consider in Determining Fair Use:
    1.       purpose and character of the use, including whether such  use is of a commercial nature or for no profit or educational purposes
    2.       nature of the copyrighted work
    3.       amount and substantiality of the portion used in relation to the copyrighted work as a whole
    4.       effect of use upon the potential market for a value of the copyrighted work
  4.       Terms of the Protection
    1.       copyrighted work:  lifetime of creator plus 50 years after death (to be computed on the 1stday of January of the year following the death)
    2.       performances not incorporated in recordings:  50 years from end of year in which the performance took place
    3.       sound or image and sound recordings and performances incorporated therein:  50 years from end of the year in which the recording took place
    4.       broadcasts:  20 years from the date the broadcast took place
  5.       Remedies for Infringement
    1.       injunction
    2.       actual damages, including legal costs and other expenses, as he may have incurred due to the infringement as well as the profits the infringer may have made due to such infringement
    3.       impounding of articles during pendency of the action
    4.       destruction of all infringing copies and/or devices
    5.       moral and exemplary damages
  6.       Criminal Penalties
    1.       imprisonment of 1 to 3 years plus fine of P50,000 to P150,000 for the first offense
    2.       imprisonment of 3 years and 1 day to 6 years plus fine ranging from P150,000 to P500,000 for the 2ndoffense
    3.       imprisonment of 6 years and 1 day to 9 years plus fine of P500,000 to P1,000,000 for the 3rd/subsequent offenses

IN ALL CASES, subsidiary imprisonment in cases of insolvency

  1.       Presumptions:
    1.       Presumption of copyright in the work of other subject matter to which the action related
    2.       Plaintiff is presumed to be the owner of the copyright
    3.       The natural person whose name is indicated on a work in the usual manner as the author shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be the author of the work.  This is applicable even if the name is a pseudonym, where the pseudonym leaves no doubt as to the identity of the author.
  2.       Prescription:  No damages may be recovered after 4 years from time the cause of action arose.

 Patents

  1.       Patentable Inventions – any technical solution of a problem in any field o human activity that is new, involve an inventive step and is industrially applicable shall be patentable.  It may be or may relate to as product, or process or an improvement of any of the foregoing.
  2.       Non-Patentable Inventions
    1.       discoveries, scientific theories and mathematical methods
    2.       schemes, rules and methods of performing mental acts, playing games or doing business, and programs for computers
    3.       methods for treatment of the human or animal body by surgery or therapy and diagnostic methods practiced on the human or animal body

Exception:  products and composition for use in any of these methods

  1.       plant varieties or animal breeds or essentially biological process for the production of plants and animals

Exception:  micro-organisms and non-biological and micro-biological processes

  1.       aesthetic creations
  2.         contrary to public order or morality
  3.       Requisites of Patentability
    1.       new, novelty
    2.       involves an inventive step;
    3.       is industrially applicable
  4.       Novelty

The novelty requirement in the Code is absolute.  Thus, an invention is not considered new if it forms part of a prior art.  A prior art consists of:

  1.       anything which has been made available to the public anywhere in the world before the filing date or the priority date of the application, or
  2.       the whole contents of an application for a patent, utility model, or industrial design registration, published in the IPO gazette, filed or effective in the Philippines, with a filing or priority date that is earlier than the filing or priority date of the application, provided that the application which has validly claimed the filing date of an earlier application (priority date) is prior art with effect as of the filing date of such earlier application, and provided further, that the applicant and the inventor identified in both applications are not one and the same
  3.       Inventive Step – an invention involves an inventive step, if having regard to the prior art, it is not obvious to a person skilled in the art at the time of the filing date of priority date of the application claiming the invention
  4.       Industrial Applicability – an invention is considered industrially applicable if it can be produced and used in the industry
  5.       The First-to-File System – if 2 or more persons have made the invention separately and independently of each other, the right to the patent belongs to the person who filed an application for such invention, or where 2 or more applications are filed for the same invention, the right of the patent belongs to the person who has the earliest filing date or the earliest priority date

Under this system, the patent is granted to the inventor who filed his patent application earlier than others thus simplifying the determination of who is entitled to own the patent.

The First-to-File System increases the rights of the inventor by:

  1.       guaranteeing the confidentiality of the application prior to its publication
  2.       giving the inventor inchoate rights against an infringer after the publication of the application and before the grant of the patent and
  3.       expanding the rights of the inventor to institute cancellation proceedings for the duration of the term of the patent.  Cancellation proceedings may be filed at any time during the term of the patent.

Under this system, the applicant declared by final court order as having the right to the patent may:

  1.       prosecute the application as his own application in place of the original applicant
  2.       file a new patent application in respect of the same invention
  3.       request that the application be refused or
  4.       seek the cancellation of the patent, if one has already been issued
  5.       What is the difference between novelty in patents and originality in copyright?

Novelty in Patents – even if you do not know of any previous creation, as long as a patent on the same creation has already been published anywhere in the world, you cannot claim novelty.  No access tot he other creation is no defense.

Originality in Copyright – even if there is same creation, as long as you do not copy your own creation, it is still considered an original creation.  No access to the previous creation is a defense.

  1.       Non-Prejudicial Disclosure

The disclosure of information contained in the application during the 12 months preceding the filing date or the priority date of the application shall not prejudice the applicant on the ground of lack of novelty if such disclosure was made by (a) inventor; (b) a patent office and the information was contained

  1.   Term of Patent – 20 years from the filing date of the application
  2.   Grounds for Compulsory Licensing:
    1.       national emergency or other circumstances of extreme urgency
    2.       where public interest, national security, health or the development of other vital sectors of the national economy as determined by the appropriate agency of the government so requires
    3.       where a judicial or administrative body has determined that the manner of exploitation by the owner of the patent or his licensee is anti-competitive
    4.       in case of public non-commercial use of the patent by the patentee, without satisfactory reason
    5.       if not being worked in the Philippines on a commercial scale
  3.   In case of Compulsory Licensing of Patents involving Semi-conductor Technology, the license may be granted only in case of public non-commercial use or to remedy a practice determined after judicial or administrative process to be anti-competitive
  4.   Utility Models – an invention qualifies for registration as a utility model if it is new and industrially applicable

- no inventive step required for registration

- no search and examination required

  1.   Term Protection – 7 years after the filing date of application without possibility of renewal
  2.   Industrial Design – any composition of lines or colors or any 3 dimensional form, whether or not associated with lines or colors

Industrial Designs essentially dictated by technical or functional considerations to obtain a technical result or those that are contrary to public order, health or morals shall not be protected

  1.   Term of Protection – 5 years from filing date of application, renewable for not more than 2 consecutive periods of 5 years each

 Insolvency Law

  1.      Distinguish Suspension of Payment and Insolvency

Suspension of Payment

Insolvency

debtor has enough assets to meet liabilities but cannot meet them as they fall due

debtor has more liabilities than assets

always initiated by debtor

initiated by creditors/other persons if involuntary; initiated by debtor if voluntary

  1.       Fraudulent Preference – any act of insolvent which gives rise/has tendency to give preference to a creditor to the assets of the insolvent prejudicial to the right of other creditors of said insolvent
  2.       Effect on Actions Upon Adjudication of Insolvency
    1.       suits pending in court

(1)    secured obligations suspended until assignee appointed

(2)    unsecured obligations terminated except to fix amount of obligation

(3)    foreclosure suits pending continue

  1.       suit not yet filed – cannot be filed anymore, but claims may be presented to assignee
  2.       Debts and Obligations not Affected by Discharge of Insolvent
    1.       assessments due to national and local government
    2.       debts due to fraud/embezzlement
    3.       debts in which he is bound solidarily
    4.       alimony
    5.       corporate debts
    6.         debts not included in the schedule submitted by debtor

Chattel Mortgage Law

  1.       The law primarily governs chattel mortgage.  Provisions on pledge of NCC in so far as not in conflict with CML also govern chattel mortgages.
  2.       Chattel Mortgage may be rescinded for being in fraud of creditors.
  3.       Growing fruits are covered by chattel mortgage but they may not be pledged.
  4.       Machinery placed on plant or building owned by another can be the object of chattel mortgage.
  5.       General Rule:  Chattel Mortgage cannot cover debts subsequently contracted.
  6.       Rules:  Chattel Mortgage cannot cover debts subsequently contracted
    1.       registered in place where mortgagor resides and where property (chattel) is located.  If mortgagor resides abroad, register in place where property is located.
    2.       Motor Vehicles:  register also in Land Transportation Office
    3.       Shares of Stock:  place of domicile of corporation and shareholder.  No need for notation in books of corporation
    4.       Vessels:  Phil. Coastguard
  7.       To be valid against 3rdpersons:
    1.       affidavit of good faith
    2.       contract must be registered
  8.       General Rule: In Chattel Mortgage, there is recovery of deficiency judgment.

  Exception:  when Recto Law applies

  1.      Requisites of CML:
    1.       constituted to secure the fulfillment of principal obligation
    2.       mortgagor is absolute owner of the thing mortgaged
    3.       persons constituting the mortgage have the free disposal of the property and in the absence thereof, they be legally authorized for the purpose
    4.       recorded to bind 3rdpersons
  2.   Formal Requisites of CM:
    1.       substantial compliance with form in Sec. 5 of CML
    2.       signed by at least 2 witnesses
    3.       must contain an affidavit of good faith
    4.       certificate of oath (notarial acknowledgment)
  3.   Affidavit of Good Faith – where the parties severally swear that the mortgage is made for the purpose of securing the obligation specified and for no other purpose and that the same is a just and valid obligation and not one entered into for fraud

- property given in CM must be described to enable the parties or any other person after reasonable inquiry and investigation to identify it

  1.   Future property may not be covered by CM but when such property is a:
    1.       renewal of, or in substitution for goods on hand when the mortgage was executed, or
    2.       purchased with proceeds (not of your own money) of said goods, said property may be covered by CM
  2.   Criminal Acts – removal of chattel to another city or province without written consent of mortgagee, selling property already pledged, or mortgaged without written consent of mortgagee
  3.   A chattel mortgage may be foreclosed judicially or extra-judicially, in the latter case, before a notary or sheriff, or creditor or mortgagee when stipulated, even without need of notice (when mortgagee forecloses)

15.  Pactum Commissorium applies to Chattel Mortgage.

Reference:

Commercial Law Memory Aid

Ateneo Central Bar Operations 2001

Posted in Commercial Law

Leave a comment

Tags: Commercial Law Reviewer - Ateneo

Addendum to Sectrans

DEC 19

Posted by Magz

ADDENDUM TO SECTRANS

PROVISIONS COMMON TO PLEDGE AND MORTGAGE (Art 2085-2123)

PLEDGE (definition) – A contract by virtue of which the debtor delivers to the creditor or to a third person a movable or document evidencing incorporeal rights for the purpose of securing the fulfillment of a principal obligation with the understanding that when the obligation is fulfilled, the thing delivered shall be returned with all its fruits and accessions.

Essential Requisites to Contracts of Pledge and Mortgage

  1. constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation
  2. pledgor or mortgagor be the absolute owner of the thing pledged or mortgaged
  3. the persons constituting the pledge or mortgage have the free disposal of their property, and in the absence thereof, that they be legally authorized for the purpose
  4. cannot exist without a valid obligation
  5. when the principal obligation becomes due, the thing in which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor.
    • third persons not parties to the principal obligation may secure the latter  by pledging or mortgaging their own property
    • but may be constituted to secure fulfillment of a voidable or unenforceable or natural obligation
    • in case of pledge, the thing pledged must be delivered to the creditor or to a third person by common agreement
    • in case of mortgage, as a general rule, the mortgagor retains he possession of the property mortgaged

Kinds of Pledge:

  1. Voluntary or conventional – created by agreement of the parties
  2. Legal -  created by operation of law

Characteristics of Pledge:

  1. real  – perfected   by delivery
  2. accessory  – has no independent existence of its own
  3. unilateral – creates obligation solely on the part of the creditor to return the thing subject upon the fulfillment of the principal obligation
  4. subsidiary – obligation incurred does not arise until the fulfillment of the principal obligation

Cause or Consideration in Pledge

  1. principal obligation – in so far as the pledgor is concerned
  2. compensation stipulated for the pledge or mere liberality of the pledgor – if pledgor is not the debtor

Important Points:

  1. future property cannot be pledged or mortgaged
  2. pledge or mortgage executed by one  who is not the owner of the property pledged or mortgaged is without legal existence and registration cannot validate it.
  3. mortgage of a conjugal property by one of the spouses is valid only as to ½ of the entire property
  4. in case of property covered by Torrens title a mortgagee has the right to rely upon what appears in the certificate of title and does not have to inquire further.
  5. pledgor or mortgagor has free disposal of property
  6. thing pledged or mortgaged  may be alienated.
  7. creditor not required to sue to enforce his credit
  8. pledgor or mortgagor may be third person

PLEDGE

MORTGAGE

Constituted on movables

Constituted on immovables

Property is delivered to the pledgee, or by common consent to a 3rd person

Delivery not necessay

Not valid against 3rd persons unless a description of the thing pledged and  the date of the pledge appear in a  public instrument

Not valid against 3rd persons if not registered

Right of Creditor where Debtor fails to Comply with his Obligation

  1. creditor is merely entitled to move for the sale of the thing pledged or mortgaged with the formalities required by law in order to collect
  2. creditor cannot appropriate to himself the thing nor can he dispose of the same as owner.

Prohibition against pactum commissorium

  1. stipulation is null and void -  stipulation where thing  or mortgaged shall automatically become the property of the creditor in the event of nonpayment of the debt within the term fixed
  2. Requisites of pactum commissorium:
    1. there should be a pledge or mortgage
    2. there should be a stipulation for an automatic appropriation by the creditor of the property in the event of nonpayment
  3. Effect on Security Contract

-nullity of the stipulation does not affect validity and efficacy of the principal  contract.

Permissible Stipulations with regard to pactum commissorium:

  1. subsequent modification of original contract by agreement of parties
  2. subsequent voluntary act of the debtor making cession of property in payment of the debt
  3. promise to assign or sell said property in payment of the obligation if, upon its maturity, it is not paid
  4. authorizing the mortgagee to take possession of the mortgaged premises upon the foreclosure of a mortgage
  5. if after the first and second auctions, the thing is not sold

Important Points:

  1. debtor-owner bears the risk of loss of the property
  2. pledge or mortgage is indivisible:
    1. every portion of the property is answerable for the whole obligation
    2. when several things are pledged or mortgaged, all of them are liable for the totality of the debt. Creditor does not have to divide his action by distributing the debt, among the various things pledged or mortgaged
    3. the debtor’s heir who has paid a part of the debt cannot ask for the proportionate extinction of the pledge or mortgage nor can the creditor’s heir who has received his share of the debt return the pledge or cancel the mortgages if the debt is not yet completely satisfied
    4. EXCEPTIONS  to the rule of INDIVISIBILITY:
  3. where  each one of several things guarantees determinate portion of credit
  4. where only portion of loan was released
  5. where there was failure of consideration
  6. rule that real property, consisting of several lots should be sold separately, applies to sales in execution, and not to foreclosure of mortgages
  7. the mere embodiment of a real estate mortgage and a chattel mortgage in one document does not have the effect of fusing both securities into an indivisible whole
  8. contract of pledge or mortgage may secure all kinds of obligation, be they pure or subject to a suspensive or resolutory condition
  9. a promise to constitute pledge or mortgage creates no real right, only a personal right biding upon the parties, only right of action to compel the fulfillment of the promise but there is no pledge or mortgage yet
  10. under RPC, estafa is committed  by a person  who, pretending to be the owner of any real property, shall convey, sell, encumber or mortgage the same knowing that the real property is encumbered shall dispose of the same as unencumbered. It is essential that fraud or deceit be practiced upon the vendee at the time of the sale.

Provisions Applicable Only to Pledge

  1. transfer of possession to the creditor or to third person by common agreement is essential in pledge

- ACTUAL DELIVERY is important

- CONSTRUCTIVE delivery or symbolic delivery of the key to the warehouse is sufficient to show that the depositary appointed by common  consent of the parties was legally placed in possession.

  1. all movables within commerce of men may be pledged as long as susceptible of possession
  2. incorporeal right, evidenced by:
    1. negotiable instruments;
    2. bills of lading;
    3. shares of stock;
    4. bonds;
    5. warehouse receipts ;and
    6. similar documents

may be pledged. The instruments pledged shall be delivered to the creditor and if negotiable, must be indorsed.

  1. pledge shall take effect against 3rdpersons only if the ff appears in a public instrument:
  2. description of the thing pledged
  3. date of the pledge
  4. shall take care of the thing pledged with the diligence of a good father of a family.
  5. has the right to the reimbursement of the expenses made for its preservationis liable  for its loss or deterioration by reason of fraud, negligence, delay or violation of the terms of the contract, and not due to fortuitous event
  6. may bring the actions which pertain to the owner of the thing in order to recover it from, or defend it against a 3rdperson
  7. cannot use the thing without the authority of the owner, and if he should do so, or misuse the thing, the owner may ask that it be judicially or extra-judicially deposited.
  8. may use the thing if it is necessary for the preservation of the thing
  9. may either claim another thing in pledge or demand immediate payment of the principal obligation if he is deceived on the substance or quality of the thing.
  10. cannot deposit the thing pledged with a third person, unless there is a stipulation authorizing him to do so
  11. is responsible for the acts of his agents or employees with respect to the thing pledged.
  12. has  no right to use the thing or to appropriate the fruits without the authority of the owner can apply the  fruits, income , dividends or interest earned or produced by the thing pledged to the payment of the interest, and thereafter to the principal of his credit. Unless there is stipulation to the contrary, the interest and earnings of the right pledged and in case of animals, their offsprings are included in the pledge.
  13. may cause public sale of the thing pledged if, without fault on his part, there is danger of destruction, impairment or diminution in value of the thing. The proceeds of the auction shall be a security for the principal obligation.
  14. has the responsibility for flaws of the thing pledged.
  15. cannot ask for the return of the thing against the will of the creditor, unless and until he has paid the debt and its interest, with expenses in a proper case
  16. is allowed to substitute  the thing which is in danger of destruction or impairment without any fault on the part of the pledgee, with another thing of the same kind and quality
  17. may require that  the thing be deposited with a 3rdperson if through the negligence or willful act of the pledgee the thing is in danger of being lost or impaired
  18. thing pledged may be alienated by the pledgor or owner only if with the consent of the pledgee. Ownership of the thing pledged is transmitted to the vendee or transferee as soon as the pledgee consents to the alienation, butt he latter shall continue in possession
  19. contract of pledge gives right to the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of a third person to whim it has been delivered, until the debt is paid
  20. creditor :
  21. pledgee:
  22. pledgor :

Extinguishment of Pledge

  • If the thing pledged is returned by the pledgee to the pledgor or owner, pledge is extinguished
  • A statement in writing by the pledgee that he renounces or abandons the pledge is sufficient to extinguish. For t his purpose, neither the acceptance by the pledgor o owner, nor the return of the thing pledged is necessary, the pledgee becoming a depositary.
  • If subsequent to the perfection of the pledge, the thing is in the possession of the pledgor or owner, there is prima facie presumption that the thing has been returned by the pledgee
  • If the thing is in the possession of 3rdperson who has received it from the pledgor or owner after the constitution of the pledge, there is prima facie presumption that the thing has been returned by the pledgee.

Formalities required Sale by a Creditor if credit not paid in due time:

  1. the debt is due and unpaid
  2. the sale must be at a public auction
  3. there must be notice to the pledgor and owner, stating the amount due, and
  4. the sale must be made with the intervention of a notary public the th
    • The pledgee may appropriate the thing if  after the first and second auctions, the thing is not sold.
    • At the public auction, the pledgor or owner may bid.
    • Pledgor or owner  shall have a better right if he should offer the same terms as the highest bidder
    • Pledgee may also bid, but his offer shall not be valid if he is the only bidder. All bids at the public auction shall ofer to pay the purchase price at once.  BIDS MUST BE FOR CASH. If any other bid is accepted, the pledgee is deemed to have received the purchase price, as far as the pledgor or owner is concerned.

Effect of the Sale of the Thing Pledged

  1. extinguishes the principal obligation whether the price of the sale is more or less than the amount due
  2. if  the price is more than  amount due, the debtor is not entitled to the excess unless the contrary is provided
  3. if the price of the sale is less, neither is the creditor entitled to recover the deficiency. Contrary stipulation is void.
  • After public auction, the pledgee shall promptly advise the pledgor or owner of the result.
  • Any third person who has any right in the thing may satisfy the principal obligation as soon as the latter becomes due and demandable.
  • The right of choice given to the pledgee as to which of the things pledged he shall cause to be sold is limited only by stipulation. After sufficient property has been sold to satisfy the obligation plus interest and expenses, no more shall be sold.
  • A 3rdperson who is not a party to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging his own property. He has the same as a guarantor and he cannot be prejudiced by any waiver of defense by the principal obligor

Legal Pledges:

  1. Necessary  expenses shall be refunded to every possessor, but only possessor in good faith may retain the thing until he has been reimbursed.

Useful expenses shall be refunded only to the possessor I n good faith with the same right  of retention, the person who has defeated him in the possession having the option of refunding  the amount of the expenses or of paying the increase in value which the thing may have acquired and by reason thereof (art 546)

  1. He who has executed work upon a movable has a right to retain it by way of pledge until he is paid.  (art 1731)
  2. The agent may retain the things which are the objects of agency until the principal effects the reimbursement and pays the indemnity. (art 1914)
  3. The laborer’s wages shall be a lien on the goods manufactured or the work done (art 1707).

Special Laws apply to pawnshops and establishment which are engaged in making loans secured by pledges. Provisions of the Civil Code shall apply subsidiarily.

REAL MORTGAGE (Arts. 2124-2131) – It is a contract whereby the debtor secures to the creditor the fulfillment of a principal obligation, specially subjecting to such security immovable property or real rights over immovable property in case the principal obligation is not complied with at the time stipulated.

Objects of Real Mortgage

  1. immovables
  2. alienable real rights in accordance with the laws, imposed upon immovables

* future property cannot be object of mortgage.

Important Points:

  1. As a general rule, the mortgagor retains possession of the property he may deliver said property to the mortgagee without altering the nature of the contract of mortgage.
  2. It is not an essential requisite that the principal of the credit bears interest, or that the interest as compensation for the use of the principal and the enjoyment of its fruits be in the form of a certain percent thereof.

Kinds of Mortgage:

  1. voluntary
  2. legal
  3. equitable – one which, although it lacks the proper formalities of a mortgage shows the intention of the parties to make the property as a security for a debt

(provisions governing equitable mortgage – arts 1365, 1450, 1454, 1602, 1603, 1604 and 1607).

Essential Requisites of Mortgage

  1. constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation
  2. pledgor or mortgagor be the absolute owner of the thing pledged or mortgaged
  3. the persons constituting the pledge or mortgage have the free disposal of their property, and in the absence thereof, that they be legally authorized for the purpose
  4. cannot exist without a valid obligation
  5. when the principal obligation becomes due, the thing in which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor.
  6. appears in a public document duly recorded in the Registry of Property to be validly constituted

*legal mortgage – the persons in whose favor the law establishes a mortgage have on other right than to demand the execution and the recording of the document in which the mortgage is formalized.

Incidents of Registration of Mortgage

  1. Mortgagee entitled to registration of mortgage as a matter of right
  2. Proceedings for registration do not determine validity of mortgage or its effect
  3. Registration is without prejudice to better right of third parties
  4. Mortgage deed once duly registered forms part of the records for the registration of the property mortgaged
  5. Mortgage by surviving spouse of his/her undivided share of conjugal property can be registered.

Effect of Invalidity of Mortgage on principal obligation:

  1. principal obligation remains valid
  2. mortgage deed remains as evidence of a personal obligation

Effect of Mortgage:

  1. creates real rights, a lien inseparable from the property mortgaged, enforceable against the whole world
  2. creates merely an encumbrance

Extent of Mortgage

a. the natural accessions

b.to the improvements,

  1.    growing fruits
  2. the rents or income not yet received when the obligation becomes due,

e. to the amount of the indemnity granted or owing to the proprietor from the insurers of the property,

  1.    in virtue of expropriation for public use, with the declarations, amplifications and limitations established by law, whether the estate remains in the possession of the mortgagor, or it passes into the hands of  a third person.

Important Points:

  1. Stipulation in mortgage contract including after-acquired properties is valid.
  2. Attachment of lien is retroactive
  3. Stipulation is necessary for mortgage to secure future advancements

Mortgage is a continuing security until the full amount of advances are paid.

  1. Mortgage credit may be alienated or assigned to a third person, in whole or in part, with the formalities required by law.

a. Alienation or assignment is valid even if not registered. Registration is necessary only to affect 3rd persons.

  1. Creditor may claim from a 3rdperson in possession of the property the payment of the part of the credit secured by the property
  2. Stipulation forbidding the owner from alienating the immovable mortgaged shall be void.

Laws governing Mortgage:

  1. New Civil Code
  2. PD 1952
  3. Revised Administrative Code
  4. RA 4882 , as regards aliens becoming mortgages

Foreclosure of Mortgage -    It is the remedy available to the mortgagee by which he subjects the mortgaged property to the satisfaction of the obligation to secure which the mortgage was given.

Kinds of Foreclosure

  1. judicial
  2. extrajudicial
  • both should be distinguished from execution sale which is governed by Rule 39 of the Rules of Court

Judicial Foreclosure (governed by Rule 68 of Rules of Court)

  1. May be availed of by bringing an action in the proper court which has jurisdiction over the area wherein the real property involved or  apportion thereof is situated
  2. If the  court finds the complaint to be well-founded, it shall order the mortgagor to pay the amount due with interest and other charges within a period of not less than 90 days nor more than 120 days from the entry of judgment.
  3. If the mortgagor fails to pay at time directed, the court, upon motion, shall order the property to be sold to the highest bidder at a public auction.
  4. Upon confirmation of the sale by the  court, also upon motion, it shall operates to divest the rights of all parties to the action and to vest their rights to the purchaser subject to such rights of redemption as may be allowed by law
  5. Before the confirmation, the court retains control of the proceedings.
  6. The proceeds of the sale shall be applied to the payment of the:

a. Costs of the sale;

b.Amount due the mortgagee;

  1.    Claims  of junior encumbrancers or persons holding subsequent mortgages in the order of their priority; and
  2. the balance, if any shall be paid to the mortgagor
  3. Sheriff’s certificate is executed, acknowledged and recorded to complete the foreclosure

Nature of Judicial Foreclosure Proceedings:

  1. quasi in rem action
  2. foreclosure is only the result or incident of the failure to pay debt
  3. survives death of mortgagor

Extrajudicial Foreclosure (governed by Act No, 3135, as amended)

  1. express authority to sell is given to the mortgagee.
  2. authority is not extinguished by death of mortgagor or mortgagee
  3. public sale should be made after proper notice
  4. surplus proceeds of foreclosure sale belong to the mortgagor
  5. debtor has the right to redeem the property sold within 1 year from and after the date of sale
  6. remedy of party aggrieved by foreclosure is a petition to set aside sale and cancellation of writ of possession.

Right of Mortgage to Recover Deficiency

  1. Mortgagee is entitled to recover deficiency
  2. If the deficiency is embodied in a judgment, it is referred to as deficiency judgment.
  3. Action for recovery of deficiency may be filed even during redemption period.
  4. Action to recover prescribes after 10 years from the time the right of action accrues.

Nature of Power of Foreclosure by Extrajudicial Sale

  1. conferred for mortgagee’s protection
  2. an ancillary stipulation
  3. a prerogative of the mortgagee

Note: Stipulation of upset price in mortgage contract is void.

Effect of Inadequacy of Price in Foreclosure Sale

  1. Where there is right to redeem

a. GR: Inadequacy of price is immaterial because the judgment debtor may redeem the property

b.EXCEPTION: the price is so inadequate as to shock the conscience of the court taking into consideration the peculiar circumstances

  1. Property may be sold for less than its fair market value upon the theory that the lesser the price the easier for the owner to redeem.
  2. The value of the mortgaged property has no bearing on the bid price at the public auction, provided that the public auction was regularly and honestly conducted.

Waiver of Security by Creditor

  1. Mortgagee may waive right to foreclose his mortgage and maintain a personal action for recovery of theindebetness.
  2. Mortgagee cannot have both remedies

Note: Foreclosure retroacts to the date of registration of mortgage

Redemption – It is a transaction by which the mortgagor reacquires the property which may have passed under the mortgage or divests the property of the lien which the mortgage may have created.

Kinds of Redemption

  1. equity of redemption

-    right of the mortgagor to redeem the mortgaged property after his default in the performance of the conditions of the mortgage but before the sale of the mortgaged property or confirmation of sale

  1. right of redemption

-    right of the mortgagor to redeem the property within a certain period after it was soldfor the satisfaction of the debt.

Equity of Redemption

  1. exercised before confirmation of sale
  2. second mortgagee acquires only the equity of redemption vested in the mortgagor
  3. taking physical possession not necessary for levy

can be levied upon by means of writ of execution.

  1. remedy of mortgagee to obtain possession is to bring a civil action either to recover possession as a preliminary step to the sale or to obtain judicial foreclosure.

Right of Redemption

  1. may be exercised within 1 year from and after the date of registration of the certificate of sale with the appropriate Registry of Deeds.
  2. if no redemption is made within prescribed period, the purchaser has the absolute right to a writ of possession which is the final process to consummate extrajudicial foreclosure
  3. effect of seasonable redemption is not to recover ownership which was never lost  but the elimination from his title the lien created by the levy or attachment.
  4. sale by the mortgagor to a 3rdperson during redemption period transfers only the right to redeem the property and the right to possess, use and enjoy the same during said period.
  5. if sale to a 3rdperson is not registered and made without the consent of the mortagee, buyer was not validly substituted as a debtor thus has no right to redeem
  6. if extrajudicial foreclosure if effected with fraud, it is null nad void ab initio.

CHATTEL MORTGAGE (Arts. 2140-2141) – It is a contract by virtue of which a  personal property is recorded in the Chattel Mortgage Register as security for the performance of an obligation.

Note: If the movable, instead of being recorded is delivered to the creditor, it is pledge and not chattel mortgage.

CHATTEL MORTGAGE

PLEDGE

Involves movable property

Involves movable property

Delivery of the personal property is NOT necessary

Delivery of the personal property is necessary

Registration is necessary for validity

Registration is NOT necessary for validity

Procedure : Sec 14 of Act no 1508, as amended

Procedure: Art 2112 of Civil Code

If the property is foreclosed, the excess over the amount due goes to the debtor

If the property is sold, the debtor is not entitled to the to the excess UNLESS it is otherwise  agreed or in case of legal pledge

Creditor is entitled to deficiency from the debtor EXCEPT if it is a security for the purchase of personal property in installments

Creditor is not entitled to recover deficiency notwithstanding any stipulation to the contrary

Laws governing Chattel Mortgage:

  1. Chattel Mortgage Law, Act No. 1508, as amended
  2. Civil Code
  3. Revised Administrative Code
  4. Revised Penal Code
  5. Ship Mortgage Decree of 1978 (PD 1521) governs mortgage of vessels of domestic ownership

Important points:

The provisions of Civil Code on pledge shall be applicable to chattel mortgage only insofar as they are not in conflict with the Chattel Mortgage Law

 

Subject matter of Chattel mortgage must be described and identified.

Extent of Chattel Mortgage – It is deemed to cover only the property described and not like or substituted property thereafter acquired by the mortgagor and placed in the same depositary as the property originally mortgaged, anything in the mortgage to the contrary notwithstanding.

Effect of Registration

  1. creates real rights
  2. adds nothing to mortgage

Note: Registration of assignment of mortgage is not required

Right of Redemption

  1. when the condition of a chattel mortgage is broken, the ff may redeem:

a. mortgagor;

b.person holding a subsequent mortgage;

  1.    subsequent attaching creditor.
  2. an attaching creditor who so redeems shall be subrogated to the rights of the mortgagee and entitled to foreclose the mortgage in the same manner that the mortgagee could foreclose it
  3. the redemption is made by paying or delivering o the mortgagee the amount due on such mortgage and the costs and expenses incurred by such breach of condition before the sale.

Foreclosure of Chattel Mortgage

  1. public sale
  2. private sale – there is nothing illegal, immoral or against public order in an agreement for the private sale of the personal properties covered by chattel mortgage.

Period to Foreclosure

  1. After 30 days from the time of the condition is broken
  2. The 30-day period is the minimum period after violation of the mortgage condition for the creditor to cause the sale at public auction with at least 10 days notice to the mortgagor and posting of public notice of time, place, and purpose of such sale, and is a period of grace for the mortgagor, to discharge the obligation.
  3. After the sale at public auction, the right of redemption is no longer available to the mortgagor.

Civil Action to Recover Credit

  1. independent action not required
  2. mortgage lien deemed abandoned by obtaining a personal judgment

Right of Mortgage to Recover Deficiency

  1. where mortgage foreclosed

- Creditor may maintain action for deficiency although Chattel Mortgage Law is silent on this point. Reason is chattel mortgage is only given as a security and not as payment of the debt.

  1. where mortgage constituted as security for purchase of personal property payable in installments

- No deficiency judgment can be asked and any agreement to the contrary shall be void

  1. where mortgaged property subsequently attached and sold

- Mortgagee is entitle to deficiency judgment in an action for specific performance.

Application of Proceeds of Sale

  1. costs and expenses of keeping and sale
  2. payment of the obligation
  3. claims of persons holding subsequent mortgages in their order
  4. balance, if any, shall be paid to the mortgagor, or person holding under him.

CONCURRENCE AND PREFERENCE OF CREDITS (Arts. 2236-2251) –

Concurrence of credit – It implies possession by two or more creditors of equal right or privileges over the same property or all of the property of a debtor.

Preference of Credit – It is the right held by a creditor to be preferred in the payment of his claim above other out of the debtor’s assets.

General Provisions:

  1. the debtor is liable with all his property, present and future, for the fulfillment of his obligations, subjects to exemptions provided by law

-    exempt property:

  1. present property
  2. family home (Arts 152, 153 & 155, NCC)
  3. right to receive support as well as money or property obtained by such support shall not be levied  upon on attachment or execution (Art 205, NCC)
  4. Sec 13, Rule 39, Rules of Court
  5. Sec 118, the public Land Act,( CA No. 141, as amended)
    1. future property

- a debtor who obtains a discharge from his debts on account of insolvency, is not liable for the unsatisfied claims of his creditors with said property (Secs. 68 & 69, Insolvency Law, Act No. 1956

  1. property in custodia legis and of public dominion
  2. insolvency shall be governed by the Insolvency Lae (Act No. 1956, as amended)
  3. Exemption of conjugal property or absolute community or property provided that:

a. Partnership or community subsists

b.Obligations of the insolvent spouse have not redounded to the benefit of the family

  1. if there is co-ownership, and one of the co-owners is the insolvent debtor, his undivided share or interest in the property shall be possessed by the assignee in insolvency proceedings because it is part of his assets
  2. property held by the insolvent debtor as a trustee of an express or implied trust, shall be excluded from the insolvency proceedings.

Classification of Credits

1. Special preferred credits (Arts 2241 & 2242 of NCC)

a. considered as mortgages or pledges of real or personal property or liens within the purview of legal provisions governing insolvency

b.taxes due to the State shall first be satisfied

2. Ordinary preferred credits (Art 2244)

- preferred in the order given by law

3. Common credits (Art 2245)

-    credits of any other kind or class, or by any other right or title not comprised in Arts 2241-2244 shall enjoy  no preference.

Order of Preference of Credit

  1. Credits which enjoy preference with respect to specific movables, exclude all others to the extent of the value of the personal property to which the preference refers.
  2. If there are 2 or more credits with respect to the same specific movable property, they shall be satisfied pro rata, after the payment of duties, taxes and fees due the State or any subdivision thereof
  3. Those credits which enjoy preference in relation to specific real property or real rights, exclude all others to the extent of the value of the immovable or real right to which the preference refers.
  4. If there are 2 or more credits with respect to the same specific real property or real rights, they shall be satisfied pro rata, after the payment of the taxes and assessment of the taxes and assessments upon the immovable property or real right.
  5. The excess, if any, after the payment of the credits which enjoy preference with respect to specific property, real or personal, shall be added to the free property which the debtor may have, for the payment of other credits.
  6. Those credits which do not enjoy any preference with respect to specific property, and those which enjoy preference, as to the amount not paid, shall be satisfied according to the following rules:

-    order established by Art 2244

-    common credits referred to in Art 2245 shall be paid pro rata regardless of dates.

Reference: 

Security Transactions Memory Aid Ateneo Central Bar Operations